Category: General

The Country That First Recognized Indonesia’s Independence – In order for a country to be independent, it
must receive recognition for independence from other countries, as well as during the process of
independence from the state of Indonesia. As Sinaumed’s already knows, the Indonesian state
announced its independence on August 17, 1945 and at the same time became the day Indonesia was inaugurated
as a sovereign and independent country.

Turning a country into a sovereign nation is not an easy thing. As we have said above, that in
order to become an independent and sovereign country, a country must gain recognition. The
acknowledgment is also divided into two types, namely de facto acknowledgment and de jure acknowledgment.
A country that wants to be independent and sovereign must get both recognition from other
countries.

In the history of Indonesian independence, the Egyptian state became the first country to grant recognition
of independence to Indonesia as an independent and sovereign country. This fact is stated in a
book written by Lukman Hakiem entitled Caring for Indonesia. The State of Egypt gave this
recognition after the text of the proclamation was proclaimed by the First President of Indonesia, Ir
Soekarno.

According to the information we got, the other countries that gave recognition of independence to the
Indonesian state after the Egyptian state were the Syrian state, followed by the Vatican State, the Lebanese
State, and the Yemeni State. These five countries became the first Top 5 countries to grant
recognition of independence to the Indonesian state after the proclamation.

In this article, we will invite Sinaumed’s to learn about the brief history of Indonesian independence, the types
and meanings of the two types of recognition of sovereignty and independence, and explain the first five
countries to recognize the sovereignty of the Indonesian state along with the background why these five
countries became the first countries. which gave recognition of independence to the Indonesian state.

A Brief History of Indonesian Independence
Moments

After being colonized for a long time, Indonesian youths decided to form various groups of nationalist movements
to encourage the implementation of an independent Indonesian state free from the snares of Dutch colonialism.

These organizations have almost the same goal, namely for independence and to get rid of Dutch colonialism.
There are several well-known youth organizations that are often mentioned in history textbooks,
such as the Budi Utomo organization, Sarekat Islam, the Indonesian National Party, and even the Indonesian
Communist Party. These organizations developed very rapidly around the middle of the 20th
century.

There are three of the four organizations above that have the same goals and strategies, the three
organizations are Budi Utomo, Sarekat Islam, and the Indonesian National Party. The three
organizations devised a plan to send representatives from each organization to be sent to the Dutch people’s
council with the hope that the Netherlands would give Indonesia the right to be able to freely govern itself
without being accompanied by Dutch interference.

There was also another nationalist movement that asked for freedom from the Dutch using a path that was
considered uncooperative. The non-cooperative movement was led by Ir. Soekarno
with his friend Mohammad Hatta at that time. At that time, the two of them were still students
who were brave enough to lead such an organization. Movement from this non-cooperative movement
became easier because at that time the Netherlands was carrying out an Ethical Policy policy.

Furthermore, when it entered the period of Japanese occupation in Indonesia, to be precise during the
Second World War it became a golden period to support the progress of the revolutionary movement in the
future. It is known that the Netherlands no longer has much power over Indonesia, due to the
entry of Japan into Indonesia. In just three months, Japan had succeeded in seizing Sumatra.
After successfully seizing several areas of Indonesia from the Dutch, the Japanese made plans to
win the hearts of the Indonesian people by tempting Indonesia’s independence.

In implementing the plan to win the heart of the Indonesian state, Japan legalized the use of Indonesian as
an everyday language. This made the Indonesian state give birth to many independence
organizations and struggles throughout the country. When the Japanese state was on the verge of
their defeat in the Second World War, the Dutch state returned to Indonesia to take their place in Indonesia
again.

On September 7, 19744, the Japanese government promised to free Indonesia as soon as possible, although the
exact date was not announced. This was done because Japan was afraid that the Dutch would take
over Indonesia again. Japan also formed several organizations to prepare for the inauguration
of Indonesian independence.

After Japan declared defeat in the Second World War, Indonesia, especially the youth, urged several figures
to immediately proclaim Indonesia’s independence. During the making of the short text of the
proclamation, finally the Indonesian state was able to independently proclaim their independence on August
17, 1945.

Two Types of Declaration of Independence

As sinaumedia read earlier, that there are two types of recognition of sovereignty and independence that must
be recognized by other countries if a country wants to be independent. Following are the two
types of recognition of independence.

1. Types of De Facto Recognition of Independence

De Facto comes from Latin which in language can be interpreted as an expression that has the meaning of
reality/facts or can also be interpreted as original events and practices. According to the
legal view, de facto is defined as a term that tends to lead to something that has already happened,
although this has not yet been recognized or even has not received legal recognition.

De facto is generally used as the opposite or opposite of the term de jure (from a legal point of view)
when someone tends to refer to anything related to law, government systems, or other technical matters that
occur in everyday life. and develop not in accordance with existing regulations. De jure itself
is often associated with legal situations and what is said by applicable law, while de facto is associated
with things that have happened and actual things.

The use of the term de facto has several provisions. The term can be used if an event has
occurred which is considered relevant, established and acceptable. De facto does not require a
legal basis or relevant standards.

Type de facto by nature

De facto is divided into two types based on their nature, namely:

– Temporary de facto

De facto with this type is an acknowledgment that comes from another country without having to look at the
conditions and developments of the country giving the recognition. If the country is in a state
of destruction, then other countries will withdraw recognition from that country.

– Fixed De Facto

De Facto with a fixed type is an acknowledgment conveyed by other countries that can provide opportunities for
cooperative relations between these countries in the economic and trade fields.

De facto standard

De Facto has standards which have the understanding that a standard that is considered normal for ordinary people
that they follow these standards is like an official standard from the center.

2. Types of De Jure Recognition of Independence

De jure which in Classical Latin: de iure has the meaning of a term which means based on or according to legal
views, de jure is of course different from de facto, which is based on facts or facts.

These two terms are quite popularly used as pronouns for the sentence “in principle or law” and the
sentence “in fact or fact” when someone is giving a description of a political condition.
Something can become de facto when the person agrees to pretend that there is a law that
accompanies or regulates it, when in reality there is no law involved in the case. There is a
process that allows de facto to become a substitute for existing and outdated laws, the name of this process
is desuetude. On the other hand, an action or activity will be recorded in a de jure or
regulation, even though the implementation of the rule never happened.

Type de jure based on its nature

De jure is divided into two types based on its nature, namely:

1. Full De Jure

De jure which is full means that there is a relation or relationship between countries that recognize each
other in the fields of trade, economy and diplomacy. The country that grants recognition must
have an ambassador and establish an embassy in the country they recognize.

2. De Jure Stay

Permanent de jure is a form of recognition submitted by another country and has perpetual or eternal
validity. This is because a recognized country can show a stable government in that
country.

De facto standard

De jure and de facto countries have different levels of standards depending on the country.
for the United States itself they do not use the de jure term and only use the de facto term spoken
in English.

The First Five
Countries to Recognize Indonesia’s Independence After the Proclamation

After knowing the brief history of the moments of independence and the two types of recognition of
sovereignty. Now is the time for us to present the first five countries to recognize
Indonesia’s independence.

1. The State of Egypt

Egypt became the first country to recognize Indonesia’s independence. The Egyptian state
recognized Indonesia’s de facto independence on March 22, 1947, this recognition and support from Egypt
began with the arrival of an Egyptian State Consul General named Muhammad Abdul Mun’im to Yogyakarta on
March 13 to March 16, 1947. So what was the purpose of his visit? The Consul General of Egypt?
The Government of the State of Egypt ordered Muhammad Abdul Mun’im to convey a message to Indonesia
that the Arab League would support and recognize Indonesia’s independence.

The Arab League itself is an organization whose members are Arab countries, such as Egypt, Syria, Lebanon,
Yemen, and many more. After the delivery of this message, the Egyptian state recognized and
supported de facto Indonesian independence on March 22, 1947. After the de facto recognition of
independence, the Egyptian state continued to recognize it de jure through the signing of an agreement on
friendly relations with Indonesia on June 10, 1947.

At the signing, parties from the Indonesian state were represented by Haji Agoes Salim, Nazir Pamoentjak,
AR Baswedan, and Rasjidi. Then for the Egyptian side represented by Mahmud Fahmi Nokrashi.
This acknowledgment of independence from the Egyptian state plays a very important and meaningful
role for Indonesia because the Egyptian state not only recognizes Indonesia’s independence but the Egyptian
state also invites the Arab League countries to provide support and recognize Indonesia’s
independence.

Actually the recognition of independence from the Egyptian state began with the support and strength given
by the Egyptian people. In Egypt itself, the mass media has been very critical and furious with
the Dutch treatment of Indonesia. The Egyptian youths who were moved in their hearts carried
out a series of demonstrations to make the Dutch Embassy in Cairo insecure.

What is the background for the Egyptian state to provide support and recognition of independence for the
Indonesian state? The support and recognition given by the Egyptian state is motivated by
religious relations, brotherly relations between Egypt and Indonesia, as well as family relations.
In addition, Egypt supports and recognizes this independence because of the diplomatic relations
that have been agreed between Indonesia and Egypt.

2. The State of Syria

When Indonesia became independent, Indonesia was not completely free from the Dutch colonial state.
At that time the Netherlands was carrying out Dutch Military Aggression in Indonesia and the Syrian
state became one of the Arab League countries that assisted Indonesia in fighting for this. the
Syrian state helped Indonesia fight for it at the UN session held in 1947, represented by Faris Al-Khouri.
The role of the Syrian state in the UN session was to push the agenda regarding the “Indonesian
question” which eventually triggered various encouragements from other countries and finally succeeded in
stopping the Dutch movement against Indonesia and finding a bright spot at the 1949 UN session.

Thanks to the assistance from the Syrian state, finally the Dutch military aggression was successfully
stopped. It is known that the Syrian state has established bilateral relations with Indonesia
since the Syrian state declared to support and recognize Indonesia’s de jure independence on July 2, 1947.
From this recognition, the Syrian state also established diplomatic relations with the Indonesian state.
With this, the Syrian state became the second country to recognize Indonesia’s independence after
the Egyptian state.

The background to the support and recognition of Indonesia’s independence from the Syrian state is because
the Syrian state and the Indonesian state are both countries where the majority of the population embraces
Islam; the countries of Syria and Indonesia are countries that both care about and understand
the issues that are happening in the countries of Palestine, Lebanon and Iraq; because of the
feeling of the same fate because both have been colonized by western nations.

3. The State of the Vatican

The Vatican State became the first country on the European Continent to provide support and recognition of
independence for the Indonesian state. The Vatican State officially recognized Indonesia’s de
jure independence on July 6, 1947. This was marked by the establishment of the Vatican embassy building
located in Jakarta.

Pope Pius XII at the Vatican gave orders to Marie Joseph to go to Indonesia and became the Vatican’s ambassador
in Indonesia with the implementation period from 1947 to 1955. Marie Joseph was given the task of acting as an
intermediary between the holy throne of the Vatican and the government of the Indonesian state.

The support and acknowledgment of Indonesia’s independence from the Vatican state is the most important
moment for the Indonesian state. Why is that? This is because the Vatican state is
a country that has a strong impact and influence in the religious and social fields in the European
continent and the American region. Recognition and support from the Vatican state can increase
support from other countries to recognize and support Indonesian independence.

The background why the Vatican state provides support and recognition of independence to the Indonesian
state is due to the fact that there are some similarities in the principles of the Vatican state and the
Indonesian state. The similarity of these principles, such as the two countries both support
world peace, the two countries reject the existence of atheist beliefs, the two countries both build harmony
between religious communities throughout the world, the two countries both want to create justice for all
people in the world, and the last two countries are equally preserving the level of human welfare.

4. The State of Lebanon

The Lebanese state is the fourth country from all over the world and the third country in the Arab League
countries that supports and recognizes Indonesia’s independence after the Vatican state and the Syrian
state. The Lebanese state itself has established bilateral relations with the Indonesian state
since the Lebanese state gave recognition of Indonesia’s de facto independence on July 29, 1947 which was
conveyed directly by the Lebanese President at the time, Bechara El-Khoury. Three years later
in 1950, Lebanon officially established diplomatic relations with the Indonesian state as well as being the
moment when de jure recognition was announced. The event was held at the Indonesian embassy in
Cairo which is also accredited by Lebanon.

In the mid-1950s, the Indonesian state built a representative office in Beirut, Lebanon but in the end it
was closed because at that time there were unfavorable conditions in Lebanon due to the Lebanese Civil War.
Then in 1995, Lebanon built an embassy building in Jakarta and they returned Indonesia’s services
at the next opportunity. Right in 2006, Indonesia sent 1,000 soldiers who were assigned to
become members of the UN peacekeeping force for southern Lebanon.

The background why the Lebanese state as well as the majority of Arab League countries provide support and
recognition of independence to the Indonesian state is because the majority of the Indonesian state’s
population adheres to the same religion as the Lebanese state, namely Islam. This causes the
emergence of various feelings such as a sense of brotherhood and kinship between countries where the
majority of the population is Muslim; the large number of Indonesian citizens studying in
Middle Eastern countries; and the last one is because we share the same fate as having been
colonized by Western countries.

5. Country of Yemen

The country of Yemen is the last Top 5 country to provide support and recognition of independence to the
Indonesian state. The Yemeni state recognized the independence of the Indonesian state on May
3, 1948. After that the bilateral relations between Yemen and Indonesia continued to increase and improve
both in the economic, political, social and cultural fields. The relationship has even been
going on for 70 years.

As Sinaumed’s has read in the Arab countries section, after the Indonesian state proclaimed its independence
on August 17, 1945, some of the countries that were members of the Arab League provided their support and
recognition of independence for the Indonesian state. This was a very important moment for the
Indonesian people.

Just like other Arab League countries, the background for the Yemeni state to provide recognition and
support for the independence of the Indonesian state is based on a sense of kinship and brotherhood because
the two countries both have a population where the majority are Muslims. In addition, because
the two countries already have bilateral relations between countries.

So, those were the first five countries that provided support and acknowledgment of the independence of the
Indonesian state that we can convey to Sinaumed’s. We as citizens of Indonesia must thank these
five countries and always help each other, promote peace and prosperity with the five countries.
Without the recognition and support from these countries and the struggles of all Indonesia’s
founding figures, this country would not have developed to what it is today.

Fast walking or commonly called race walking is a branch of athletics. Although almost the same as running, these two sports have many differences.

The most obvious difference between brisk walking and running is in the movement of the legs. In race walking , one foot will always appear to touch or be on the ground. Meanwhile, in running, in a few moments both feet will appear to be floating above the ground.

In addition, when doing race walking , the person’s body should not feel stiff, especially in the hips. The hips are known to be the most important determining part in fast walking movements. Comfortable and relaxed hip movements can make brisk walking movements perfect.

Even though race walking seems easy like human activities in general, fast walking has special techniques and rules that must be understood. Therefore, for Sinaumed’s who want to learn about fast walking, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Fast Road

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), fast walking can be understood as a branch of athletics which is carried out by stepping quickly forward and the feet are never disconnected from touching the ground. This sport is usually contested in various competitions, from the regional, national, to international arenas.

Meanwhile, based on the book Physical Education, Sports, and Health (2017) by Muhajir, brisk walking can be defined as a step forward that is carried out in such a way that contact with the ground is not interrupted and is maintained.

As an athletic sport that is contested, race walking is included in the responsibility of the world athletics organization or commonly known as the International Amateur Athletic Federation (IAAF).

Reporting from the official website of the IAAF, the fast walking numbers contested at the biggest sporting event in the world, the summer Olympics, include the 20-kilometer (men’s and women’s) and 50-kilometre (men’s) sprints.

History of the Fast Walk

Fast walking is included in athletics which can also be referred to as the “mother or mother” of all kinds of sports. This is because this sport focuses on body movements using these legs and is the oldest sport in the world.

Basically athletic movements have been seen since the beginning of early human life. Walking, running, jumping and throwing activities are unconsciously human efforts in adapting to the environment. It could be, these activities are used in an effort to save themselves from the disturbances around them.

In 390 BC, the development of a nation was centered on increasing physical strength, especially the development towards a harmonious and harmonious body shape. It’s the same with a combination of several activities such as gymnastics, grammar, and music. Even so, race walking is known to be quite difficult to distinguish from running.

Fast walking sport itself began to grow and develop in 1867 in London, England. Over time, the 10 Km race walking sport began to be competed on the track of one of the sports in the biggest sporting event in the world, namely the 1912 Olympics.

Meanwhile, in 1956, fast walking has successfully become an official sport and competed in the Olympics. Furthermore, at the 1976 Olympics, there was a 20 km race walking event. It didn’t stop there, at the 1980 Olympics in Moscow, a 50 km fast walk was added to the race number.

In Indonesia itself, the race walking competition began as a number contested in the 1978 national athletics championship. At that time, the distances contested for women were 5 km and 10 km, while for men they were 10 km and 20 km.

Fast Walking Basic Techniques

Simply put, brisk walking can be done by moving your feet forward in such a way. Of course, with a note that the hind feet must always be in contact with the ground. If both feet fly off the ground when making a forward motion, an athlete may be subject to a violation.

During fast walking, the foot that moves forward must touch the ground first before the back foot moves off the ground. In addition, it is known that the supporting leg must always be straight and not bent at the knee when in an upright position.

The basic technique of fast walking basically has four techniques, namely the start technique, body position technique, footfall technique, and finish technique. So, here is an explanation of the four basic techniques in race walking , including:

1. Prefix Technique (Start)

Prefix technique or so-called start is a technique that is done before starting fast walking. In this prefix technique it is known that there are no special movements that need to be done. The sprint participants only need to stand behind the start line.

So, the steps that need to be carried out in the prefix technique in race walking are as follows:

1. Competitors must wait for the sound or direction “do” behind the start line
2. Participants must position their left foot directly behind the starting line and their right foot behind their left foot
3. Next, the participant’s body must be leaned forward with both hands in a relaxed position
4. When the officer hears a “gun shot” or “yes” sound, the participant can move his right foot as quickly as possible while moving his right foot first, followed by his left leg as quickly as possible and with relaxed arm swings and hips.

2. Body Position Techniques

After successfully doing the prefix technique, the next technique that must be mastered is related to body position. When doing fast walking movements, participants must have the right body position. This is because the position of the body is very decisive in doing brisk walking effectively or not.

Therefore, the attitude or position of the body that is good and correct when doing brisk walking, namely positioning the body facing forward. Meanwhile, the elbows are bent so that they form a 90 degree angle with the arm swings and footsteps moving in rhythm.

3. Footsteps Technique

After understanding the technique of proper and correct body position when doing brisk walking, the next technique that needs to be understood is the footwork technique. The correct step technique for fast walking is to focus on the mass or weight of the body on the thighs.

This is because the thighs have a very important role in maintaining the balance of brisk walking. As previously explained, fast walking participants must stay on the ground on one leg.

Therefore, this footstep technique is quite an influential technique because it can be done by keeping the swing of the legs while bending the knees according to the steps taken. Not only that, the heel of the foot must touch the ground first to maintain the certainty of the foot position.

4. Final Technique (Finish)

After successfully performing the prefix technique, body position, and footsteps correctly, the next technique of brisk walking is the ending or finish technique. At first glance, this ending technique is quite easy to do, it’s just that this technique is often not done by novice participants.

When a fast walking sports participant touches the finish line, the participant is not allowed to stop at that moment. Participants are required to keep fast walking until about five meters from the finish line. After more than five meters, participants can start to slow down until they finally come to a complete stop.

Introducing exercise is very good because it can maintain a healthy body. Even better, if you introduce sports through various kinds of sports knowledge, so that you have more insight into the world of sports. The Sports Smart Children’s Encyclopedia book is a suitable book for the child to explore the origins of sports.

Specific Movement Phases of Brisk Walking

After knowing the four basic techniques of the ideal brisk walking sport. Fast walking movements can be done with more specific movements. So, here are the specific motion phases of brisk walking quoted from the Class VIII Middle School PJOK book (2018), including:

1. Single Support Phase

The single support phase can be understood as a preparatory phase for acceleration and foot placement of the free leg. In carrying out this phase, participants can use two ways, namely:

a. Front Strut Specific Motion

The specific movement of the front support can be done by positioning the active front foot with a backwards preparation motion. Competitors may perform the addition phase as short as possible with the knee of the forelimb extended. Next, the leg is swung over the front support leg with the knee, and the lower leg is tried to stay low.

b. Rear Strut Specific Motion

Specific motion of the back support can be done by keeping the supporting leg straight. The supporting leg remains straightened as long as possible. Furthermore, the foot of the supporting leg can be directed forward and rolled along the outside of the sole of the foot to the tip of the toe. Next, the free leg can cross the support leg with the knee while the lower leg is kept low and the forefoot can be placed.

2. Double Support Phase

In addition to the single-support phase, the multiple-support phase can be performed by maintaining contact with the body at all times. In the double support phase, the following are the basic principles that need to be followed, namely:

1. The forefoot lands gently on the heel. Meanwhile, the back foot is in a raised heel position.
2. Next, alternately swing both arms.

The Phases of a Brisk Walking Technique Activity

In addition to the specific motion phases of fast walking, there are also four phases of fast walking technical activity that you need to know, including the following:

1. Two Foot Pedestal Phase

The first phase is the two-foot pedestal movement. This phase can be done very briefly. When both feet touch the ground, at that moment the push ends and is followed by a pulling movement. A longer pull can create opposite movements of the shoulders and hips.

2. Phase of Attraction

Furthermore, the second phase of the pulling movement can be started after the previous movement is complete. This pulling movement is done with the forefoot through the work of the heel and coordination of all parts of the body. This movement can be completed when the position of the body is above the supporting leg.

3. Relaxation Phase

The relaxation movement phase lies between the end of the pulling phase and the beginning of the pushing phase. Your waist should be in the same plane as your shoulders or arms vertical and parallel to your sides.

4. The Push Phase

The fourth phase or the encouragement phase can be done when the previous phase has been completed. When the body’s center of gravity is focused on the fulcrum, the leg that has just finished pulling can start the pushing movement. Next, the other leg can move forward and straighten.

After that, when stepping forward with a wide range of motion, the waist will be on the same side and forward in the same direction, resulting in a great deal of flexibility. This further provides a boost to the body and legs with the aim of speeding up the steps on fast walking.

Next, the arms can function as a diametrical or natural counterweight and opposite the legs.

Speedway Rules

As with competitions, there are several rules set so that fast walking can be carried out in a fair and fair manner. The following are fast road regulations that have been established by the IAAF, including:

1. A brisk walk should be done with the front foot on the ground while the back foot is lifted for a step.
2. If the athlete does not do this then the athlete is deemed to have violated.
3. Participants are disqualified if they receive three red cards from three different judges. The red card is given by the head of the jury. If it’s just the initial violation, the athlete is only given a yellow card.
4. When starting the prefix or start it must be done standing up. The athlete may not touch the ground with his hands.
5. An athlete is deemed to have won the match if the athlete’s body (not head, arms or legs) crosses the finish line.

Benefits of Fast Walking

For Sinaumed’s who are bored with running, brisk walking can be an alternative. There are many benefits that can be obtained when doing brisk walking.

The rules for this sport are quite easy, every one kilometer in 12 minutes or a distance of 5 kilometers is covered in 1 hour. You can use your phone or watch to calculate the walking speed.

So, here are some of the benefits that can be obtained from brisk walking, quoted from the Mayo Clinic website, namely:

1. Maintain a healthy weight.
2. Prevent and manage a variety of conditions, including heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, cancer, and type 2 diabetes.
3. Improve heart function.
4. Strengthen the bones and muscles of the body.
5. Improve mood, thinking ability, memory, and quality of sleep because it can reduce stress.
6. Strengthen the immune system.
7. Improve body balance and coordination.

All the benefits above are of course more than the usual way. Considering that brisk walking can also burn more calories than regular walking, this is very effective for friends who are in the process of losing weight. So, are you interested in doing brisk walking?

Sinaumed’s can do brisk walking anytime, be it on holidays or before and after work. You only need to count the time and steps. Well, as explained above, how to do brisk walking just by positioning your body, steps, and synchronized hand and foot movements.

The example of Prophet Lut AS- Examining the history of a people who were punished by Allah SWT because of their actions that violated the limits of the nature given by Him. Namely, the people of the prophet Lut who became the forerunner of same-sex relations were carried out and this caused the wrath of Allah who gave natural disasters to the people of the prophet Lut US at that time which destroyed them all.

Even though as a prophet he had delivered various da’wah and spread God’s orders to follow His teachings, all the actions and deeds of the people of the prophet Lut had gone too far beyond the limits to be able to receive guidance from Allah SWT.

For this reason, as Muslims, it is appropriate for us to draw closer to Him and ask for protection from all the evil that we have the potential to do, either intentionally or unintentionally, because as humans we will never escape sin.

Following the story of the prophet Lut AS and the history of his people who were destroyed by Allah SWT certainly gives us many examples and valuable lessons that we can take in navigating life in this temporary world and as provisions for life after the world.

All the obstacles and trials faced by the prophet Lut AS who is also the messenger of Allah SWT to spread goodness and convey the commands of Allah SWT even though his people ignore it and end up getting punishment from Allah SWT.

For this reason, as a guide in living this life, we also have to know what role models the prophet Lut US used and in this discussion we have summarized the examples and wisdom from the story of Prophet Lut AS for Sinaumed’s friends to learn and practice in everyday life. day.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion below!

History of the Prophet Lut AS

Lut or Lut (Arabic: لوط, translit. Lūth‎) is a character in the Quran, Bible and Tanakh. In Islam, he is an apostle sent to the people of Sodom and Gomorrah. His story is often used as the basis for the prohibition of homosexual acts in Abrahamic religions.

Lut is one of the prophets and messengers in Islam. Like the prophets in general, Lut is also a role model for pious people. His story in the Qur’an also emphasizes his role as a messenger, namely his preaching so that his people fear Allah and return to the right path. The Qur’an mentions that Lut (and several other prophets) was exalted in rank over other people, God’s chosen figure, and was awarded guidance to the straight path

“And (remember) when Lut said to his people, ‘You really did a very heinous act which had never been done by any of the people before you. Is it right for you to go to men, drink robbery, and do evil in the places where you meet?’”

— Al-‘Ankabut (29): 28-29

It was stated that the inhabitants of Sodom committed homosexual acts between men, used to commit robberies, committed various crimes at their meeting places, and no one wanted to prevent these evils. Lut preached that they fear Allah. He emphasized that he did not ask for wages for my call. Lut criticized the actions of the Sodomites who had crossed the line and stated that their actions had never been done by anyone else before.

Receiving Lot’s warning, the Sodomites refused. They said that Lut was just a person who pretended to be holy and threatened to expel him. The people of Sodom also strictly forbade Lut to give protection to people they would rob or rape. Furthermore, they also asked that Lut immediately bring about the doom that had been threatened so far. Receiving opposition from his people, Lut begged Allah,

“O my Lord, help me for the group that did the damage.”

— Al-‘Ankabut (29): 30

Prophet Lut is one of the prophets sent to the land of Sodom and Gomorrah. He was assigned to preach in Sadum, Syam, Palestine. His name is mentioned 27 times in the Koran. The following is among the Words of Allah regarding the story of Prophet Lut in fighting against his people which means: Verily they are an evil and wicked people, and We have included them in Our mercy; for verily he is of the pious.” (QS. al-Anbiya ‘[21]: 74-75)

“The people of Lut had denied the apostles, when their brother, Lot, said to them: why are you not pious?” Verily, I am a trusted messenger (sent) to you, so fear Allah and obey me.

And I never charge you for that invitation; my reward is none other than the Lord of the worlds. Why do you go to the kind of men among humans, and you leave the wives that your Lord has made for you, even you are people who transgress the limits “. They replied: “O Lut, in fact if you do not stop, really you are among those who were expelled.” Lut said: “Indeed I really hate your actions”. (Luth prays): “O my Lord, save me and my family from (the consequences of) the actions they are doing”. Then We saved him and all of his family, except for an old woman (his wife), who was among those who remained. Then we destroyed the others.

And We showered them with rain (stones), so bad was the rain that fell on those who had been warned. Verily, in that there are clear proofs. And it is that most of them do not believe. And verily your Lord, truly He is the Most Mighty, the Most Merciful.” (QS. asy-Syu’ara'[26]: 160-175)

Exemplify and Take Lessons from the Story of the Prophet Lut AS

Prophet Lut’s example is one of the most important things we can practice in our daily lives.

Allah made Lut a prophet with the aim of awakening his people who had sinned. As we know, the people of the Prophet Lut are known as the Sodomites.

As Allah says in the Quran Surah Al A’raf verse 80 which means “And We sent Lut to his people. Remember when Lut said to them: ‘Why are you doing abominable things that no one has ever done before?’

The Sodomites themselves were very far from God. They usually rob, rape and commit crimes in everyday life.

Even more than that, they also like the same sex. Sometimes they also harass people who don’t want to be invited to satisfy their lust.

For that, let’s look at the story of the prophet Lut and follow the wisdom behind it.

1. Not easy to give up and persistent in preaching

Prophet Lut’s role model was someone who was persistent and did not give up easily. As pointed out before, it is not easy to become a prophet of Lut.

He had to awaken the deeply aberrant Sodomites. Prophet Lut was also ridiculed and humiliated, even threatened by his own people.

But because of his perseverance and persistence, Lut prayed and tried. Until we have God fulfill their prayers and punish the people of Sodom. So all our hard and serious efforts will definitely pay off.

day after day, month after month, and year after year passed, and Prophet Lut continued to preach. But no one followed him and no one believed in him except his family. Not even his family is a believer at all. Prophet Lut’s wife whose name is Wa’ilah is an infidel like Prophet Noah’s wife: “God made Noah’s wife and Lot’s wife as a parable for the disbelievers. Both are under the supervision of two pious servants among Our servants; then the two wives betrayed their (respective) husbands, so the husbands could not help them at all from (the torment of) Allah; and it was said (to both): “Enter into jahannam with those who enter (jahannam).” (QS. at-Tahrim [66]: 10)

Prophet lut struggled to advise them tirelessly. Then none other than the answer of his people but said: “Expel Lut and his family from your country; because in fact they are people who (proclaim themselves) clean.” (QS. an-Naml [27]: 56).

Because they did not want to listen to the prophet Lut and continued to commit the misguided act, Prophet Lut begged Allah to help him from his people, “Yes, my Lord, help me (by inflicting punishment) on the people who did the damage.” (QS.al. -Ankabut[29]:30)

Even though the Prophet Lut was often threatened, he continued to carry out his mission. He continued to call on his people to renounce homosexual and lesbian adultery. Because these two actions are very contrary to nature and human conscience. In addition, the actions of the Sodomites also damaged the wisdom of creation, namely men and women.

The Prophet Lut also advised the people of Sodom to respect everyone’s property and to abandon the habit of robbing, robbing, and stealing, which had always existed among them. In addition, not a few immigrants who become victims. All the actions of the Sodomites made themselves evil. Because this action creates chaos and uncertainty in the country, so they definitely don’t feel safe and calm in their lives.

However, it was not easy to lead the people of Sodom to God’s way. They still sin and do evil. Finally, the Prophet Lut prayed to God that all the inhabitants of Sodom would be severely punished for not following the right path.

2. Accept trials patiently

Another example from the Prophet Lut that we can practice is always being kind when receiving trials and tests from Allah SWT.

One of the 25 prophets we have to trust is always patient in trials.

Especially when he was humiliated by his own kind. Prophet Lu was never angry or intended to avenge the evil of the Sodomites.

Instead, he was patient and always left whatever happened to Allah SWT. During his preaching days, it was revealed that his wife was cheating on him.

When he saw this, he continued to be patient and give good advice to his wife, even though she deceived him and prevented him from preaching further.

The Prophet Lut never tire of reminding his people of Allah SWT’s severe punishment in his sermon. He asked his people to immediately leave immoral practices that are hateful to Allah SWT. Fed up with the actions of Prophet Lut, the people of Sodom then planned to expel Prophet Lut from the city of Sodom. But before that, they gave a final warning to Prophet Lut. “Oh Lut! If you don’t stop, you will be one of the exiled!”

However, Prophet Lut was not afraid at all. He continues to call on his people to believe and worship Allah SWT. Apart from that, they are also asked to leave bad habits, avoid immorality, crime, avoid the temptations of Satan and Satan.

Prophet Lut warned the Sodomites that Allah SWT is the creator of humans and their natural environment. Allah SWT also does not like all the inhumane actions of the Sodomites.

3. Believe that Allah’s punishment is real

Not only what has been mentioned above, this is one example of Prophet Lut’s example that we can practice. Prophet Lut also believed that God’s punishment was real and existed.

The city of Sodom became the first place for homosexuals and lesbians. In all of human history, no human has practiced homosexuality and lesbianism before the Sodomites did. The reason is, this immoral practice is common in the city of Sodom. Everyone participates and shamelessly admits it in public. In fact, they take great pride in what they do.

Besides moral decline, it is difficult to improve the morale of sodomites. They are irreligious, inhuman and devoid of compassion. They are used to stealing, robbing and killing. Basically the strong rule while the weak are oppressed. And, because of this immoral behavior, Allah gave them (the Sodomites) a real punishment and as a lesson for later humans not to do this in the future.

They all (the prophet Lut US) did not all believe in the words spoken by the prophet Lut when they were given a statement or sermon to the people of Sodom.

Instead, they challenged leniency. Even though they were discovered and humiliated, the prophet Lut (as) kept warning them.

This is what must be an afterthought for all of us to believe that Allah’s punishment is real and if we believe and believe in Him then God’s forgiveness is also real for all of us who ask forgiveness and repent to Him. And from the story of the prophet Lut AS and his people, it gives us a lesson to continue to do good and avoid immoral acts, especially immoral acts that are out of bounds and cannot receive forgiveness from Allah SWT.

4. Obey God’s Commandments

Prophet Lut was one of the prophets who obeyed all of Allah’s commandments. As Muslims, this is certainly our obligation.

This is also so that one day, when the Day of Resurrection, we can avoid Allah’s punishment.

Furthermore, the Prophet Lut never did things that were forbidden in God’s teachings. For this reason, as Muslims, the story is about the struggle of the prophet Lut to face his people who were cursed by Allah, but he remained istiqamah in the way of Allah and stayed away from all his prohibitions.

Thus, the example of Prophet Lut is a big lesson for us. Even though we don’t know how the Prophet Lut’s war against Sodom was, but knowing his story in fighting for God’s commands, we can take many lessons for our lives.

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of the example from the story of Prophet Lut AS.

From the story of the prophet Lut AS mentioned above, there are many examples that we can learn and lessons that we can learn to live our daily lives. Reading and emulating the story of Prophet Lut AS and his people teaches us to always avoid immorality in order to avoid real punishment if we commit acts of sin that are out of bounds.

Dynamics of Unity and Oneness – Did Sinaumed’s know that the dynamics of national unity and integrity are important to learn as part of our efforts as a nation’s generation to protect and defend the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. Since the proclamation of Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945 there have been many dynamics in maintaining the integrity of Indonesia from time to time until now.

The dynamics of the unity and unity of the Indonesian nation in its manifestation is very strong. There have been various forms of rebellion and all forms of attempts to secede from the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. the dynamism of the Indonesian nation has started since Indonesia succeeded in proclaiming its independence. So in this event the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence (PPKI), cannot be separated from Indonesian history. 

Then the day after the proclamation of independence, on August 18, 1945 to be precise, the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence (PPKI) began holding meetings to determine three important decisions, namely establishing the 1945 Constitution, electing a president and vice president, and forming the KNIP to assist the president. From there the dynamics of national unity and integrity began and continued from time to time in various forms as follows: 

THE DYNAMICS OF THE UNITEDNESS AND CONSTITUTION OF THE INDONESIAN NATION

Revolution Period for Indonesian Independence (18 August 1945-27 December 1949)

The dynamics of the unity and unity of the Indonesian nation can be said to have started since the independence revolution period until 17 August 1945 to 27 December 1949. The Indonesian nation at this time faced the Dutch Colonial who wanted to return to control, the withdrawal of Japanese prisoners who had lost the war, as well as facing various rebellions. During this period of revolution, there was war between the independent Indonesian state, namely between the Republic of Indonesia and the Kingdom of the Netherlands.

The Dutch who said that Indonesia’s independence was illegal, in fact Indonesia had proclaimed its independence openly to the whole world on August 17, 1945. After Indonesian independence, the Dutch came back to try to argue against independence with the arrival of attacks from abroad through military aggression, so that happened war resumed between the two countries.

Looking at it from Indonesia’s point of view, the war was aimed at defending its independence, which is why it is called the war of independence. The period of the independence war occurred from 1945 to 1949. At the end of 1949, the Netherlands officially recognized the sovereignty of the Republic of Indonesia and based on the term on the results of the Round Table Conference it was called the transfer of sovereignty.

In the war of independence, it was finally the Netherlands that lost based on the Round Table Conference agreement which was successfully held. At this time, the period 1945-1949 was called the “War of Independence” period. During the revolution for independence, there were also rebellions to separate themselves from Indonesia, namely the Madiun Indonesian Communist Party (PKI) rebellion in 1948 and Darul Islam or the Indonesian Islamic Army (DI/TII).

United States of Indonesia Republic (RIS) Period (27 December 1949- 17 August 1950)

Does Sinaumed’s know that Indonesia was once a federal state? This period lasted from 27 December 1949 to 17 August 1950. The 1949 Constitution of the United States of Indonesia became the basis for the formation of a federation of 15 states. The President of the United States of Indonesia (RIS) at this time were Soekarno and Drs. Moh. Hatta as Prime Minister. Currently, ministers are responsible to the Prime Minister.

The president at this time was the head of state who was not accompanied by a vice president based on the RIS constitution. If the president is unable to attend, he will be replaced by the prime minister whose government responsibility rests entirely with the prime minister and cabinet ministers. At this time, Indonesia still used a parliamentary system of government, in which the cabinet would be responsible to the parliament and if the cabinet’s accountability was not accepted by the parliament, the cabinet had to be dissolved or resigned. 

The RIS Constitution recognizes six state institutions, namely the president, council of ministers, senate, the House of Representatives (DPR), the Supreme Court (MA), and the Financial Supervisory Board (DPK). This parliamentary government system did not last long, only about eight months. Then RIS was disbanded and Indonesia returned to using the system as a unitary state. The rebellions that occurred during this period were the rebellion of the Ratu Adil Armed Forces (APRA), the Andi Azis Rebellion and the Rebellion of the Republic of South Maluku (RMS).

Based on the results of negotiations at the Round Table Conference with the Netherlands, Indonesia must change from a unitary state to a union state. During the time of the United Republic of Indonesia, there was a dynamic of national unity and unity colored by various rebellions, such as the Ratu Adil War Force Movement (APRA) in Bandung, the Andi Azis rebellion in Makassar and the rebellion of the South Maluku Republican Movement (RMS).

Liberal Democracy Period (17 August 1945- 5 July 1959)

The period of Indonesian Liberal Democracy began on 17 August 1950 until 5 July 1959. Indonesia at this time used the 1950 Provisional Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia (UUDS 1950) which took effect on 17 August 1950. This 1950 UUDS was a form of change from the RIS Constitution which was held in accordance with the Charter of Agreement between the RIS government and the Government of the Republic of Indonesia on May 19, 1950 with the form of the unitary state of Indonesia.

Because Indonesia used the Provisional Constitution, a body was formed to formulate the Constitution. However, there were high political dynamics, and the mutual imposition of the interests of groups and groups so that the discussion of the Constitution became complicated and took a very long time.

That is why President Soekarno decided to issue a Presidential Decree dated July 5, 1959 with the following contents:

• Constituent dissolution
• Re-enforce the 1945 Constitution and no longer apply the 1950 Constitution
• Formation of temporary MPR and DPA

During this period there were various rebellions, such as the Darul Islam/Indonesian Islamic Army (DI/TII) Movement in Sulawesi, Aceh, South Kalimantan and the PRRI/Permesta Rebellion.

Old Order Period or Guided Democracy Period (5 July 1959-12 March 1967)

The Presidential Decree on July 5, 1959 then became the beginning of this period, namely July 5, 1959 to March 11, 1966. The President returned to the position of head of state and head of government since the 1945 Constitution was re-enacted and the position of Prime Minister was no longer valid. The implementation of guided democracy begins with democracy led by wisdom with wisdom in deliberations and representation. 

However, over time it shifted to being led by the President or the Great Leader of the Revolution. That is why in the end everything that is based on government leadership is considered as the ruler. During this old order period, West Irian was united in the State of Indonesia through the Trikora agreement. Previously, in the KMB agreement, the Netherlands did not want to hand over the Irian region to the Indonesian state.

The dynamics that occurred during this period were that the leaders of the MPR, DPR, BPK and MA were given positions as ministers, so they were placed as subordinates to the president. The President then dissolved the DPR in 1960 and Law no. 19 of 1964 so that the president has the right to interfere in the judicial process. During the Old Order there was a major rebellion, namely G3OS/PKI. 

Indonesia’s New Order Period (12 March 1967- 21 May 1998)

During the New Order period, it started from March 11 1966 to May 21 1998. The New Order period is the designation for Indonesia’s presidential government with Suharto as its president. President Soekarno was no longer president of Indonesia since 1966 which marked the end of the Old Order and was replaced by a new force, known as the New Order under the leadership of President Soeharto.

Ministers during the New Order era formed seven cabinets with the names Development Cabinet I to Development 7. However, in practice there were fatal deviations for the Indonesian nation, such as limiting people’s political rights, concentration of power in the hands of the president and Corruption, Collusion, and Nepotism ( KKN) in government agencies. Because of these very serious deviations, the New Order’s power finally ended after the people’s resistance to Soeharto’s rule through the reform movement.

Exactly on May 21, 1998, President Soeharto declared his resignation as president of the republic of Indonesia for 30 years of his term of office. BJ Habibie, who at that time served as vice president, was sworn in as the third President of the Republic of Indonesia to replace Suharto. President BJ Habibie’s tenure was very short and ended after his accountability was rejected by the General Assembly of the People’s Consultative Assembly on October 20, 1999. During the New Order era, the integration of the former Portuguese colony on the island of Timor, namely, became Indonesia’s 27th province called Timor-Timur.

Reformation Period (21 May 1998-Present)

During the reform era, there were many changes or amendments to the 1945 Constitution to become a constitutional constitution. This amendment is expected to form a better and more stable government system than in previous times. Amendments to the 1945 Constitution have been made by the MPR four times, namely in 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002.

Constitutional government has the characteristic that the state constitution contains restrictions on governmental and executive powers and guarantees for human rights and the rights of other citizens. After Suharto resigned as president of Indonesia and began to enter a period of reform, policies related to political freedom emerged. Such as the freedom of the press, the freedom to form political parties, the holding of democratic elections and regional autonomy in 1999. 

Amendments or changes to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia were carried out during this reform period, including regarding state administration. One of the main objectives is that the president’s power is not abused so as to achieve a more stable state condition. Indonesia’s reform period experienced five presidential changes, namely BJ Habibie (leading period 1998-1999), Abdurrahman Wahid (leading period 1999-2001), Megawati Soekarno Putri (leading period 2001-2004), Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono (leading period 2004-2014 ) and Joko Widodo (leading period 2004-present).

Judging from the dynamics of national unity and unity above, there were times when the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation was so strong, but there were also times when the dynamics of national unity and integrity were tested when faced with various kinds of rebellious movements that wanted to separate themselves from the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. All forms of terror that can result in the emergence of divisions among Indonesian people have occurred a lot in Indonesian history to date. However, as a nation’s generation, we should be grateful that these threats or disturbances have not weakened the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, but have grown stronger until now.

Driving Factors in the Dynamics of Unity and National Unity

In its development, there are three factors that can encourage and strengthen the unity and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia until now. These three factors are a unifying form of the entire Indonesian nation which can unite all the differences and diversity that characterize the life of the Indonesian nation. Starting from differences in ethnicity, religion, language and others, this can be united by carrying out the values ​​contained in these three factors. So that these differences can actually further strengthen the unity and integrity of the Republic of Indonesia. The following are three driving factors in the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation:

1. Pancasila

The Indonesian nation has Pancasila as the basis of the State with the view of the nation’s life, unifying the nation, national personality, and the nation’s noble agreement. The application of Pancasila values ​​in the daily life of the Indonesian people can be a driving factor for national unity and integrity. Indonesia regardless of differences in ethnicity, religion, culture and language.

2. Youth Pledge

Indonesian youths had pledged the Youth Pledge on October 28, 1928 which was an oath to show the determination of all Indonesian youths to fight for the nation against the colonialists in order to unite all Indonesian people. The content of the formulation of the Youth Pledge has the main value, namely one homeland, one nation and one language, namely Indonesia. The presence of the Youth Pledge then became very important in the midst of the onslaught of various issues that could divide the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, even now.

3. Unity in Diversity

Sinaumed’s is certainly no stranger to the motto Bhinneka Tunggal Ika, which is very important for the Indonesian state, which has various ethnicities, nations, cultures, languages ​​and religions. Bhinneka Tunggal Ika has different meanings, although it is still one. Even though the Indonesian state is a plural and multicultural form of country, it is still not divided, that is, it remains united for the sake of the integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

Inhibiting Factors in the Dynamics of Unity and National Unity

In addition to the driving factors, there are also factors that can hinder the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, such as the following: 

1. Diversity/diversity in Indonesian society which is not accompanied by mutual respect, respect and tolerance which has become the distinctive character of Indonesian society. This can lead to differences of opinion that get out of control, excessive regional feelings, which can trigger conflicts between regions or between ethnic groups.
2. The geographical location of Indonesia which consists of islands and archipelagos has different characteristics, so that it has the potential to separate itself. For example, the areas that are farthest from the capital city, or areas that have a large influence from neighboring countries or border areas. Besides that, areas that have a large global influence, such as tourist areas or areas that have very abundant natural wealth
3. There are symptoms of ethnocentrism which is an attitude that emphasizes the advantages of its culture and despise the culture of other ethnic groups
4. The weakening of the nation’s cultural values ​​thereby strengthening the influence of foreign cultures that are not in accordance with the national personality, either through direct contact or indirect contact

Well, that’s an explanation of the dynamics of national unity and unity that has occurred in Indonesia since independence until now. Did Sinaumed’s understand it? This dynamic is a historical record of the Indonesian nation which proves that in order to become a great country, it will inevitably face many problems as a form of dynamics. As the younger generation, we need to know and understand the history of the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation so that we can better understand this national history. 

If Sinaumed’s is interested in studying the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, especially in Citizenship Education or PKN lessons, then you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com . Sinaumed’s can find many book references, ranging from textbooks at the junior high school, junior high school or equivalent levels to books from a broader perspective. The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read about the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.  

sinaumedia – Climate is a combination of various daily weather conditions or it is said that climate is the average weather. The climate contained in an area or region cannot be limited by just one climate analysis but is a combination of various climate or weather elements. The following is a more complete explanation of the Climate Classification, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Climate According to Experts

According to the World Climate Conference states that climate is a synthesis of weather events over a long or long period of time, which is statistically sufficient to be used as indicating a statistical value that is different from a situation at any time.

Definition of Climate According to Experts:

• World Climate Conference, 1979 According to the World Climate Conference states that climate is a synthesis of weather events over a long or long period of time, which is statistically sufficient to be used as indicating a statistical value that is different from a situation at any time.
• Glenn T. Trewartha, 1980 According to Glenn, climate is an abstract concept that states a habit of weather and also an element of the atmosphere in an area over a long period of time.
• Gibbs, 1978 According to Gibbs revealed that climate is a statistical opportunity in various atmospheric conditions, including temperature, pressure, wind humidity, which occur in an area over a long period of time.

 

Climate Determinants

Differences in climate in each country are influenced by many factors, including the location of the country, the position of the sun, land and sea area, topography, etc. These factors are commonly called climate controllers. 

Climate controllers  can regulate the presence of climate elements or elements in an area. There are two climate control factors, namely:

Extraterrestrial Factors

The climate control factor from outside the earth is the sun. Sunlight is a source of heat or energy for the earth. The sun’s heat or energy can affect the existence and development of: wind, clouds, rain, temperature, air pressure, etc. The sun’s position relative to the earth or vice versa, throughout the year is not the same, but always shifts. This can happen because of the earth’s rotation and revolution around the sun, so that the area on earth that gets energy is always changing, both in quantity, quality, and length of time. The position of the sun relative to the earth has a major influence on the distribution of climate regions on earth.

You can also study discussion of greenhouse gases which play a dominant role in increasing the average temperature of the earth’s surface in the book Science of Climate Change which also discusses various other topics related to climate change.

Earth Factors

Factors controlling the climate from within the earth are determined by humans and the physical factors of the area concerned. Climate control by humans does not much change the condition and development of the climate, but is only able to minimize the effects of the climate, such as making artificial rain. The physical condition of the area that acts as a climate regulator is:

•  Latitude
• Earth shape
• Topography _
• Air pressure area
• Ground level
• Land and sea area

Various causes of climate change and ways we can do to stop it can be found in the book Why? Climate Change – Climate Change by delivering interesting and fun information.

 

 

Climate Classification

Climate Classification is an attempt to identify and characterize the differences in climate found on earth. Due to differences in latitude (position relative to the equator, latitude), geographic location, and topographical conditions, a place has a specific climate. Climate classifications are usually related to biomes or floristic provinces because climate influences the native vegetation that grows in an area. The most commonly known climate classifications are the Koeppen and Geiger classifications. This classification applies to the whole world so it is often referred to for geological and ecological studies. Some countries develop their own climate classifications to address the wide variations in local climates. Indonesia, for example, uses the Schmidt and Ferguson (SF) classification system more frequently, which turned out to be preferred for forestry and agricultural studies. The SF system is based on the classification previously compiled by Mohr, but the criteria are refined. Broadly speaking, the types of climate classification on earth can be grouped into two, namely:

• Genetic, distinguished by air mass flow, wind direction, topography and differences in sunlight
• Empirical, based on research methods and scientific observations of the elements that make up the climate.

Thus, the division of climates in the world can be distinguished based on the classification carried out by climatologists. Along with the times and technology, the distribution of climates in the world has changed and the determination of the classification has also become more complex. The following is a climate division based on the observations of climatologists:

Koppen Climate Classification System

The Koppen climate classification system is the most frequently used in the world which is based on average annual and monthly temperatures, and native vegetation. According to Koppen, the climate in the world is divided into 5 classes which are symbolized by the letter AE, as follows:

• Tropical rainy climate (A): Temperatures range from 18˚C-30˚C, and has monthly rainfall of > 60mm. The vegetation that thrives is a tropical rain forest ecosystem.
• Dry climate (B): Rainfall that occurs evenly throughout the year. The temperature ranges from 19˚C-32˚C and the vegetation that thrives is in the steppe biome and in the sand or desert biome.
• Temperate climate (C): Temperatures are divided into two, namely winter temperatures ranging from -3°C to less than 18°C ​​and summer temperatures ranging from more than 10°C. In this climate, the temperature is always humid throughout the year and is dry in winter and summer, rainfall each month is about more than 60 mm.
• Cold climates (D): The average temperature is -3˚C to ≥ 10˚C. This climate is cold and dry.
• Polar climate (E): Recorded temperatures of around 0°C to 10°C are due to topographical elevations that are over 5000 feet above sea level. The vegetation that grows is a tundra biome and has eternal snow.

The Klages System (1942)

This system divides the climate based on wind flow and global rainfall which includes the equatorial zone, this area has the characteristics of wet and tropical rain whose rain is monsoon rain. Tropical zone, this area experiences rain in summer and has savanna biome vegetation and dry forest. Dry subtropical zone, this area is dry and is dominated by deserts or deserts, and its vegetation includes steppes and steppe biomes. Dry snowy rainy zone, this area is characterized by rainy season in winter, and the vegetation includes hard-leaved trees. Extratropical zone, this area experiences rain throughout the year and the vegetation includes heterogeneous forests and the trees have broad leaves. Subpolar zone, this area has limited rain throughout the year and conifer forests dominate the vegetation.

The Schmidt & Ferguson System (1951)

Schmidt–Ferguson classifies climates based on the average number of dry months and the average number of wet months. A month is called a dry month, if in one month there is less than 60 mm of rainfall. Called a wet month, if in one month the rainfall is more than 100 mm.

Oldeman’s System (1975)

Determination of climate according to Oldeman uses the same basis as the determination of climate according to Schmidt-Ferguson, namely the element of rainfall. Wet months and dry months are associated with agricultural activities in certain areas so that the climate classification is also called agro-climatic zones. For example, an amount of rainfall of 200 mm per month is considered sufficient to cultivate paddy rice. As for cultivating crops, the minimum amount of rainfall needed is 100 mm per month. In addition, a 5-month rainy season is considered sufficient to cultivate paddy rice for one season. In this method, the basis for determining wet months, wet months, and dry months is as follows. Wet month, when the rainfall is > 200 mm. The month is humid, when the rainfall is 100–200 mm. Dry months, if the rainfall is <100 mm.

Junghuhn system

Climate According to Junghuhn classifies climate based on altitude and associates climate with the types of plants that grow and produce optimally according to the temperature in their habitat. Junghuhn classifies the climate into four 0-700 m, hot zone, samples- rubber, coffee, sugarcane, corn, coconut 700-1500 m, temperate zone, samples- tea, quinine 1500-2500 m, cool zone, examples- pine > 2500 m, cold zone, example- moss.

Other Articles Related to the Division of Climate Classification in the World

Inventor of the Atomic Nucleus – Some people may already know what an atom is, especially for those who study chemistry. The discussion about the atom itself has actually been taught since we first entered high school, so we will know about atoms in high school. However, there is nothing wrong if we already know about atoms before entering high school. It would be even better, we can know the inventors of the atom where each inventor always improves upon the discovery of atoms from the previous inventor.

Why can an atom be said to be a particle that has a very small size? Usually, atoms that are known to many people are shaped like circles with a diameter of 6-30 mm.

In addition, atoms always experience development or improvement from atoms that have been discovered before. Therefore, the inventors of the atom are not only made up of one person, but there are several figures. Do you already know the inventor of the atomic nucleus? In this article, we will explain the discoverers of the atomic nucleus and other atomic figures that you need to know. So, what are you waiting for, Sinaumed’s, immediately read this article until it’s finished.

Understanding Atoms

The word “atom” is a word that comes from the Greek, namely “atomos” which means “can not be cut”. In other words, atoms are the smallest particles in an element or matter that cannot be cut into pieces. So, an element cannot be formed, if it does not contain atoms.

In fact, atoms that are already the smallest part of an element, in fact, still have even smaller particles. The tiny particles inside atoms, namely protons, neutrons and electrons. Of the three smallest particles, usually referred to as subatomic. Protons and neutrons are part of the atomic nucleus and electrons are the smallest particles that surround a neutral charge.

In addition, protons are the smallest particles that contain a positive charge, while neutrons are the smallest particles that contain no charge or are neutral. Electrons are the smallest particles of atoms that have a negative electric charge. Talking about atoms is indeed very complex, we can know this from the mass that is in every atom’s smallest particle. The mass present in each subatom is very different, so the mass of each atom is also different.

The subatomic proton has a hydrogen mass of about 1.67262 x 10^-27 kg. Then, the subatomic neutron has a mass of about 1.67493 x 10^-27 kg and finally the mass of the electron subatomic is about 9.1093837015 x 10^-31 kg.

The atom was first discovered by John Dalton, after which it was refined again by scientists who studied atoms. So, the next discussion is the discoverers and refiners of atoms that you need to know about, keep reading the article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

The Figure of the Discoverer of the Atomic Nucleus

Here are some figures or inventors who have an influence on the development of the atom.

1. John Dalton (Atom Dalton)

John Dalton is someone who is an expert in chemistry, physics, to meteorology. He was born to a father named Joseph Dalton and a mother named Deborah Greenup. John Dalton was born in Eaglesfield, Northern England on September 6, 1766. The ability and intelligence possessed by John Dalton can be said to be above average because at the age of 12, he was trusted to help his older brother teach.

John Dalton began to be entrusted with teaching when he was studying at John Fletcher’s Quaker Grammar School in Eaglesfield, England. Two years after teaching at Eaglesfield, John Dalton moved to Kendall, England. In Kendall, he also became a teacher at a school where there were only 60 students.

While teaching, it turned out that John Dalton met Eihu Robinson and John Gough. Eihu Robinson is an expert in science and John Gough is a mathematician. Of the two men, John Dalton has the basics of mathematics. In addition, he also gained knowledge about the use of meteorological instruments. Until finally, John Dalton was able to publish a book on meteorology.

John Dalton, who really liked research and experiments, then he wanted to do research on the smallest and indestructible particles known as atoms. He created a theory called “quantitative theory”. In his theory, John Dalton clearly explained atoms, molecules, elements, and chemical mixtures. Basically, the atomic weights are different, but according to John Dalton there are atoms that have the same quality or quantity, that is, two atoms that come from the same group.

John Dalton continued to conduct research and experiments on atoms, until finally around 1804, he prepared a list of atomic weights. In addition, he also explained that in every two molecules that come from the same chemical combination, they consist of the same combination of atoms. This is the “law of definite proportions” which has been expressed by a scientist named Joseph Louis Proust. John Dalton explained his theory clearly, so that within 20 years he was accepted among scientists.

In fact, many chemists followed John Dalton’s advice to calculate relative atomic weights. Analyze chemical combinations derived from their weight, and determine a suitable combination of atoms that make up each group of molecules that have the same characteristics.

Until 1808, John Dalton published a book entitled A New System Chemical Philosophy . He died in Manchester, England on July 27, 1844. He was buried in a state funeral.

2. Sir Joseph John Thomson (Electron)

The inventor and complement of the next atom is Sir Joseph John Thomson or better known as John Thomson. John Thomson was born on December 18, 1856 in Cheetham Hill and he was a physicist. He really likes to read books, so his knowledge and insights are quite extensive. What’s more, John Thomson’s father was a bookseller.

In fact, John Thomson’s youth was often spent reading books, until at the age of 14, he was accepted at Owens College or currently better known as Victoria University Manchester. While studying at the school, John Thomson studied applied physics, not only theory, but he was also educated to conduct experiments. After 6 years studying at Owens College, John Thomson continued his education at Trinity College in Cambridge at the age of 20 with a scholarship he received.

Thanks to the physics that John Thomson discovered and developed, namely electrons, he received a Nobel Prize in Physics in 1906. Electrons created by John Thomson are part of atomic or subatomic particles that revolve around the atomic nucleus. Electrons discovered by John Thomson have a negative charge. Until finally, he said that the atom has a shape that resembles raisin bread. According to him, atoms that have a positive charge are surrounded by electrons that have a negative charge. That is why John Thomson thought that the shape of the atom is almost the same as raisin bread.

John Thomson discovered the electron based on his research on cathode rays in the Cavendish laboratory for 35 years (from 1884 to 1991). From the results of his research and experiments, he realized that cathode rays are particles that make up atoms that have a negative charge. With the discovery of negatively charged electrons, John Dalton’s atomic theory fell, especially about the atom as the smallest particle.

John Thomson argued that basically the atom as a whole has a neutral charge, so it is neutral. Then, because the electrons surrounding the atom are negatively charged, there must be other particles that have a positive charge. The existence of this positive charge aims to neutralize the negative charge on electrons. However, the atom created by John Thomson was only able to last for 7 years and then a new atomic discoverer appeared, namely Ernest Rutherford.

Sir Joseph John Thomson died on 30 August 1940 in Cambridge, England. He was buried in Westminster Abbey which is adjacent to two of the most influential scientists in the world, namely Issac Newton and Charles Darwin.

3. Ernest Rutherford (Atomic Nucleus)

After John Thomson’s atom only lasted 7 years, then a physicist appeared who was born in New Zealand on August 30, 1871. He was named Ernest Rutherford and was a British national. He was born to a father named James Rutherford and a mother named Martha Thompson. Ernest Rutherford first attended government school Nelson Collegiate School when he was 16 years old.

Then, Ernest Rutherford continued his education at Nelson College, thanks to his intelligence, he won a university scholarship in 1889 and chose to continue his education at the University of Canterbury College. After successfully obtaining BA, MA, and BSc degrees, he then undertook two years of electrical technology research. In 1851, Ernest Rutherford won a scholarship in science, then he went to Trinity College, Cambridge. As a student he had the opportunity to do research at the Cavendish Laboratory which at that time was led by Joseph John Thomson.

After doing research at the Cavendish Laboratory as a student of Thomson, Ernest Rutherford managed to see the weaknesses or deficiencies of the atom belonging to his teacher, Sir Joseph John Thomson. More precisely in 1910, he and his two assistants managed to find an atomic nucleus that has a smaller radius than its atomic radius.

Ernest Rutherford’s discovery of the atom was based on experiments or experiments he had carried out with his two assistants, namely Hans Geiger and Ernest Marsden. The experiment they carried out is known as the scattering of alpha rays (λ) on a thin sheet of gold. The experiment they carried out actually aimed to prove the opinion of Thomson who said that atoms are like solid balls with a positive charge which, when subjected to alpha particles, will be reflected.

The research they carried out resulted in the fact that if an alpha particle was shot at a thin gold plate, then almost all of the alpha particles could pass even though there was an angular deviation of less than 1 degree.

After carrying out the experiment, Ernest Rutherford argued that the atom he had discovered had a positively charged atomic nucleus. In addition, Rutherford’s atomic charge was small enough to be surrounded by negatively charged electrons.

On October 19, 1937, Ernest Rutherford died at the age of 66 in Cambridge, England. He is buried in the middle of Westminster Abbey church.

4. Niels Bohr (Atom Bohr)

Niels David Bohr or better known as Niels Bohr who is one of the discoverers of the atom. Niels Bohr was born in Copenhagen, Denmark on October 7, 1885. He was the second of three children with a father named Christian and a mother named Ellen. Niels Bohr can be said to be born from a family that is affluent or tends to be middle to upper class.

Niels Bohr’s educational journey was quite smooth, until in 1911, he succeeded in obtaining a Doctor of Physics degree from the University of Copenhagen, Denmark. He graduated with a dissertation on metal electrons. His ability in physics earned him the Nobel Prize for Physics in 1922.

His interest in atoms can be said to have started when Niels Bohr went to Cambridge, England and met and studied under the guidance of the discoverer of the atom, Sir Joseph John Thomson. After several months of studying with Thomson, Niels Bohr chose to move to Manchester where he learned about the atom from Ernest Rutherford. After learning from Rutherford, then Niels Bohr began to develop the theory of atomic structure.

While doing various kinds of research and having done several experiments, Niels Bohr finally published the atom he found. According to Niels Bohr, the atom is like a planet that revolves around the sun. In addition, thanks to his research, he was able to prove that the electrons in atoms can only rotate in orbits and within a certain size.

In simple terms, if the electron of Niels Bohr’s atom absorbs energy, then the electron can move from the inner layer to the outer layer. Meanwhile, when electrons emit energy, electrons will move from the outer layer to the deeper layer.

Niels Bohr breathed his last on November 8, 1962 when he was 77 years old.

5. Werner Heisenberg and Erwin Schrödinger

Werner Heisenberg was born on December 5, 1901 and died on February 1, 1976. Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger was born on August 12 and died on 1961. In 1932, Werner Heisenberg won the Nobel Prize in Physics. Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger won the Nobel Prize in Physics in 1933.

Werner Heisenberg began to conduct research on the intensity spectrum of electrons taken as a harmonic oscillator. Then, in June 1925, Werner Heisenberg published a paper entitled Über quantentheoretische Umdeutung kinematischer und mechanischer Beziehungen (Quantum Theoretical Reinterpretations of Kinetic and Mechanical Relations). Then, in November 1925, Heisenberg, Born, and Jordan completed a paper that became known as the foundations of the new quantum mechanics.

Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger perfected Heisenberg’s theory of quantum mechanics by creating a theory of the wave equation. With the theory of the wave equation, quantization will appear scientifically, like a vibrating string.

Source: From various sources

Customers are – In everyday life, most people then need the services of the banking sector for financial
services. Therefore, being a customer is a privilege . The
reason is, not everyone can then become customers or bank customers and access various financial
products or investment products.

If you are a business owner, becoming a bank client is certainly a necessity. You will need a
variety of bank products to manage business finances. Then, what exactly is meant by the
customer?

Definition of Customer

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a customer is a person who normally deals with or becomes a
customer of a bank (in financial terms).

Actually, the term customer itself does not only refer to bank customers. Insurance companies
will also use the term customer, namely people who pay insurance premiums. In addition, there
are several definitions of customers according to experts.

So, in simple terms, it can be said that a customer is someone who is a customer of a bank or insurance.

Understanding of Customers According to Experts

The following are some definitions of customers according to experts.

1. According to the Financial Services Authority

According to the Financial Services Authority, customers are individuals or entities that use or receive bank
facilities, both in the form of products and services.

2. According to Boediono (2003:35)

According to Boediono, the customer is a person who must receive serious attention and concern in terms of an
organization oriented towards him so that he can survive in the era of increasingly high quality competition.

3. According to Pardede (2004:9)

Pardede said that a customer is a person who entrusts the management of his money to the bank to be used in
banking business operations, with which he expects a reward in the form of money for the deposit.

4. According to Gaspersz, (in Nasution 2004:101)

According to Gaspersz, customers are all people who demand a company to meet certain quality standards that will
affect the company’s performance.

Various Customers

In banking, bank customers are then divided into two, namely debtors and depositors. A debtor
customer is a customer who obtains either credit or financing facilities from a bank by going through the
agreement process between the bank and the customer that was previously made.

Meanwhile, a depositing customer is a customer who places his funds in a bank in the form of deposits which are
usually referred to as savings, by going through an agreement process between the bank and the previous bank
customer.

In addition, there are also several types of bank customers, including:

1. Retail Customers

Retail customers are customers who are not included as professional customers and are eligible.
Structured Products are a form of Bank product which is a combination of 2 (two) or more financial
instruments in the form of non-derivative and derivative financial instruments.

2. Eligible Customers

An eligible customer is a customer who can be classified as a professional customer if the customer has an
understanding of the characteristics, features and risks of a structured product. Customers
with this classification then consist of:

1. Individual customers with a portfolio of assets in the form of cash, demand deposits, savings of at least
   IDR 5,000,000,000 (five billion rupiah).
2. Companies engaged in the financial sector in the form of pension funds or insurance companies as long
   as they do not conflict with applicable laws and regulations in the field of pension funds and insurance
   business. Companies with capital of at least Rp. 5,000,000,000.- (five billion
   rupiah) or its equivalent in foreign currency and then has carried out activities for at least 12
   consecutive months.

3. Professional Customers

Customers will be classified as professional customers if these customers have an understanding of the
characteristics, features and risks of structured products. As for professional customers,
consists of:

1. The Government of the Republic of Indonesia and the governments of other countries.
2. Banks are also multilateral development institutions.
3. Companies with capital of more than Rp. 20,000,000,000.- (twenty billion rupiah) or its
   equivalent in foreign currency and has been conducting business activities for at least 36 consecutive
   months.
4. Central bank or other country’s bank.
5. Companies engaged in the financial sector which then consist of banks, securities companies, finance
   companies as well as futures traders as long as this does not conflict with applicable laws and regulations
   in the banking sector, capital market sector, financing institution sector and the prevailing commodity
   futures trading.

Parties Including Customers

Several parties are included as customers, including:

Legal entity

For customers in the form of an entity, it is necessary to pay attention to the legal aspect of the agency
as well as the authority to act from parties related to the bank. This itself relates to the
legal aspects of individuals.

Apart from that, it also relates to the authority to act for the customer concerned, especially for “agencies”,
including whether for such legal actions it is necessary to obtain approval from the commissioners or the
General Meeting of Shareholders (GMS) so that later attention is paid to the articles of association of the body
concerned.

Person

The customers of this bank consist of adults and minors. Adult customers themselves are only
allowed for credit customers and demand deposits. Meanwhile, deposit customers and/or other
bank services are possible for immature people, for example working customers for transfers and so on.
Against the agreement made between the bank and the immature customer, the legal consequences that
have been agreed upon have been realized.

Priority Customer Benefits

What will you get if a certain party decides to become a bank customer? Security of funds will
then be ensured because the government and official bodies will also monitor it, and even the profits earned
will be in the form of interest.

In addition, transactions are made easier by withdrawing funds, investing, making money transfers, and so
on. Being a priority customer certainly provides its own advantages. What’s more,
not everyone can become this special customer considering the conditions specified.

What are the advantages of being a priority customer of a bank? Here’s a more complete
explanation:

1. Priority Customers Have Special
Banking Services

Snaking lines at the bank make customers lazy to take care of various needs at the bank.
However, unlike special service customers, they do not need to stand in line to get banking
services.

In other words, there is a special line for priority customers at the bank that other customers may not
use. So if ordinary customers have to stand in line at the bank, these special customers are
then treated to special banking services. In fact, not infrequently they are then entertained
in a special room complete with drinks and various snacks.

2. Get Interest Rate Promos

Another advantage of being a priority customer is getting promos on interest rates. This then
becomes the most attractive advantage of priority customer service. Customers also have the
opportunity to get lower interest rates on various loans such as mortgages, vehicle loans, KTA, and so
on.

3. Ease of Consultation with Personal Bankers

Priority customers will also get various conveniences to consult with personal bankers regarding various
matters such as investment plans, insurance, pension funds, and so on. In addition, they also
do not need to hire a personal financial assistant because financial matters are handled by the personal
banker.

4. Getting Convenience from Travel Services

Another priority that will be obtained is convenience in travel services. Customers will also
be given access to the airport lounge for free, even various baggage services for free. In
addition, there are also discounts at many hotels, restaurants and shopping centers just by showing a
priority customer card.

5. Special Birthday Gift

Luckily, customers will also get special birthday gifts on their special days. Not only
congratulations like regular customers, priority customers will also receive gifts which will prove that
they have an important role for the bank.

Requirements to Become a Priority Customer

The pleasure of being a priority customer is indeed very interesting. All the facilities and
conveniences obtained will then make customers vying to become priority customers. However,
becoming a priority customer is not that easy.

There are special requirements that must be met by prospective customers to obtain these services.
Below are some of the general requirements to become a priority customer, including:

1. Have a Financial Portfolio with a
Certain Nominal

To become a priority customer with this special service, you must then have a financial portfolio at this bank
with a minimum nominal predetermined by the previous bank.

This portfolio can also be in the form of investments, bancassurance, or deposit funds in the form of
savings, time deposits, or demand deposits. The minimum nominal value for each bank is
different, but generally customers must also have a minimum portfolio of IDR 500 million.

2. Have Funding Sources and
Activities in Accordance with KYC Aspects

If the customer meets the requirements in point 1, then he will not be immediately accepted as a priority
customer. Banks must also ensure that the sources and activities of customer funds comply with
the KYC or Know Your Customer principles.

The purpose of KYC is to prevent money laundering by customers as well as internal fraud by bank employees.
Therefore, the bank will check the customer’s profile as a whole and monitor all transactions made
by the customer.

3. Priority Customers Must Be Clean from
the Black List

Another requirement to become a special customer is to be clean from the black list of Bank Indonesia or
the bank. The purpose of the black list is to take actions that are detrimental to the bank,
such as bad credit and the like. If a customer has ever been blacklisted and does not pass BI
checking, then he cannot get this special service.

4. Have Deposited Funds

The customer must then have a deposit of the minimum required amount from the results of a business or
work, not from a bank loan. So, if this stored asset is the result of a loan, the request to
become a priority customer cannot be processed

From the discussion above it can be said that customers are customers of a bank or insurance.
Thus the discussion about customers, from understanding to how to become a priority customer.
Hopefully all the discussion above adds to your insight.

If you want to find books about finance, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .
To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so
that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Sofyan

Source: from various sources

Recommended Books Related to
Customers that You Must Read

Banks and Other Financial Institutions
2014 Revised Edition

Understanding Bank Business

This book, which was compiled by the Working Group on General Banking I of the Indonesian Bankers
Association and the Banking Profession Certification Institute, is a mandatory reference for any prospective
participant who will take General Banking Level I certification. head of the bank. This book is
also accompanied by practice questions that help readers understand the contents of the book as well as
prepare themselves for the certification exam.

Banks and Other Financial Institutions 3rd Edition

In addition, in the 3rd Edition, there are additional topics, namely the Financial Services Authority (OJK)
and Rural Credit Banks (BPR). The Financial Services Authority as a new institution is expected
to be able to comprehensively guide and control the financial sector, while BPRs as financial institutions
operating in rural areas are expected to be able to bridge and encourage business activities in rural areas
through the provision of credit and so on.

Banks 4.0

The latest book series ‘BANK 4.0’ by Brett King deals with the topic of whether banks have a future in the
emerging world of 21st century technology. In the 30-50 years when cash is gone, cards are
gone, ATM machines are not needed, not even a physical bank is needed and all the remnants of the
traditional banking system have been re-engineered in real-time, embedded in our daily life, what exactly is
a the future bank?

How are we going to reset bank accounts, identities, values, assets, investments from scratch?
The emergence of Fintech and Technology Companies opening up Digital Banks laid the foundations for
today’s new banking ecosystem. From selfie-pay in China, blockchain in Africa, self-driving
cars with their own bank accounts and artificial intelligence technologies informing the design of future
banking systems, this proves once and for all that we are not in a new era of banking. Bank 4.0
is what will become the real bank of the future.

Countries with the Strongest Military in the World – The military is an armed force in a
country. The military can also be referred to as an army. Each country has its own
military group. Of course the military must have more power so that the country can be
protected.

Therefore, the military is trained to remain tough and always act decisively, especially on the
battlefield. In life within the military there must also be a clear hierarchy for coordinating
troops. Military leaders must have a firm attitude and be able to make good decisions for their
members or troops.

Apart from internal strength, military strength within a military group consists of various factors such as
military budget, military personnel, military vehicles, weapons owned, including nuclear forces.
In a military, it is also divided into three parts, namely land power, air power, and also sea
power.

Global Firepower (GFP) released a list of countries with the strongest militaries in the world.
The ranking of countries with the strongest militaries in the world is using the Power
Index (PwrIndx). The assessment conducted by Global Firepower uses
categories based on military finances, logistical capabilities, and geography.

Some small countries are seen based on technological progress. In addition, there is
competition and military development. GFP data releases countries that have the most powerful
militaries as of January 12, 2022. Global Firepower has released a list of modern
military forces since 2006 based on state capabilities and potential. For example, a
country’s military potential in the sea, land and air.

List of Orders of Countries
with the Strongest Military in the World in 2022

No.	Country List	PwrIndx score
1.	United States of America	0.0453
2.	Russia	0.0501
3.	China	0.0511
4.	India	0.0979
5.	Japan	0.1195
6.	South Korea	0.1261
7.	French	0.1283
8.	great Britain	0.1382
9.	Pakistan	0.1572
10.	Brazil	0.1695
11.	Italy	0.1801
12.	Egypt	0.1869
13.	Turkey	0.1961
14.	Iran	0.2104
15.	Indonesia	0.2251
16.	German	0.2322
17.	Australia	0.2377
18.	Israel	0.2621
19.	Spanish	0.2901
20.	Saudi Arabia	0.2966
21.	Taiwan	0.3215
22.	Ukraine	0.3266
23.	Canada	0.3601
24.	Poland	0.4179
25.	Sweden	0.4231
26.	south Africa	0.4276
27.	Greece	0.4506
28.	Vietnamese	0.4521
29.	Thailand	0.4581
30.	North Korea	0.4621
31.	Algeria	0.4724
32.	Switzerland	0.5015
33.	Norway	0.5455
34.	Iraq	0.5597
35.	Nigeria	0.5745
36.	United Arab Emirates	0.5859
37.	Dutch	0.5937
38.	Romania	0.5938
39.	Myanmar	0.5972
40.	Argentina	0.6091
41.	Czech Republic	0.6161
42.	Singapore	0.6253
43.	Mexico	0.6423
44.	Colombia	0.6438
45.	Venezuelan	0.6664
46.	Bangladesh	0.6851
47.	Syria	0.6953
48.	Malaysia	0.7091
49.	Portugal	0.7282
50.	peruvian	0.7453

The Global Firepower tally is 0.000. So far no country has achieved a perfect
score. The smaller the score, the stronger a country’s fighting ability would be.
Quoting from byjus.com, Global Firepower calculates an index based on total air
services. The type of aircraft is also calculated from the military and its type.
Examples of types of aircraft such as helicopters, fighter planes, and many more.

In 2022, the top position for the country with the most powerful military in the world is the United States
(US) in first place, followed by Russia in second. Then, China is in third place, and India is
in fourth place. Meanwhile, Indonesia is ranked 15th as the country with the strongest
military. The total score of PwrIndx Indonesia reached 0.2251. Indonesia is below
Iran which has a PwrIndx score of 0.2104 and above Germany which has a score of 0.2322.

1. United States military

The United States military, which is in first position, is claimed to have 1,400,000 active personnel and
860,000 reserve personnel. In total, the United States has 2,260,000 military personnel.
In addition, the United States land force has 6,289 tanks, 39,353 armored vehicles, 1,456 mobile
artillery units, 2,740 crane artillery units, and 1,366 rocket launchers. The number of ground
forces does not include short-range missiles and intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs).

For sea power, the United States has 20 aircraft carriers, the highest number in the world.
The number of ships owned by the United States military makes it strong in the waters.
Apart from aircraft carriers, the United States also has 91 units of destroyers, 13 units of
corverts, and also 66 units of submarines.

Furthermore, the United States has air units which have a total of 13,264. These units include
2,085 fighter jets, 967 combat helicopters, 945 transport aircraft, 5,768 helicopters, 742 special mission
aircraft, and F-22 fighter jets which are not for sale to various countries, only the United States military
has them.

Not only air, land and sea power, the United States military also excels in its nuclear power.
According to the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI), currently the United
States military has 5,800 nuclear warheads, 1,750 of which are ready to be launched. The United
States is also the only country that has ever used nuclear in a military conflict.

2. The Russian military

The Russian military ranks second as the strongest military in the world. The strength index
owned by the Russian military is 0.0501, while the perfect index is 0.0000. The second rank
obtained by the Russian military is determined by several factors, namely the weapons it has, the strength
of the ground, sea and air forces, military budget and also military fuel.

The military personnel owned by the Russian military amount to 3,586 or 2.5% of the number of people who
are eligible to serve the country which totals 46,658,000 people or around 32.8%. Russia has an
air force in the form of military vehicles totaling 4,078 units. With 869 attackers producing
1,459 strikes, the Russian air force also has 1,485 helicopters with 514 attack helicopters.

For the ground forces, Russia has 21,000 battle tanks, 50,000 armored fighting vehicles, 6,000 automatic
artillery units, 4,400 towed artillery units, and up to 3,800 rocket-like weapons. Furthermore,
Russia has a navy in the form of vehicles and fuel which are the main values, namely helicopters,
submarines, diesel-electric, and conventional and modern nuclear power.

The assets owned by the Russian navy amount to 352. These assets include 56 units of submarines, 45 units
of patrol boats, 13 units of destroyers, 13 units of frigates and 82 units of corvettes. Some
parts of the transportation owned by the Russian military are made by companies engaged in well-known
weapons, namely Kalashnikov. The company was previously the creator of the AK-47 weapon which
was very revolutionary in its time.

Apart from transportation and combat equipment, the military certainly needs fuel. The Russian
military has oil production of 10,580,000 barrels per day with consumption of 3,320,000 per day, and Russia
also has oil reserves for fuel of 80 billion barrels.

3. The Chinese military

China, which is in third place, shows that its military strength is getting stronger. China
makes indirect spending on the military by investing in state-owned and private defense companies to acquire
new technologies in the military world.

Because China’s military cooperates with defense companies, its navy currently has 350 ships as well as
submarines. This number includes 130 attacks on the main surface, and it is even estimated that
there will be Chinese aircraft carriers afloat by 2030. In addition, destroyers are also accelerated to
expand their fleet.

The Chinese navy has also developed long-range precision cruise and ballistic missiles, early warning
radars, and air defense systems to dominate the airspace over the Pacific. Recently, the
Chinese military has launched hypersonic weapons to confront the US military’s aircraft carrier
group.

In 2017, Chinese President Xi Jinping said that he has a target for the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) to become
a world-class military capable of fighting and can win a global war in 2049.

4. Indian Military

According to Global Fire Power, India has a military force that occupies position 4 out of 139 other
countries. In the Asian region, if sorted, India gets the second position as the strongest
military in Asia. The Indian military has approximately 1,445,000 military personnel.
They are also involved in the protracted territorial conflict in Pakistan’s Kashmir region.

Despite being ranked fourth as the strongest military in the world, India has the first order of war
transportation in the world. The Indian military has 4,730 tanks, 4,040 crane artillery units,
and 542 combat aircraft.

Apart from that, there are also interesting facts about the Indian military. Here are some of
them:

• The Indian military has mastered the highest battlefield in the world, namely in the Sianchen Glacier.
  The glacier has an altitude of 5,000 meters above sea level.
• In 1971, the Indian military accepted its largest military surrender, with 93,000 Pakistani soldiers
  surrendering to the Indian army.
• The Indian military has the world’s largest volunteer army.
• The Indian military secretly tested its nuclear weapons in the 1970s and late 1990s without the CIA knowing
  about it.
• The Indian military has the most accurate nukes in the world, with Agni and Prithvi in ​​their respective
  categories.
• The Indian army has trained foreign troops such as the United States, Russia and the United Kingdom.
• The Indian military conducted Operation Rahat in 2013, the world’s largest civilian rescue operation.

5. Japanese military

The Japanese military is ranked fifth as the strongest military in the world. The Japanese
military has a strength index of 0.1195. Despite being in fifth position, Japan does not have
as many troops as the militaries of the United States, Russia, China and India. The personnel
owned by Japan numbered only 250,000 people with 55,000 reserve personnel and 14,000 paramilitary
personnel.

Japan’s military strength is the same as other countries’ militaries, which is based on the ground, air and
sea forces. Apart from that, the Japanese military was also supported by weapons and military
fuel. For ground forces, the Japanese military has 1,004 tanks, 5,500 armored vehicles, 214
mobile artillery units, 480 crane artillery units, and 99 rocket projectors.

Then, the strength of the Japanese military navy includes 37 units of destroyers, 6 corvettes, 20 units of
submarines, 6 units of patrol boats, and 21 units of mine warships. However, the Japanese
military does not yet have aircraft carriers and frigates. The strength of the Japanese
military air force includes 256 combat aircraft, 17 special attack aircraft, 61 military transport units,
162 special mission aircraft, 552 military helicopters, and 119 attack helicopters.

6. South Korean military

Global Fire Power further states that South Korea’s military is the sixth most powerful military in the
world out of 138 countries. South Korea has a strength index of 0.1261 on the Global Fire Power
list. South Korea’s military strength is the same as militaries in other countries, which is
based on the ground, air and sea forces. In addition, the South Korean military is also
supported by weapons and military fuel.

The South Korean military has a total of 3,680,000 personnel with 580,000 active members and 3,100,000
reserve personnel, even South Korea has a military budget of 48 billion United States dollars.
For air force strength, the South Korean military has 414 combat aircraft, 71 special attack
aircraft, 41 military transport units, 298 training aircraft, 30 special mission aircraft, 803 helicopters,
and 112 attack helicopters.

The strength of the South Korean army includes 2,614 tanks, 14,000 armored vehicles, 3,040 mobile artillery
units, 3,854 crane artillery units, and 575 rocket projectors. Furthermore, South Korea’s naval
strength includes 2 aircraft carriers, 12 destroyers, 18 frigates, 12 corvettes, 22 submarines, 111 patrol
boats, and 11 mine warships.

7. French military

France, which is in seventh position, has a population of 67,700,000. The French military gets
a strength index of 0.1283 on the Global Fire Power list. France has a total of 1,057 combat
aircraft, 406 tanks, 10 submarines, as well as 270,000 active military personnel. Although the
French army looked nothing special, the personnel were highly trained. The French military has
290 nuclear warheads by 2021.

8. British Military

The British military occupies the eighth position as the strongest military in the world. The
United Kingdom’s military has a strength index of 0.1997 on the Global Fire Power list. Apart
from being recorded in the data, the country itself was able to provide a budget of 59.2 million US dollars
to its military. Apart from that, what makes the British military called the strongest military is because
it has HMS Queen Elizabeth, an aircraft carrier that has an area of ​​about 4.5 hectare. An
aircraft carrier of this size can accommodate 40 F-35B fighter aircraft all over the world. The
British military currently also possesses 290 nuclear warheads.

9. Pakistan military

Pakistan’s military ranks ninth as the strongest military in the world. The Pakistan military
gets a strength index of 0.1572 in the Global Fire Power list. In strengthening the country’s
defense, Pakistan’s military has 654,000 active personnel, 1,364 air force units which include 331
helicopters, and 357 combat aircraft. Then it has 2,680 tanks, 9,635 armored vehicles and
hundreds of thousands of paramilitaries.

The Pakistani military has never publicly disclosed their arsenal. However, it is estimated
that the Pakistani military has more than 165 nuclear warheads by 2021. The military budget that the
Pakistani military has is not as big as that given in Brazil. Pakistan only provided a budget
of 12.27 billion United States dollars.

10. Brazilian military

The Brazilian military ranks tenth as the strongest military in the world. The Brazilian
military has a strength index of 0.1695 in the 2022 Global Fire Power list. The country, which has a
population of around 211.7 million, has a total of 2,007,000 military personnel, of which 334,500 are active
personnel.

In terms of military transportation, Brazil has an air fleet of 676 units, tanks 439 units, armored
vehicles 2,000 units, and also a fleet of 112 units. Based on data written in SIPRI, Brazil has
become one of 14 countries that has a significant uranium enrichment capacity in the world of 35,000 SWU per
year.

Indonesian Military Strength

Indonesia’s power index score is 0.2251 points. In 2022, Indonesia will be ranked 15th out of
140 countries considered for the annual GFP review. Indonesia’s position increased one rank
compared to the previous period which scored 0.2684. With this result, Indonesia ranks first at
the ASEAN regional level. The second place in ASEAN or 28th in the world is occupied by Vietnam
with a score of 0.4521 and Thailand in third place in ASEAN and ranked 29th in the world with a score of
0.4581.

Based on GFP data, the TNI’s air force is complemented by 445 air forces. This number includes
41 combat aircraft, 23 dedicated attack aircraft, 66 transports, 126 trainers, 17 special mission aircraft,
1 tanker aircraft, 172 helicopters and 15 attack helicopters. Then, Indonesia’s ground forces
are equipped with 314 tanks, 1,444 armored vehicles, 153 self-propelled artillery, 413 artillery towers, and
63 rocket projectors.

The total assets of Indonesia’s marine defense system are 296. The total consists of 7 frigates, 24
corvettes, 4 submarines, 181 patrol boats, 11 mine warfare. Indonesia’s ranking outperforms a
number of developed countries, including Germany in 16th position, Australia in 17th, and Israel in
18th.

Sinaumed’s, that’s a brief explanation about the Country with the Strongest Military in the World in
2022 . Each military group in each country has its own land, sea and air
forces, and has different amounts of weapons and fuel.

If you want to learn more about the military in the world and Indonesia, you can buy and read books
available at sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #UnlimitedFriends provides books that can add to your
knowledge. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

• What are Conspiracy Theories and Famous Conspiracy Theories
• Background of the Establishment of ASEAN and Its Purpose
• History of World War 1: Causes, Timeline and Countries Involved
• History of World War 2: Causes, Countries Involved, and Impacts for Indonesia
• The Purpose of Establishing the WTO: History, Functions and Principles

The Right Way to Land in the Long Jump – Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to the long jump sport? Yep, this one sport has been taught to us from Elementary School (SD) to High School (SMA) level. Almost the same as other sports, long jump also really requires strength, speed, and agility to be able to jump as far as possible accompanied by good and correct technique.

Usually, this long jump sport uses a sandbox as a place to land. Simply put, this one sport is done by jumping from as far away as possible, then from the takeoff point the body must float in the air to successfully land as far as possible in the sandbox.

But unfortunately, many people are confused about how to land properly and correctly in this sport. This is due to the movements of the legs and body, sometimes the reflexes cannot follow the correct technique, so that sometimes the feet will be injured. Then, how do you land properly and correctly in this long jump sport? Can the traditional game of jumping rope using rubber be used as training in this one sport because they both use jumping techniques?

Let’s look at the following review so that Sinaumed’s can understand and immediately put it into practice.

How to Land Correctly in Long Jump?

Basically, the long jump sport has four parts of movement, starting from the prefix or often referred to as stance, repulsion, stance in the air, and finally the landing movement. Well, in this case we will discuss how to do the landing movement.

1. Head in a bowed position. If you look up, there is likely to be an injury to the nape.
2. When you want to land, the body part, namely the heel of the foot, must reflexively touch the ground first.
3. During the landing process, place an emphasis on the heel of the foot.
4. Also make sure both legs are in a straight position. The position of the leg should not bend because an injury can occur in the form of a sprain.
5. While both legs are in a straight position, the knees must be bent.
6. On the thighs, try to be lifted upwards while the body is pushed forward to create a bent position.
7. The body position when landing is leaning forward. This is to maintain the balance of the body so as not to sway when landing.
8. When you land, immediately position your feet straight.
9. In the position of the hands, especially both hands must be swung then straightened forward. Make sure that the position of the hand is ready to support the body that is landing.

History of Long Jump

Until now, this long jump is still a part of the sports that are contested in the world Olympics and national championships in various countries. This is because this sport clearly shows the strength, agility, and speed of the athletes. So, in the following we will discuss how the history of the existence of the long jump sport has developed rapidly as it is today.

The history of the existence of this sport began in 708 BC, namely in an Ancient Olympic Sports event in Greece. According to historical records, at that time the longest jump was 7.05 meters achieved by Chionis who came from the Sparta area. Actually, all the competitions held at the Ancient Olympics were carried out with the aim of military training in war, because at the same time training the agility of athletes or soldiers. However, the technique and method of long jump at that time were of course different from today, huh… Even at that time, because the Ancient Olympic Games were intended as war training, the athletes were required to run while carrying weights in both hands with a weight of around 1-4, 5 kgs. Unfortunately, the glory of this sport is fading.

Then in 1896, the long jump sport was revived in the Modern Olympic Games. Since then, the sport of long jump has been increasingly accepted by the public and has become a sport that is often contested. The rules and jumping techniques have also been improved over time by adjusting to the current developments. In the United States, there was an athlete named Bob Beamon who managed to break the long jump record of about 8.90 meters in 1968.

History of Jumping in Indonesia

In Indonesia, the long jump is also growing rapidly until now it is still included in the sports that are contested in national championships. Since the long jump is part of athletics, all athletes and long jump sports training are members of the PASI (All-Indonesian Athletics Association) organization. When carrying out the race, it is customary to use a place on the track. 1928 was the first year that women were allowed to participate in this sport.

Definition of Long Jump Sport

In short, the long jump is an athletic sport that has a jumping movement by carrying the body’s weight when flying in the air. Not only that, this sport is also accompanied by repulsive movements on the pedestal using one of the strongest legs to reach the greatest distance when jumping. This sport is currently still popular to be contested in the Olympics or national competitions.

Many experts argue about the definition of this long jump sport. One of them is Syarifuddin (1992), reveals that the long jump is a form of jumping movement, by lifting the legs up and forward in an effort to bring the body weight as long as possible in the air alias floating in the air. This movement must be done quickly which previously had to do a repulsion on one leg (the strongest) to reach the farthest distance.

To obtain optimal results in this long jump sport, as with other sports, athletes must have good physical condition and understand and master the techniques in the long jump movement. There are two important elements in achieving maximum results, namely 1) Physical condition factors, starting from speed, jumping power, and skill; 2) Factors of take-off technique, starting from the preparation phase, displacement (hovering), and landing.

Long Jump Sports Technique

1. Prefix Technique

In the prefix technique, the movement of the participant in the long jump must be done by running as fast as possible so that he can gain maximum speed before finally repulsing. In addition, this prefix technique can also be assessed as an action to get the maximum horizontal speed which is then converted into vertical speed when repulsing.

This prefix technique must be done by running as fast as possible from a distance of approximately 40-45 meters on a running track, then the participant will do repulsion using both feet. The things that must be considered when performing prefix techniques in long jump athletics are as follows:

• The initial distance in the long jump event depends on the ability of the participant. For participants in the long jump athletics branch who want to jump with a short start, do it with a distance of approximately 30-25 meters or less. Meanwhile, participants in the long jump athletics branch who want to jump with a long prefix can do so at a distance of approximately 30-45 meters or more than that.
• The position when standing at the starting point, namely the feet must be parallel or it could be with one leg in front, depending on how the position is profitable for the participants.
• How to take the start in the long jump athletics can be started slowly then quickly (sprint). This speed must be maintained until just before repulsion.
• After reaching maximum speed, about 3-4 last steps take -off , foot movements are released spontaneously without reducing the speed previously achieved. In the last step, participants must concentrate and focus on repulsing on the board or support beam that has been provided.

2. Focusing / Repulsion Technique

This technique is believed to be the most important movement in long jump athletics because it determines the perfect jump result. In this technique, the participant will push off a board or fulcrum using the strongest leg by changing horizontal speed to vertical speed.

When doing the pedestal, the participant’s body position should not be too inclined. The focus must also be strong, fast, and balanced. The participant’s body balance in repulsion is also considered so that it does not falter. The following are things that must be considered in carrying out the fulcrum / repulsion technique, namely:

• The long jump must be done with the strongest leg (everyone is different).
• The part of the foot that is strongest for resting is usually located on the heel, so it is advisable to use the heel first to do the pedestal and end at the toe.
• Get lost before doing the pedestal, try to lean back.
• It is better to rest on the pedestal board properly.
• Both arms must also be swung forward and up when resting.
• Swing your legs and arms forward at hip height with your knees bent.

3. Hovering Technique

In this technique, the movement must be made after leaving the pedestal. When performing this floating movement technique, the participant’s body must be maintained in balance. Swinging both hands can also help participants to maintain their body balance.

4. Landing Technique

This landing technique must be done by the participants as well as possible. Don’t let their bodies or arms fall backwards, that’s tantamount to injury. Landing on the tub jump begins with the position of both heels and feet in a tight position. Movements when landing must also be done with both feet.

The thing that must be considered in this landing technique is that both feet used for landing must be done simultaneously, followed by pushing the hips forward. Why does the participant’s body have to lean forward when doing the landing technique? Because if the participants’ bodies tend to fall backwards, it will actually be fatal for the participants in this long jump athletics branch.

Factors Influencing the Long Jump

1. Speed ​​( speed ), is the ability to move part or all of the body from initial attitude to landing; or also when resting on boards or pedestal beams. This speed is usually influenced by the strength and flexibility of the participant.
2. Strength ( strength ), is the amount of power generated by the muscles of the participant’s body so that he can make a maximum jump.
3. Explosive power, is the ability of the body’s muscles to repulse and float in the air when released from the pedestal beam.
4. Balance, is the ability to maintain the body in a certain position correctly, starting from the jump technique to the landing technique.
5. Skill is the ability to perform a motor movement correctly and correctly.
6. Coordination is something that must be possessed by participants in the long jump sport to be able to align their body movements according to their needs.

Things to Look For When Doing the Long Jump

1. Keep your running speed until it’s time to take off on the takeoff board.
2. Achieve a fast and dynamic boost from the fulcrum.
3. Change body position when running. It aims to achieve an upright body position when running.
4. Use arm swing properly and correctly.
5. Try to make good gestures.
6. In order to make the final move stronger, you can use more repulsion.
7. Practice mainly on landings.
8. Master the right movements starting from the movements of the hands and feet, either in a bent or straightened position.

An athlete in the long jump can be declared a failure when making a jump, if they do the following:

1. During the grounding technique, the competitor touches the ground after the focus line using any part of the body, either when jumping or running.
2. Resting from outside the end of the support beam, either at a distance before or at the extension of the bearing boundary line.
3. Touches the ground between the takeoff line and the landing area.
4. Perform other movements such as somersaults when performing prefix techniques and jumping techniques.
5. When performing the landing technique, competitors instead touch the ground outside the landing area and closer to the take-off line than the nearest mark in the sand.
6. Participants or athletes in the long jump athletics branch are not present in the arena after 2 minutes of being summoned.

Arena Form in Long Jump

The shape of the long jump athletics field is of course different from the shape of the basketball or volleyball athletics field. What must exist in a long jump field is a running track, take-off board, tub for jumping, and a landing spot.

In this long jump athletics field, the distance between the running track and the starting board is generally 40-45 meters, with a track width of about 1.22 meters. Meanwhile, the repulsion board has a length of approximately 1.22 meters and a width of 20 cm with a thickness of about 10 cm. Between the jump boards and the jumpers, at a distance of 1 meter.

Then, the jump tub has a length of about 9 meters with a width of 2.95 meters. For landing spots, have a distance of at least 2.75 meters between the line of take-off and the end of the take-off place. The landing area is usually filled with fine sand and the surface of the sand must be level or flat with the top side of the takeoff board.

 

The Influence of Traditional Games on Long Jumping

Did Sinaumed’s ever play traditional games using basic jumping movements, for example, hopscotch and jump rope, especially when he was little? These traditional games are part of Indonesian culture passed down by our ancestors because in ancient times, traditional games were a means of entertainment, especially for children.

Until now, traditional games are still preserved, especially by children in rural areas. This is actually the right step rather than children having to be faced with gadgets and being reluctant to do physical activity. Without realizing it, it turns out that these traditional game activities can affect physical abilities, especially when doing this long jump sport.

Based on research conducted by Gumilar Dwi Wardani and Agus Mahendra with the title “Comparison of the Influence of Hopper Jumping and Rope Jumping Activities on Long Jumping Ability” shows that these two traditional games have more influence on long jump abilities, especially in children.

Providing alternative learning in the form of traditional jump rope and jump rope games turned out to be quite helpful and influential in efforts to improve long jump skills. It is called an alternative because not all schools have adequate facilities to do long jump learning, so that children can still improve their jumping movement skills, then do it with these traditional games. Not only that, it turns out that the implementation of two traditional games can also stimulate and strengthen leg muscle strength, you know .

When playing jump rope, the child’s gross motor skills will be automatically stimulated so that physically he becomes more skilled because he learns about how and how to jump with his own skills. If this is practiced diligently, then the child can grow to be agile, agile, and dynamic. The traditional game of jumping rope also has an effect on the condition of the body, especially making the legs and hips stronger.

So, that’s a review of how to land correctly in the long jump sport. Even though this sport looks easy, it actually has a variety of techniques that not just anyone can do if they are not trained carefully. Is Sinaumed’s interested in learning this sport? If so, it’s never too late to learn something.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

Wardani, Gumilar Dwi and Agus Mahendra. (2017). Comparison of the Effect of Hopper Jumping Activities and Rope Jumping Activities on Long Jumping Ability. Journal of Teaching Physical Education in Elementary School, Vol 1(1). 

Also Read!

• Techniques in the Long Jump
• The Benefits of Long Jumping for Mental and Physical Health
• Definition and Kinds of Athletics
• Differences between walking and running from various sides
• What is Static Balance?
• History and Basic Techniques of Table Tennis
• Definition of Rhythmic Gymnastics
• Rules in Volleyball
• History of Invention of the Game of Volleyball
• Definition of Relay Running
• 15 Benefits of Sit-Ups, What Are They?
• Benefits of Short Distance Running

The Concept of Time in History – In history, the concept of time is of course important because it seems to imply when the historical event took place. Not only that, the existence of this concept of time can also be used by historians and the general public to find out how the development of historical events related to the present day. Remembering that historical events that occurred in the past cannot be simply forgotten, but must be used as a lesson for humans in the future.

The definition of history will indeed always be about things that happened in society in the past that were even able to change the living conditions of some humans in the future. Then actually, what are the concepts of time in history? What is the concept of time? Is there a connection between time and events in history? What is the scope in history? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

Understanding the Concept of Time in History

Actually, the concept of time (temporal dimension) has two meanings, namely in the form of denotative meaning (true meaning) and connotative meaning (unreal meaning or figurative meaning). If traced from the denotative meaning, the term “time” has a definition in the form of ‘ a single unit of seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, years, windu, centuries, and so on ‘. Meanwhile, if traced from the connotative meaning, the term “time” can be defined as a concept.

The concept of time will definitely not always be related to the concept of space. The concept of space (spatial dimension) is the place or location of an event, be it a natural event, social event, or historical event which is the main part of the process of time travel. Well, human existence in this case is as an actor or subject in social events and historical events that occur. On that basis, the three concepts namely time, space, and human being, become an important unity that cannot be separated, especially in an event and its changes for the future.

So, it can be concluded that the concept of time in history can be in the form of when (day, month, year, century) the occurrence of an event which is carried out by humans as the subject. 

An event can be observed based on the dimensions of space, time, and human dimensions. If based on the spatial dimension, any event must have certain boundaries as the place where the event takes place. Then if it is based on the human dimension, any human being becomes the object as well as the subject in the occurrence of an event. In fact, not infrequently, an event that occurs turns out to be able to give effect to changes in humans themselves. It is definitely hoped that this change is a change for the better so that it requires human awareness in an effort to make sense of the events that occur. More or less like parental advice about ” learning from experience “.

Meanwhile, based on the dimension of time, every event that occurs is a process. That is, these events change over time and time will also continue (continuity). The existence of this time will be used by humans who are fully aware that time will indeed continue to run, so that they can learn to experience changes for the better.

Does Sinaumed’s realize that the concept of time can be divided into three, namely past, present, and future. In the past, historical events became an eternal fact that could never be changed. In the present, it is hoped that the next generation will be able to understand every historical event so that it does not repeat itself, especially if the impact is detrimental to many parties. Then in the future, historical events can be used as a guide for life, especially for the general public so that they are more careful when making decisions and acting. Well, in this history, the most dominant concept of time leans on the past. However, there is no doubt that history can influence events that will occur in the future.

4 Concepts of Time in History

Basically, the concept of time in any historical event will indeed be related to the development of human life, especially since humans indeed play the role of both subject and object in history. In this case, the existence of the concept of time in a history has the following points:

• The past is a time that has happened or passed. But not infrequently, the past can also continue and have not even stopped.
• The past has an open nature and is connected to each other between times. Therefore, whatever has happened in the past can be used as a lesson for the future.
• History can be used as a guide for humans in their efforts to plan something both in the present and in the future.

The existence of history is proven to be able to lead people to understand what happened in the past to serve as a guide for the present and the future. In other words, history is a science of events that occurred in human society in the past, with causality and the process of its development is useful as experience to guide human life in the present and in the future.

The existence of the concept of time in history also includes two things, namely:

• The process of continuity of an event within a certain time limit.
• The unity of time continuity, namely in the past, present, and future.

So, since the concept of time and the concept of man are interrelated, there are four essential concepts of time in a historical event, namely development, continuity, repetition and change (Kuntowijoyo). These four concepts are of course related, because history is not only limited to the study of the development of people’s lives in the past, but also to the continuity, repetition, and change of events in the past. Here is the description.

1. Development

This concept of development can occur if society, which also acts as the subject and object of history, moves from one form to another. That is, people tend to make changes from simple to more complex forms. An example is the development of the democratic system in Indonesia. The development of society from the past to the present is also the result of learning through history. Updates that occur in each generation are evidence of successful developments from time to time. Therefore, the existence of sociology and anthropology also plays a role in expressing history according to its time dimension.

2. Continuity

This concept of continuity can occur if a new society only adopts old institutions. That is, even though people have taken lessons from the past, they still develop them and apply them to the present. For example, in the past there was a patrimonial system (a form of government in which all power flowed directly to the ruler) which was then continued into a colonialism system.

This proves that history is still continuous with things in the past, even though a lot of time has passed.

3. Repetition

In the concept of repetition, this can occur if an event that occurred in the past occurs again in the future. A simple example is the events of the world war which were repeated twice and had an equally detrimental impact, especially on civil society. An example of an event in the past that experienced the concept of this repetition of time was when Sukarno’s power fell. At that time, President Soekarno’s power fell because of the actions carried out by the students. However, it turned out that these events recurred repeatedly during Suharto’s reign, which were both caused by student actions. Therefore, it is not impossible if a historical event can be repeated, both with different and the same human dimensions.

4. Change

The concept of this change can occur if a society succeeds in experiencing a shift or change. Usually, this concept of change occurs on a large scale and in a relatively short time. In addition, the concept of this change can also occur due to outside influences. For example, there was a historical event in the form of the Paderi Movement in West Sumatra against indigenous peoples. This event is considered as the result of the influence of the Wahhabi Movement in Arabia which was “transmitted” through the pilgrims returning from Makkah.

The Connection Between Time and History

The perspective of time becomes a very important dimension in history. Although basically, history will be related to the past, it turns out that the concept is very continuous with the present and the future. The process which is in a history, shows the existence of changes, transitions, and replacements. In that case, history will be given shape in the form of depictions of historical events which are carried out through three categories, namely the spatial category, the time category, and the category of life themes.

Historical events that occurred in the past will never be disconnected from the series of events in the present and the future. Therefore, the concept of time in history is one of continuity. So, to make it easier for humans to remember and study historical events in the past, time limits in the form of time classifications are needed. The classification of time in history will later produce time divisions in the form of periods, epochs, or chapters of time. While the “period of time” is in the form of a single unit of time whose content, form, and time are also certain.

Since history is not limited in its occurrence, time will be divided according to the events that occurred in the form of periods, aka periodization. The purpose of this periodization is so that each timeline or sequence of historical events is easy to understand. Real proof that the concept of time is related to historical setting is in the history of the Archipelago. As far as we have studied, the history of the archipelago has specific timelines of prehistoric times, the era of Hindu-Buddhist influence, the Islamic era, the colonial period, the National Awakening period, and the era of independence. So, through this periodization we can see that each era has different characteristics from other periods of time.

Get to Know 4 Scopes in History

Before discussing the concept of history as an event, Sinaumed’s must first understand the scope of history, because within this scope there will be a limit to the number of subjects included in history. According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), history is 1) events and events that really happened in the past; 2) knowledge or description of events and incidents that actually happened in the past. So, from this definition it can be concluded that history is events, events, or knowledge about events that really happened in the past. To find out whether the incident or event really happened or was just a fiction is through the existence of physical evidence as a historical source.

The following are 4 historical scopes, namely:

1. History as a Science

The scope of history is that history is seen as a science which is of course related to events (events) and stories that really happened in society in the past. Within this scope, history is used as a clear object to study, because it has well-validated data and sources. The application of history as a science is in the form of studying history in schools and making history a major in college.

2. History as an Event

The second scope of history is history as an event. In this case, it means that history will be closely related to something that has happened in the past that is real. Usually, these historical events involve important events that can change the lives of many people.

Examples are the events of the proclamation of Indonesian independence, the Rengasdengklok incident, the Linggarjati Agreement, and others.

3. History as Story

It should be noted that events and stories are different , right? According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), stories are stories about events in a person’s life or can also be referred to as a person’s life history.

Within the scope of history as this story, it can refer to the writing of historical facts of certain people. These particular people have the expertise to obtain and gather ideas for writing stories from existing historical materials. In short, the story or stories written by certain people are in the form of a series of stories in the form of narrative memories about past history. For example, stories from the G30S-PKI events are written or told from the point of view of survivors.

4. History as Art

The existence of history can turn out to be an art, you know, especially when it relates to the scope of history as a story. Sinaumed’s is certainly no stranger to historical events which are then developed into literary works, be it prose or drama. Well, in this case it means that history can become an art, in the form of literary works. An example is a drama or film with the theme of the struggle of the Indonesian nation during the colonial period.

So, that’s an overview of what the concept of time is and the four essential concepts of time in a historical event. Therefore, history that occurred in the past will indeed continue to be continuous with the present and the future, as long as human civilization is still running.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source: 

Ningrum, Epon. Module 5: Concepts of Time, Change and Culture. 

Masruroh, Lulu. (2020). Class X History Module: Human Life in Time and Space . Ministry of Education and Culture.

Also Read!

• Background to the Crusades
• Predynastic Period to Roman Domination in Ancient Egyptian Civilization
• Scope in Historical Events
• Phases and Periodization of the Development of Islamic Civilization
• Periodization of the Prehistoric Age Based on Archeology
• Definition, Purpose, and Factors Influencing Periodization
• Recognizing History as Art
• Background of the Europeans Exploring the Ocean
• What is History?
• Definition of Ethical Politics and Figures Involved

The Concept of the Water Cycle – Water is an important compound for all life on earth, but not necessarily on other planets. It has the chemical formula H ₂ O, which means that each molecule contains one oxygen and two hydrogen atoms. The two are linked by covalent bonds.

The earth itself is covered by water as much as approximately 71% of its share. There are 1.4 trillion cubic kilometers of water available on earth. most of it can be found in the sea (salt water) and on ice sheets (at the poles and on mountain peaks).

Not only that, water can also be found in rivers, clouds, rain, water vapor, surface fresh water, lakes and sea ice. Water in some of these places moves following a water cycle. The water evaporates and then falls again as rain.

The following is a further explanation of the concept of the water cycle. You can listen to it.

The Concept of the Water Cycle and Its Stages!

The concept of the water cycle or also known as the hydrologic cycle or the water cycle is the circulation of water which describes the movement of water molecules (H ₂ O ) from the earth’s atmosphere and vice versa. This cycle never stops so that it forms a circular series of journeys of water molecules on earth.

The concept of the water cycle has three stages as follows.

1. Evaporation/Transpiration

Evaporation is the process of evaporation of water originating from rivers, lakes, seas and other bodies of water. Meanwhile, transpiration is the release of water molecules as a result of metabolism from plants. Both have the same principle, namely being part of the process of changing liquids into gases that will gather in the atmosphere.

2. Condensation

Condensation is the process of changing water from gas to liquid. This process is known as condensation. This process is the opposite of evaporation or vaporization.

In the hydrologic cycle, condensation occurs in the atmosphere due to changes in temperature and pressure. As a result of condensation, water will gather to form black clouds which are ready to fall as rain when they reach saturation point.

3. Precipitation

Precipitation is the result or product of condensation. Precipitation occurs due to cooling and the addition of water vapor so that it is able to form clouds reaching the saturation point. The more water vapor that is formed in the atmosphere, the more water droplets in the clouds and the weight.

When the clouds are no longer able to accommodate the amount of water that is formed, the water will be released in the form of rain. Water that falls to earth can be liquid or snow. It is affected by temperature.

Water that falls as snow when the temperature is below freezing (0 ⁰ C or 32 ⁰ F). this is caused by the low temperature in winter, water vapor in the atmosphere will condense into solid ice without going through the liquid stage.

The ice crystals that form will absorb, then freeze the additional moisture from the surrounding air into snow crystals. Then, fell to earth.

In addition to the stages of the water cycle, You must also understand several terms regarding the water cycle as follows.

• Infiltration means that water seeps into the pores of the soil.
• Interception means rainwater that is trapped above the plants then evaporates before it reaches the ground.
• Advection is a condition where the awn moves to another place due to angina.
• Run off is a condition where water moves on land from a high place to a low place.

Types of Water Cycle

The water cycle consists of several types, including short cycles, medium cycles, and long cycles. The following describes the three cycles.

1. Long Cycle

The long cycle begins with the evaporation and condensation of seawater. the clouds that form are carried by the wind to higher ground in areas of land. The clouds that have formed will join with water vapor that comes from the evaporation of lakes, rivers, and plant transpiration.

Because it is affected by the altitude, the water vapor hits the cold air layer and turns into snow. Thus, there is snowfall in winter and also forms chunks of ice on high mountains.

Chunks of ice in the mountains will slide to a lower place because of the force of gravity. Chunks of ice that slide due to gravity are called glaciers. Glaciers exposed to high temperatures then melt and flow through inland waters which will return to the sea.

2. Medium Cycle

Cycles are occurring when seawater evaporates. He will be carried by the wind towards the mainland. At a certain altitude, water vapor will condense into clouds.

Then, the clouds will turn into rain that falls on the land. Then, seeping into the soil, some will be absorbed by plant roots and some will be carried away by surface water flows such as rivers and ditches. Water will pass through various channels that will bring it back to the sea.

3. Short Cycle

The short cycle begins with the process of evaporating seawater into the atmosphere. At a certain height, water vapor will condense to form clouds. Clouds that are no longer able to hold the weight of water will experience precipitation and rain occurs. Thus, the water falls back into the sea.

Benefits of Water for Life

All living things on earth need water to support their survival. Here are some of the benefits of water for humans, plants and animals.

1. Benefits of Water for Humans

Human life cannot be separated from water. The human body itself consists of more water. Here are the benefits of water for humans.

• For transportation activities, for example boats and ships.
• For household purposes such as cooking, eating, and drinking.
• For bathing, washing, mopping, and so on.
• For trade purposes such as restaurants, hotels, industry, factories, and so on.
• For irrigation of rice fields or agricultural and plantation activities.

2. Benefits of Water for Plants

Plants also need water to survive. Here are some of the benefits of water for plants.

• To encourage the process of respiration in plants.
• To help the process of photosynthesis or the manufacture of food.
• To transport nutrients and nutrients from the soil.
• Water is the source of life for plants.
• Water is a tool for the process of movement in plants.

3. Benefits of Water for Animals

Animals also need water to maintain their survival. Here are some of the benefits of water for animals.

• For eating and drinking purposes.
• Water is a habitat for several animals, such as fish, crocodiles, snakes, and so on. Be it water in rivers, lakes or seas.
• Water helps animals to produce milk.
• Water helps maintain the animal’s body temperature.
• Water helps animals to regulate their blood pressure.

Activities that Damage the Water Cycle

The water cycle can be disrupted or even damaged due to human activities. Here are some activities that need to be avoided to maintain the continuity of the water cycle.

1. Damaging Nature

Humans often exploit nature recklessly. For example, cutting down forests continuously will have a negative impact on the sustainability of the water cycle. This is due to the reduced water absorption area.

In addition, water pollution in rivers or seas will have a negative impact on the water cycle. Air pollution also contributes to a negative impact on the water cycle. Rainwater that falls to the earth and seeps into the soil and contains acids will affect plant growth.

The effects of acid rain are influenced by gases in the atmosphere. Other gases that become pollutants can also inhibit the evaporation process or the evaporation process in the water cycle.

2. Wasteful Water

The habit of saving water is a wise attitude to maintain the natural balance of small things. Some ways to save water include closing the faucet tightly when finished using it. Use sufficient water when bathing and washing clothes.

You can also collect rainwater for washing clothes, watering plants and other activities. Before using water, it’s best to remember that water must be used wisely and only as needed.

3. Overdevelopment

The number of buildings and paved roads has reduced the water catchment area. This will certainly disrupt the water cycle. Therefore, efforts are needed to balance the water cycle. For example by building water catchment tanks, dams, reservoirs, waterways, and water catchment areas overgrown with plants or trees.

How to Preserve Water

Water is very important for human, plant and animal life. As creatures endowed with reason, humans should take a bigger role in maintaining the water cycle. Here are some easy steps to conserve water.

1. Use Water Sparingly

Drought can occur not only caused by global warming. But, also by the wasteful and irresponsible use of water. Humans have several habits of wasting water including taking too long a shower, washing vehicles, forgetting to turn off the tap water, and so on.

These habits can reduce the amount of water. Simple steps, namely using enough water and not forgetting to turn off the water tap.

2. Reduce the Use of Chemicals

Chemicals that dissolve in water can damage aquatic ecosystems. For example, chemicals can destroy algae which are a food source for plankton.

Therefore, to conserve water, You can start reducing the use of chemicals such as laundry soap and detergent. Instead, You can use lerak fruit or other alternative natural ingredients.

3. Dispose of trash in its place

Garbage dumped haphazardly in ditches, rivers or other waterways has the potential to cause water pollution. Worse, it can cause flooding. This of course also disrupts the survival and environment of other living things.

Polluted rivers or seas disrupt the survival of aquatic animals and plants. Not only that, polluted water cannot be used to meet daily needs.

4. Dispose of Chemicals Properly and Properly

Chemicals such as paint, oil or other chemicals that are disposed of carelessly can damage aquatic ecosystems. Not only that, it can also damage the atmosphere. Therefore, the remains of chemicals must be disposed of properly.

5. Recycling Used Materials

Used household materials that are no longer used can be recycled to minimize wasted materials. For example by using waste mineral water bottles for pencil cases or something else. Small steps by utilizing used materials can save the earth from damage.

The Concept of Synchronic Thinking – There are three phases in this life that we will definitely feel or live. Where the three phases are like the past, present and future. The past is an event that has taken place in the past.

The present is a state that is being carried out today or now. Then for the future itself is something that has not happened yet. However, this article will only discuss past events associated with synchronous thinking.

Starting from the understanding of synchronous thinking, meaning, characteristics, approaches to synchronous thinking, applying the synchronous thinking approach to events that occurred in the past, to examples of questions you can read in full in this article.

Of course, it will be very helpful so that you also understand better how to apply synchronous thinking correctly. Without having to linger, see the full review below.

 

 

Definition of Synchronic Thinking

Every incident that occurred in the past or in the past can indeed be explored by using a synchronous way of thinking. Maybe some of you have heard the word synchronic or synchronic thinking itself.

Simply put, synchronic thinking is a method of developing events that happened in the past. Actually, synchronic thinking can also be regarded as a method of analysis of something that happened in the past.

Even with the existence of this synchronic thinking method, you could say that the analysis carried out will be dissected coherently. Coherently here are every aspect that can relate to events that occurred in the past.

Because every event must have many things related. An example is the incident on August 17, 1945. From the event alone, it can be analyzed starting from the scene, the characters in it, the impact that occurred from the event, and various other things.

From this one example it can also be concluded that synchronic thinking can indeed make an event in the past be analyzed broadly. In addition, this synchronic approach is mostly used in the social sciences.

Any analysis performed using a synchronous approach will remain centered on the same point in time. However, there are several things that are extended from each of the past events that are being analyzed.

In addition, the analysis using the synchronous approach method also does not attempt to make a conclusion about something that has happened in the past. However, the synchronic approach only seeks to carry out an analysis of something that has happened in the past.

If previously discussed in general what is synchronous thinking. So if you look at the origin of the synchronic language itself, it turns out that it comes from Greek, you know. Where synchronic consists of two words namely Syn which means with, while for Chronos itself it means time or period.

With these two meanings, if it is concluded, synchronic means narrowing in time but expanding in space. Of course, if you look at the previous examples, the meaning of narrowing in time but expanding or widening in space will be easier to understand.

So, what about the explanation of the meaning of synchronic thinking above. Do you understand or not? If you are still confused, let’s read the next explanation which can add to your understanding regarding synchronous thinking.

 

The Meaning of Synchronic Thinking

If you already know how the explanation is related to the notion of synchronic thinking. So it’s incomplete if you don’t discuss what it really means to do a synchronous thinking approach to an incident that happened in the past.

In simple terms, the meaning of the synchronous thinking approach to events or events that occurred in the past is to see what aspects actually influenced or were affected by an event that occurred in the past.

Of course, as previously explained, if every incident or event in the past that will be analyzed with a synchronous thinking approach will still focus on one particular time. But even though it focuses on one time, these events can still be dissected broadly.

Starting from anyone who was affected by the incident, what influenced the incident, what was in it and various other things.

It turns out that if you understand it more deeply, synchronic thinking is actually very important. With a synchronous thinking approach, every event that has occurred in the past can be shown in thorough detail.

Even the events that have been analyzed can also be used as current learning methods. Ah, it turns out that the topic of synchronic thinking is interesting if discussed more deeply.

Synchronic Thinking Characteristics

After understanding what synchronous thinking means and the meaning of having a synchronous thinking approach to past events. Next is about the characteristics of synchronic thinking. At this point it is very important so that you can understand more deeply how to think in syncronically.

So, you don’t need to linger, you can read the explanation regarding the characteristics of synchronous thinking in the explanation below.

• Review events that occurred in the past

The first characteristic of synchronic thinking is the existence of activities to examine events that have occurred in the past. The purpose of the process of reviewing past events is to be able to further explore what happened in the past but still focus on a predetermined time.

An example is the process of implementing Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945. In this case the task of reviewing past events is to make us all aware of what happened at the time of Indonesian independence.

However, the focus of time used was only on August 17, 1945. In this way, of course, it can be concluded that studying past events can provide a lot of knowledge or information about things that influenced the incident at a certain time.

• Has a horizontal character

Next is horizontal. Although only focused on a certain time. But the past events that are being processed or analyzed can be widened. This means that in the process of analyzing a past event, we will look at various aspects that influenced or were influenced by the occurrence of the incident.

Starting from economic, social, political, to cultural aspects. Every incident like history is sometimes influenced by some of these aspects. Then after the incident actually happened. Then there will be some other things that are influenced by it.

Of course, the existence of a synchronic approach can make us know more about one event at a certain time, but the scope of analysis can cover all. At this point it also describes the meaning of synchronic, namely expanding and narrowing within a certain time range.

• Narrower study

As previously explained, the analysis process carried out in a synchronous thinking approach to a past event only focuses on one time. This will make a study conducted also be narrower.

For example, two events in the past with different time space. Where one incident occurred in one day, while the second incident occurred in approximately 7 days.

Of course, to be able to apply the synchronous thinking approach, an event or past event will be chosen within the scope of one day.

• It is serious and more difficult

In this point more emphasis is placed on the detailed state of the analysis carried out in an incident with a synchronous thinking approach. Where events that occur at one time must be analyzed more deeply.

Of course, the situation of studying more deeply with a certain or short period of time has a sufficient level of difficulty. In addition, the results obtained will also be more serious or more complete.

This is because all aspects that affect or are affected by an event can be obtained more fully if you use a synchronous thinking approach.

• The emphasis of the study on the structure

The last is when analyzing a past event. So the focus is on the structure. Starting from the social structure, society, politics, economy, to culture.

With these points of emphasis, the data or information resulting from the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will be more complete. Of course, you will also understand more about what happened in the past.

The Use of Synchronic Thinking Approaches in History

As explained earlier, the synchronous thinking approach can also be applied in the analysis of historical events. Although a historical event only happened at one time. But with the synchronous thinking approach can produce such complete information.

The goal is that every incident of a historical event can be understood more deeply. In addition, the existence of a synchronous thinking approach to a historical event will also make it easier for us to find information not only from the chronology of events but from other aspects.

Application of the Synchronic Thinking Approach

In the synchronous thinking approach, it turns out that several ways are needed, you know. This method has actually been widely taught in Indonesian since elementary school. The method used is 5W + 1H or What, Who, When, Why, Where, and How.

However, to better understand some of the ways needed in a synchronous thinking approach. So the explanation below will help make it easier for you when you are going to do an analysis of past events with a synchronous thinking approach.

• What?

What or what happened in the events that occurred in the past? At this point you must understand the outline of the events that occurred.

• Who ?

Next is Who ? Where the emphasis on this point is anyone who took part in the events in the past that will be analyzed.

• when ?

When or when this is the time of the incident in the past. As explained, the synchronic thinking approach is to focus on time. Therefore it is very important to determine the time of the event to be analyzed.

• why ?

Why or why events in the past can occur. What aspects influenced the occurrence of events in the past.

• where?

Where or where the past event occurred. Of course, the place where the event occurred can be explained in the analysis that is being carried out.

• How?

How or how the event occurred. At this point the focus will be on the course of events that occurred. Of course, the aspects affected by the occurrence of these events will also be explained in the analysis process that has been carried out.

With the help of the 5W+1H, of course, the process of analyzing past events with a synchronous thinking approach will also be easier to do.

Example of Synchronic Thinking Approach to a Past Event

Although previously described several examples. But so that you can understand more. So we give another example. Quoted from the official Kompas.com page, here is an example of a synchronous thinking approach to past events.

Problems example:

Judging from an event in 1950 to 1959 even though Indonesia was already independent. However, Indonesia’s economic situation can be said to be in a bad state.

Where the bad economic situation is influenced by several aspects in it such as.

1. Agricultural products are the mainstay of export activities carried out by Indonesia.
2. The round table conference determined that Indonesia must bear the economic and financial burden.
3. At that time, the deficit that had to be borne by Indonesia was around Rp. 5.1 billion.
4. The Dutch government did not pass down enough values ​​to transform the colonial economic system into a national economic system.
5. The unstable domestic political situation made it easier for unplanned spending to occur.
6. The existing security in the country is not so profitable.
7. Domestic growth was so great at that time.

From the example questions or cases, an economic event that occurred in Indonesia from 1950 to 1959 can be analyzed using a synchronous thinking approach. Of course the results of the analysis carried out will be so easy to help in today’s life.

Conclusion

From all the explanations above, it can be concluded that synchronous thinking is always focused on past events with a predetermined time. Even though the time has been determined, the analysis with a synchronous thinking approach can be widened according to the aspects that influence the events that occur.

Starting from the aspects that influenced the occurrence of the incident to the aspects that were affected after the incident. Synchronic thinking also has characteristics that you can read in the previous explanation.

Besides that, to facilitate the process of synchronous thinking approaches to past events, you can use the 5W + 1H method. That way the results of the analysis with a synchronic approach will be more complete.

Even though you have read some of the explanations above. But there’s nothing wrong with using a book on history with the title “From the Stage of National History: Learning from Figures & Events”.

This book was published by Pustaka Al Kautsar with a total of 312 pages. Meanwhile, the author is Lukman Hakiem. And it has been on the market since 2020.

There are many historical events in this book that you can analyze with a synchronous thinking approach. And of course the easiest way to buy this book is via www.sinaumedia.com . Interesting to read and suitable to help you more easily understand the synchronous thinking approach to past events.

The Concept of National Income – Have you ever heard of national income or gross and net national product? If not, you need to know about national income, both its meaning, concept and how to calculate it. The following is a summary of the meaning, concept and method of calculating national income.

Definition of National Income

• According to Sadono Sukirno, national income describes the level of state production achieved in a certain period of time and changes in the level of production from year to year.
• According to Soediyono Reksoprayitno, national income is the amount of goods and services produced by a country’s economy.
• Karl E and Ray C argue that national income is the total income generated by several factors of production owned by citizens of a country.

Through national income, the government can calculate the amount of taxes obtained from its people. In addition, national income is influenced by various things in the macro economy , for example companies, families, state administration and other factors.

You can study national income as part of macroeconomics in the Textbook of Macroeconomic Theory by Sattar Sivana Kardinar Wijayanti.

Read more in the article: Definition of National Income

Benefit of Calculation of National Income

There are several benefits of calculating national income, one of which is knowing the economic development of a country. Apart from this, there are several benefits of calculating national income that you need to know.

• Can determine the level of prosperity of a country.
• By calculating national income, we can evaluate the performance of the economy on a certain scale.
• By calculating the country’s national income can measure changes in the economy over time.
• Countries can compare economic performance across sectors.
• By calculating the country’s national income, it can find indicators of the quality of life of the people of that country.
• The results of calculating national income can be a comparative indicator of the country’s economic performance.
• Can be used as an indicator of comparison of the quality of living standards of a country with other countries.
• Can be a measure and comparison of economic growth from time to time.
• Can be used as a measure and comparison of economic growth and wealth between countries.

Every country in the world has a very strong relationship of dependence and mutual influence. Likewise with Indonesia, which is a country with a strategic position that influences economic activities in it, which you can learn about in the Indonesian Economy & Global Economic Dynamics book.

National Income Concept

To be able to calculate national income, you need the categories within the national income itself. Basically, national income can be divided into six categories, namely as follows.

1. Gross Domestic Product or GDP

Gross domestic product is the total number of products in the form of goods and services produced by several production units within the boundaries of a country or within one year.

GDP = Domestic income (DN) + Domestic foreign income (DN)

In the calculation of GDP, it includes goods and services produced by related foreign companies and agencies. However, its territory is still within the territory of a country or domestic.

2. Gross National Product or GNP

Gross national product or gross national product is the value of products in the form of goods and services produced by residents of a country (national) for one year. These national products include those produced by citizens produced abroad. The formula for GNP is as follows.

GNP = Income of Indonesian Citizens DN + Income of Foreign Citizens (LN) – Income of Foreign Citizens

3. Net National Product or NNP

The formula for calculating net national product is as follows.

NNP = GNP – depreciation or depreciation of capital goods.

Depreciation referred to above is the replacement of capital goods for production equipment used in the production process. In general, depreciation is an estimate so that it can cause errors, even if it is relatively small.

4. Net National Income or NNI

Net national income or net national income is income calculated according to the amount of remuneration received by people who act as owners of production factors. The following is the formula from NNI.

NNI = NNP – Indirect taxes

The indirect tax in question is a tax whose burden can be transferred to another party, for example, gift tax, sales tax and so on.

5. Individual Income or PI

Individual income or personal income is the amount of income received by everyone in society. This includes income earned without carrying out any activity, for example, the salary of a civil servant or the income of an entrepreneur that is obtained in sequence. Here’s the formula for calculating PI.

PI = NNI – Corporate tax – Dues – Retained earnings + Transfer payment

The transfer payment in question is income that does not include production fees, but is taken from a portion of last year’s national income. Examples include pension payments, unemployment benefits and so on.

6. Income ready to spend

This sixth concept can also be called disposable income, which is income that is ready to be used to buy consumption goods and services and the rest becomes savings which are channeled into investments. The following is the formula for disposable income.

DI = PI – Direct tax

The direct tax in question is a tax whose burden cannot be transferred to another party, for example income tax.

The formula for calculating national income

There are several methods of calculating national income that you need to know, each existing calculation method depends on the approach used, the following are the methods and methods for calculating national income that you need to know.

1. Production method

With the production method, national income is the total value added of goods and services produced by all sectors of the country’s economy. Here’s the formula for the production method.

Y = 1 unit x price 1 + added value (2 units x 2 price) + m.. added value (n x price n units)

2. Revenue method

National income in the income method is the total income received by all sectors of the country’s economy for a certain duration. For example one year. The following is the formula for calculating national income using the income method.

Y = rent + wage + interest or interest + profit

3. Dispensing method

National income in the expenditure method is the amount of expenditure that has been used by all sectors of the economy. The following is the formula for calculating national income using the expenditure method.

Y = C + I + G

From the formula above, here’s what you need to know.

C is consumption expenditure , which is all household expenditure.

Meanwhile, I referred to in the expenditure method is investment expenditure, which is an investment made by the company.

The G referred to in the expenditure method is government expenditure, which is routine expenditure by the government.

Matrix is ​​one of the easiest ways to solve mathematical problems that have many variables. Usually it is applied to the fields of mathematics, economics, and engineering.

The matrix itself has many types. One of them is the identity matrix in which the diagonal is the number one. Then, how to operate it. The following will explain in more detail about the identity matrix.

Overview of the Matrix

A matrix is ​​an arrangement of numbers, symbols or expressions arranged in columns and rows to form a rectangular shape. As an initial description of the matrix, Sinaumed’s can listen to the example of a 2 x 3 matrix below.

The size of the matrix is ​​determined by the number of rows and columns it has. A matrix with m columns and n rows is called an m x n matrix, where m and n are called by their dimensions. For example, the matrix above is called a 2 x 3 matrix. This is because the matrix consists of 2 rows and 3 columns.

A matrix with the same number of rows and columns is called a square matrix. The matrix with the number of one row is called a row vector. Meanwhile, a matrix with one column is called a column vector.

An infinite matrix is ​​a matrix with an unlimited number of rows or columns (or both). In some contexts, matrices considered without rows or columns are called empty matrices.

For further explanation, Sinaumed’s can listen to the image below.

Row m is horizontal and column n is vertical. Each element of the matrix is ​​often denoted by a variable of two index notations. For example, a _2,1 represents the elements in the second row and first column of matrix A.

Each object in the matrix A with dimension m x n is often denoted by a _i,j. Which is the maximum value i = m and the maximum value j = n. The objects in the matrix are called elements, entries or members of the matrix. 

If two matrices have the same dimensions (each matrix has the same number of rows and columns), then the two matrices can be added or subtracted element by element. However, based on the rules of matrix multiplication, the conditions for matrix multiplication, namely when the number of columns of the first matrix is ​​equal to the number of rows of the second matrix in the multiplication of two matrices.

That is, multiplying an m x n matrix by an n x p matrix results in an m x p matrix . Therefore, matrix multiplication is not commutative. In general, matrices are used to represent linear transformations, that is, a generalization of linear functions such as f ( x ) = 4 x.

For example, the effect of rotation in three-dimensional space is a linear transformation denoted by the matrix R. If v is a vector in three dimensions, the result R _v represents the position of the point after it is rotated.

The matrix can be applied in various cyan fields. For example in physics in the form of classical mechanics, optics, and quantum mechanics. Matrices are also used to study physical states, such as the motion of planets. In the field of computer graphics, matrices are applied to manipulate 3D models and project them onto a two-dimensional screen.

In the field of probability theory and statistics, matrices are used as an explanation of state probabilities. As in the pagerank algorithm in determining the order of disbursement pages on Google. The matrix calculus generalizes the classical analytic form of literal and exponential to higher dimensions. Matrices are also applied in economics to describe relational economic systems.

Matrix Functions in Everyday Life

Even though matrix operations look difficult, they have many benefits to make human work easier in everyday life. Here are some of the benefits of studying matrices in everyday life.

• Assist engineers in solving problems with many variables.
• Matrix can also be used to create reports and journals.
• Solving a system of linear equations, geometric transformations, determining television broadcast schedules, and computer programming.
• Helps analyze economic problems that have various kinds of variables.
• As a way to analyze in statistics, education, science, economics, and technology.
• Help find solutions to investigation operations, for example natural resource investigation operations (coal, petroleum, and so on).

The Concept and Properties of the Identity Matrix

The identity matrix is ​​a matrix that has a value on the main diagonal elements in the form of one and the elements outside the main diagonal are zero. The identity matrix has the same properties as the number 1. Which, when a matrix is ​​multiplied by the identity matrix, the result will not change.

The identity matrix is ​​denoted by In _or simply I if the size of n can be known from the context of the discussion. Some books use the abbreviations U and E based on “unit matrix” which in Indonesian means unit matrix. The German translation is “einheitsmatrix”.

In order for Sinaumed’s to better understand the identity matrix, you can listen to the example below.

Example Questions and Discussion of the Matrix

To better understand the identity matrix, Sinaumed’s can listen to several examples of identity matrix problems and their solutions.

1. If the matrices A and B are known as follows.

Determine whether AB = A and BA = A.

Answer:

So, it is proven that if AB = BA = A then matrix B is identity matrix I.

2. Prove if A I ₃ = A = I ₃ A in the following matrices.

Answer:

So, A I ₃ = A = I ₃ A is proven to be true.

3. If the matrices G and A are known as follows. Then, prove that G + A = A + G = G

Answer:

So, G + A = A + G = G proves to be true.

4. If the matrix is ​​known as below.

Then prove that P + A = A + P = P.

Answer:

So, the matrix operation P + A = A + P = P is proven to be true.

5. Prove if the matrix AB = BA = A in the following matrices A and B.

Answer:

So, AB = BA = A is proven true.

Types of Matrix Based on Its Constituent Elements

There are various types of matrices. Here are some classifications of matrices based on their constituent elements.

1. Null Matrix

The zero matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the constituent elements are zeros. Here’s an example of a zero matrix.

2. Diagonal Matrix

A diagonal matrix is ​​a matrix in which all elements outside the main diagonal are zero and at least one element on the main diagonal is non-zero. The following is an example of a diagonal matrix.

3. Scalar Matrix

A scalar matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the elements are on the same diagonal. Here’s an example of a scalar matrix.

4. Symmetry Matrix

A symmetric matrix is ​​a square matrix in which every element other than the diagonal elements consists of numbers that are symmetrical about the main diagonal. Here’s an example of a symmetric matrix.

5. The Oblique Symmetry Matrix

A skewed symmetric matrix is ​​a symmetric matrix whose elements, apart from the diagonal elements, are opposite to each other. The following is an example of an oblique symmetric matrix.

6. Identity Matrix

The identity matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the main diagonal elements are one and the non-main diagonal elements are zero. Here’s an example of an identity matrix.

7. Upper Triangular Matrix

The upper triangular matrix is ​​a diagonal matrix whose elements on the right (top) of the main diagonal are not equal to zero. Here’s an example of an upper triangular matrix.

8. Lower Triangular Matrix

The lower triangular matrix is ​​a diagonal matrix in which the elements on the left (bottom) of the main diagonal are not equal to zero. The following is an example of a lower triangular matrix.

9. Transpose Matrix

The transpose matrix is ​​a matrix obtained by transferring row elements to column elements or vice versa. Here’s an example of transpose matrix.

Matrix Type Based on Order

The following is a matrix classification based on the order into several categories as follows.

1. Square/Square Matrix

A square matrix is ​​a matrix of order n x n or the number of rows is equal to the number of columns. Here’s an example of a square matrix.

2. Row Matrix

A row matrix is ​​a matrix that has an order of 1 x n or consists of only one row. The following is an example of a row matrix.

3. Column Matrix

A column matrix is ​​a matrix that only consists of one column or has the order n x 1. The following is an example of a column matrix.

4. Upright Matrix

An upright matrix is ​​a matrix that has the order m x n with m > n. The following is an example of a straight matrix.

5. Flat Matrix

Flat matrix is ​​a matrix of the order m x n with m < n. Here’s an example of a flat matrix.

Matrix Classification Based on the Nature of Operations

Matrices are classified according to the nature of their operations into two categories. Here are the details of both.

1. Singular matrix ( singular matrix )

A singular matrix is ​​a matrix that has a determinant value of zero and has no inverse. Here’s an example of a singular matrix.

2. Non singular matrix ( non singular matrix )

A non-singular matrix is ​​a matrix whose determinant is not equal to zero and has an inverse. The following is an example of a non-singular matrix.

The Concept of Thinking History – Learning history is so exciting. Even in learning history, you can use a thinking approach, you know. Many historians apply the concept of historical thinking to the analysis of events that have occurred in the past.

Of course, using a historical thinking approach to analyzing events that occurred in the past provides many advantages. Some of them are getting more complete information to a more coherent time sequence.

Now, if we look at the two advantages of using a historical thinking approach. Of course, it will be even more fun if we learn together about everything related to the concept of historical thinking using the information in this article.

The concept of historical thinking is easily divided into two approaches, namely the synchronous thinking approach and the diachronic thinking approach. Both have different concepts, but are very useful to help analyze an event that has occurred in the past.

You can learn from the definition, characteristics, meaning to examples of these two approaches to historical thinking. Check out the full review of the two below.

 

Historical Thinking Concept Approach

Synchronic Thinking

First, we will learn about what the synchronous thinking approach is. The word synchronic is taken from the Greek words “syn” which means with and “kronos” which means time. Thus thinking synchronically on events that occurred in the past is a way of thinking that extends to a space, but is limited in time.

Simply put, synchronic thinking is an analysis that can be done on an event that has occurred at a certain time. Synchronic thinking also has an emphasis on structure while analyzing events at a certain time.

The Meaning of Synchronic Thinking

By using the concept of the synchronous thinking approach, we can find out what impacts or changes have occurred in an event at that particular time. However, it should also be noted that the synchronic thinking approach does not try to reach a conclusion.

But more on the analysis of what has happened as a result of these events. An example is when analyzing the historical events of the proclamation of August 17, 1945. Of course, you can get a description related to social, political, economic and international relations aspects.

You could say that the synchronic thinking approach is a typical way of thinking from the social sciences.

Characteristics of Synchronic Thinking

The synchronic thinking approach also has several features in it. These characteristics will make it easier for us to learn what exactly synchronic thinking is. Here are some of the characteristics possessed by synchronous thinking that you can read in full.

• Review events that have occurred in the past

The first feature of the synchronic thinking approach is an analysis or study of an event in the past. This means that the concept of the synchronous thinking approach can only be applied to an event that has occurred in the past.

By thinking synchronously you can go deeper into what has happened in the past but for a predetermined time.

An example of this first characteristic is the activity of analyzing the events of the proclamation of August 17, 1945. The specified time for the incident was set on August 17, 1945. However, the information obtained can be widened to what really influenced the occurrence of the incident.

• Horizontal

The second is that it is horizontal. Where the analysis is carried out even though it is limited in time. However, the results obtained can be widened according to what has happened. Starting from events that affect these important events to the effects or impacts that have arisen from various sectors.

At this point usually an incident can occur due to the influence of economic, social, political as well as cultural aspects. Then when the incident actually occurs, of course there will be several aspects that are affected.

By using a synchronous thinking approach to an event that occurred in the past. You can get complete information starting from the factors that influenced an event to the impact that occurred when the event was over. You can get everything in full.

• Narrower study

Next is the characteristic of a narrower study. This means that you will only be limited by one time in one event when doing the analysis. Of course, this approach will also shorten your time and make it easier for you to do an analysis of past events.

An example is when there are two events that have occurred in the past at different times. Where one event occurs on one day and another event occurs with a duration of 7 days.

Of course, if you use a synchronous thinking approach. Then you will choose an analysis of an event that has occurred with a duration of one day.

• Serious and more difficult

Because there is a time limit in the analysis process carried out. So the analysis process as well as the results obtained can be assumed to be both more serious and more difficult. You will be able to do deeper analysis on only one event that occurs at a certain time.

Even the information you produce can cover all aspects from influence to being affected by events that have occurred in the past.

• Focus on the structure part

The focus on the synchronic thinking approach is on its structure. Where you will do an analysis starting from social structure, society, politics. Economy to culture.

Of course, the results of the analysis information will also be more complete. Apart from that, focusing on the structure will make it easier for you to understand events that happened in the past.

How to Approach Synchronic Thinking

In the synchronous thinking approach, it turns out that several ways are needed first so that you can make it easier to apply. Actually, you have learned this method since you were in elementary school. This method is 5W + 1H consisting of  What, Who, When, Why, Where and How.

Even so, so that you can better understand the use of 5W + 1H, the explanation below can help you more.

• What?

Using what or what will later make it easier for you to find out as a whole what happened to the past events that are being analyzed.

• Who ?

The use of who in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will help you find out who was involved or took part in the incident.

• when ?

When or when this will help you find out when these past events occurred. This time is also one of the focal points of the synchronous thinking approach.

• why ?

Why or why will help you find out the causes of events that occurred in the past or you can also say what things can influence these events.

• Where?

Where will help you to find out the place or location of the event being analyzed.

• How?

How or how this will be able to help you find out the course of events that occurred in the past. This means that the process of the incident will be explained clearly in this how-to point.

Synchronic Thinking Approach Example

Judging from an event in 1950 to 1959 even though Indonesia was already independent. However, Indonesia’s economic situation entered into a bad condition.

The several aspects that influenced the occurrence of events in the past are as follows.

1. Agricultural products are the mainstay of export activities carried out by Indonesia.
2. The round table conference determined that Indonesia must bear the economic and financial burden.
3. At that time, the deficit that had to be borne by Indonesia was around Rp. 5.1 billion.
4. The Dutch government did not pass down enough values ​​to transform the colonial economic system into a national economic system.
5. The unstable domestic political situation made it easier for unplanned spending to occur.
6. The existing security in the country is not so profitable.
7. Domestic growth was so great at that time.

From the example questions or cases, an economic event that occurred in Indonesia from 1950 to 1959 can be analyzed using a synchronous thinking approach. Of course the results of the analysis carried out will be so easy to help in today’s life.

Synchronic Thinking Conclusion

The conclusion from the synchronic thinking approach to events that occurred in the past is an event analysis that focuses on one moment. Even though it has a focus on one time, the results of the analysis can widen from things that influenced the incident to things that were affected after the incident.

In this synchronous thinking approach, you can use the 5W + 1H implementation to make it easier to use.

Diachronic Thinking

As previously explained, the historical thinking approach can also be through diachronic thinking. Of course, the explanation related to diachronic thinking will be very different from synchronic thinking. To make it even clearer for you, here is a review of diachronic thinking.

Definition of Diachronic Thinking

Simply put, diachronic thinking is a way of analyzing several events that are interrelated and sequentially sequenced as they should. With a diachronic approach to events that occurred in the past, it will make it easier for you to find out every event related to a major event, of course the results will be based on time sequence.

The Meaning of Diachronic Thinking

With a diachronic thinking approach to an event, you can easily find out the sequential time sequence of every event that has occurred in the past. Of course these events must also be connected between one another.

Characteristics of Diachronic Thinking

Like the synchronic thinking approach, diachronic thinking also has several characteristics in it. There are at least 6 characteristics possessed by the diachronic thinking approach. So that it is also easier for you to understand what are the characteristics of the diachronic thinking approach.

The following is an explanation regarding some of the characteristics of the diachronic thinking approach.

• Vertical

The first feature of the diachronic thinking approach is that it is vertical. This means that every event related to a major event that is being analyzed will be sequenced sequentially with reference to the time of the incident.

• Emphasized on the duration of the incident

The diachronic thinking approach will study more if an event that occurred in the past is a time process.

• The scope is wider

Previously, the synchronous approach had a narrower scope. So the approach to diachronic thinking is the opposite or has a wider scope.

• Can provide a description of an incident

Because it has a wider scope, of course, the results obtained from the analysis process can also be said to be in the form of a fairly complete description. Now this is also one of the important points that can only be provided by the diachronic thinking approach when used in the process of analyzing an event in the past.

• Methods of checking the continuity of events

Because every event that is being analyzed will be emphasized in the time part. Then the analysis process that is being carried out can be one of the methods to check the continuity between one incident and another.

• There is a comparison

If the synchronous approach will not be able to get a comparison result. Then the results given by the visa diachronic thinking approach are in the form of a comparison. Comparison here can be a cause and effect of an event. Then it can also be like the triumph and fall of the event being analyzed.

 

Examples of Diachronic Thinking

An event of the proclamation that occurred in 1945 could not just happen. Of course there were several other events that could lead to the 1945 proclamation. Using a diachronic thinking approach can make it easier for you to find out what could have caused the 1945 proclamation to occur. This is the sequence that could make the 1945 proclamation happen.

1. On August 6, 1945, America bombed the city of Hiroshima. Hiroshima City is an important city in Japan.
2. Then on August 9, 1945, America bombed Nagasaki City. Nagasaki City is also one of the important cities in Japan.
3. On August 15, 1945, Japan surrendered to the American bloc.
4. On August 15, 1945, Sutan Syahrir learned the news of Japan’s surrender
5. On August 16, 1945, the Young Group forced Bung Karno to carry out Indonesian independence. This situation is known as the Rengasdengklok event.
6. On August 17, 1945, the text of the proclamation was read.

Diachronic Thinking Conclusion

The conclusion of diachronic thinking is an approach that can be taken in the analysis of past events where later the results obtained can be in the form of a time sequence between one event and other related events.

Of course, the results of the sequence of events will be arranged in a very orderly manner. Apart from that, as explained in the point about the characteristics of diachronic thinking, the results of the analysis will be wider and also more complete.

Meanwhile, the conclusion from the concept of historical thinking itself is an approach that can be used in the analysis of past events. However, the concept of historical thinking itself consists of two methods, namely the synchronic and diachronic approaches.

The two methods of thinking approach have been described above. Although they differ from one another, the two approaches are indeed very important and very useful for obtaining information on past events.

Although all explanations are related to the two methods of analysis approach to past events. But you also need to know history books that you can use as case studies. One of the recommended history books that you can buy at sinaumedia..com is a book entitled “The Origins of European Civilization and History” created by Amir Ubaidillah.

This book was just published in June 2021 yesterday. And for the publisher of the book “The Origin of Civilization and European History” was published by “C-KLICK MEDIA”. The book is sold at a price of Rp. 57,000.

The concept of chronological thinking – Learning history is one of the things that is so much fun. Even so, it turns out that there are many approaches to learning history to make it easier to understand the information extracted from these historical events. One of them is the approach by thinking chronologically.

Even experts also need a chronological thinking concept approach to get more precise or more precise and complete information. Maybe some of you still don’t really understand what the concept of chronological thinking is.

No need to worry about that anymore. Because you can get everything related to the concept of chronological thinking here. Without needing to hesitate anymore, let’s read the explanation below.

Definition of Chronological Thinking

Before entering a deeper explanation of the concept of chronological thinking. You can read about the meaning of chronological thinking. Because some people only know the word chronological thinking but don’t know the meaning of chronological thinking itself.

Chronology itself has a meaning as a knowledge of the time sequence of events that have occurred in the past sequentially. Simply put, chronological thinking is a way of thinking coherently in an event. So this concept is very important to use in an analysis of events that occurred in the past.

With the chronological thinking concept approach to the analysis of an event that occurred in the past, it will be easier to know the order of events in an orderly, coherent, and continuous manner as a whole.

Historians also use the concept of chronological thinking in analyzing a historical event. Because to know the sequence of events from the first to the end in sequence. Judging from this, it can be concluded that the chronological thinking approach is very important for the analysis of an event that has occurred in the past.

Chronological Thinking Concept Meaning

After you understand what the concept of chronological thinking means. Next, we will explain what it means to think chronologically. The meaning of chronological thinking is so that you can understand the sequence of events in detail without missing anything related to the events that have occurred.

This has also been explained in terms of chronological thinking. But by knowing the meaning of the concept of chronological thinking, you can better understand why you need to use this concept when analyzing an event that happened in the past.

Chronological Thinking Characteristics

The approach to thinking chronologically in events that occurred in the past turns out to have several characteristics in it, you know. By understanding what are the characteristics of chronological thinking, it will be easier for you to understand and apply the chronological thinking approach.

So what are the characteristics possessed by chronological thinking? The following are some of the characteristics possessed by the conological thinking approach in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past.

• Has a vertical character

The first feature is vertical, which at this point will refer to the sequence of events that have taken place. So later each event will be sorted from beginning to end to coherently.

• Emphasis on the duration of events

Next is the emphasis on the duration process. Where is the process of chronological thinking approach in studying if history or events in the past is a process of time.

• Has such a wide scope

In contrast to the synchronous thinking approach which has a narrower scope. In thinking chronologically the scope given is wider.

• Be able to describe an event

Every analysis of past events with a chronological thinking approach is able to provide results or information that is so complete because the scope that is carried out is also so wide.

• Able to check the continuity of events

By using a chronological thinking process approach for an event that occurred in the past, the information obtained can be in the form of a continuity between one event and a past event. Because in the analysis there will be an emphasis on the time of events between one another which are still related.

• There is a comparison

By carrying out a chronological thinking approach to past events, the results obtained can be in the form of comparisons. This comparison, among others, is like cause and effect or the glory and destruction of an event that occurred in the past.

Examples of Chronological Thinking

Even though you already understand the meaning of chronological thinking, its characteristics and meaning. So that you can more easily understand how the chronological thinking approach is applied in the analysis of events that occurred in the past.

Of course, several examples are needed in order to better understand how the results and also the process of analysis were carried out on past events with a chronological thinking approach. The following are some examples of the chronological thinking approach to the analysis of past events.

First example:

Quoted from the Ministry of Education and Culture of the Republic of Indonesia, the use of chronological thinking is a characteristic of historical thinking which focuses on a process where an event occurred in the past.

An example is the liberal democracy material from 1950 to 1959 which can be broken down lengthwise. In addition, it is also easier to obtain a chronological description of the formation of a liberal democratic government up to the Presidential Decree dated July 5, 1959.

In historical records, there were 7 cabinet changes from 1950 to 1959. The following is a record of cabinet changes in those years.

1. The Natsir Cabinet from 6 September 1950 to 21 March 1951
2. Sukiman Cabinet from 27 April 1951 to 3 April 1952
3. Wilopo Cabinet from 3 April 1952 to 3 July 1953
4. Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo from 31 July 1953 to 12 August 1955
5. The Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet from 12 August 1955 to 3 March 1956
6. Cabinet of Ali II from 20 March 1956 to 4 March 1957
7. Djuanda Cabinet from 9 April 1957 to 5 July 1959

From this example, it can be seen that there is a chronological thinking approach to the analysis of the events of Liberal Democracy from 1950 to the issuance of the Presidential Decree in 1959.

Second example:

The next example is the 1945 proclamation event could not happen directly. Certainly there were several other events that led to the 1945 proclamation. Of course, to find out which events led to the 1945 proclamation to occur, a chronological thinking approach is needed.

The description before the event of the proclamation is as follows.

1. On August 6, 1945, America bombed the city of Hiroshima. Hiroshima City is an important city in Japan.
2. Then on August 9, 1945, America bombed Nagasaki City. Nagasaki City is also one of the important cities in Japan.
3. On August 15, 1945, Japan surrendered to the American bloc.
4. On August 15, 1945, Sutan Syahrir learned the news of Japan’s surrender
5. On August 16, 1945, the Young Group forced Bung Karno to carry out Indonesian independence. This situation is known as the Rengasdengklok event.
6. On August 17, 1945, the text of the proclamation was read.

With the chronological thinking approach as in the example above. Of course, the results of the description of one event with other events that are mutually continuous will be easily known.

Third example:

The next example is in the post-World War II or WW2 events it is explained coherently if communism existed and was respected for about half a century. With this in mind, the world had to go through a cold war that could affect the political situation of many countries.

However, in just two years from 1989 to 1991 the world also witnessed the dissolution of the existing communist countries in Eastern Europe. This could also be a sign that the cold war was over and the collapse of the communist state.

Differences in Chronological and Synchronic Thinking

In studying history, there is a chronological thinking approach and a synchronic thinking approach. Previously you have read what is chronological thinking. However, this point will still be explained more briefly as material for comparison between chronological and synchronic thinking.

• Understanding

Starting from the previous understanding, chronological thinking is a way of analysis by ordering the time of events from beginning to end. Of course, every event that is sequenced in time has something to do with the big topic being discussed.

By using this chronological thinking concept, you can find out what made the event happen. Because it is impossible for an event to occur without several small events that occur before it.

Then for the concept of synchronic thinking itself is an analysis of an event that occurs at a certain time. If the chronological thinking approach has a widening concept. So in the analysis the synchronic approach is narrowing. Both are equally useful for analyzing past events.

Even historians use these two approaches to analyze a historical event that occurred in the past. Of course, the results obtained will also be more complete.

So you can use some of these approaches to analyze an event in the past.

• Characteristic features

After discussing the meaning of both. So the next comparison is on the characteristics of chronological thinking and synchronous thinking.

• The characteristics of chronological thinking

• Vertical
• The emphasis in the analysis process is emphasized on the duration or time of events that are interconnected
• The scope obtained from the analysis with the chronological approach is wider than the synchronic approach.
• Analysis on one event can be described more clearly
• Doing research from one event to another. Of course, each of these events has a relationship
• There is a concept of comparison

• Synchronic thinking features

• Horizontal
• In contrast to chronological thinking, synchronic thinking does not have a comparison in it
• The study is conducted only on events that occur at a certain time
• The scope of the synchronous thinking approach is narrower than the chronological thinking approach
• The resulting study will be more structured
• Besides being structured, the synchronous thinking approach to an analysis of past events is also more systematic
• The study carried out is arguably more in-depth and serious

• Objective

Finally, the difference between chronological and synchronic thinking is seen from the purpose of the approach taken to an event that occurred in the past. Starting from chronological thinking which has the goal of being able to think chronologically or sequentially from one event to another based on interconnected time.

Meanwhile, the purpose of synchronic thinking is to make people aware of all the changes that have occurred over events in the past. Although both have fundamental differences.

But in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will be more helpful. Both during the process and the results obtained after carrying out the process.

Conclusion from chronological thinking

Previously you have read related to the discussion of chronological thinking. Starting from the definition, characteristics, meaning to examples. In addition, you have also read an explanation related to the comparison of chronological and synchronous thinking.

Entering the last discussion is in the conclusion section. The concept of chronological thinking is a method of analyzing events that occurred in the past with an emphasis on time.

This means that the time from one event to another that has occurred in the past that are interconnected will be sequenced sequentially. In the process of analysis there will also be a comparison in it.

The scope of the analysis results with the help of a chronological thinking approach will also be wider in scope. Of course, with a chronological thinking approach, people will also have thoughts in a coherent and orderly manner every time they do an analysis.

That’s complete information related to chronological thinking, starting from understanding to conclusions, you can read everything. If you need a history book so you can more easily apply the chronological thinking concept approach.

 

Matrices have various operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication. These operations use their own way. This is caused by the arrangement of numbers in the matrix which is different from other mathematical operations.

The following is an explanation of the addition operation on the matrix and examples of questions to support the You learning process.

Overview of the Matrix

A matrix is ​​an arrangement of numbers, symbols or expressions arranged in columns and rows to form a rectangular shape. As an initial description of the matrix, You can listen to the example of a 2 x 3 matrix below.

The size of the matrix is ​​determined by the number of rows and columns it has. A matrix with m columns and n rows is called an m x n matrix, where m and n are called by their dimensions. For example, the matrix above is called a 2 x 3 matrix. This is because the matrix consists of 2 rows and 3 columns.

A matrix with the same number of rows and columns is called a square matrix. The matrix with the number of one row is called a row vector. Meanwhile, a matrix with one column is called a column vector.

An infinite matrix is ​​a matrix with an unlimited number of rows or columns (or both). In some contexts, matrices considered without rows or columns are called empty matrices.

For further explanation, You can listen to the image below.

Row m is horizontal and column n is vertical. Each element of the matrix is ​​often denoted by a variable of two index notations. For example, a _2,1 represents the elements in the second row and first column of matrix A.

Each object in the matrix A with dimension m x n is often denoted by a _i,j. Which is the maximum value i = m and the maximum value j = n. The objects in the matrix are called elements, entries or members of the matrix.

If two matrices have the same dimensions (each matrix has the same number of rows and columns), then the two matrices can be added or subtracted element by element. However, based on the rules of matrix multiplication, the conditions for matrix multiplication, namely when the number of columns of the first matrix is ​​equal to the number of rows of the second matrix in the multiplication of two matrices.

That is, multiplying an m x n matrix by an n x p matrix results in an m x p matrix . Therefore, matrix multiplication is not commutative. In general, matrices are used to represent linear transformations, that is, a generalization of linear functions such as f ( x ) = 4 x.

For example, the effect of rotation in three-dimensional space is a linear transformation denoted by the matrix R. If v is a vector in three dimensions, the result R _v represents the position of the point after it is rotated.

The matrix can be applied in various cyan fields. For example in physics in the form of classical mechanics, optics, and quantum mechanics. Matrices are also used to study physical states, such as the motion of planets. In the field of computer graphics, matrices are applied to manipulate 3D models and project them onto a two-dimensional screen.

In the field of probability theory and statistics, matrices are used as an explanation of state probabilities. As in the pagerank algorithm in determining the order of disbursement pages on Google. The matrix calculus generalizes the classical analytic form of literal and exponential to higher dimensions. Matrices are also applied in economics to describe relational economic systems.

Matrix Functions in Everyday Life

Even though matrix operations look difficult, they have many benefits to make human work easier in everyday life. Here are some of the benefits of studying matrices in everyday life.

• Assist engineers in solving problems with many variables.
• Matrix can also be used to create reports and journals.
• Solving a system of linear equations, geometric transformations, determining television broadcast schedules, and computer programming.
• Helps analyze economic problems that have various kinds of variables.
• As a way to analyze in statistics, education, science, economics, and technology.
• Help find solutions to investigation operations, for example natural resource investigation operations (coal, petroleum, and so on).

Matrix Addition Concept

The addition operation on matrices can only be performed when the order of the matrices in the operation is the same. The sum of two matrices A = and B = is a new matrix C = of the same order, that is, its elements are the result of the addition or subtraction of the elements of matrices A and B.

The following is the concept or operating formula for matrix addition.

The properties of the matrix addition operation are as follows.

1. Commutative properties
A + B = B = A

2. Associative nature
(A + B) + C = A + (B + C) = A + B + C

The null matrix is ​​a summation identity matrix so it applies:
A + 0 = 0 + A = A

The identity matrix in the arithmetic operation of addition matrix –A.
A + (-A) = (-A) + A = 0

In order to better understand matrix addition, You can listen to the following example questions.

Calculate A + B, if you know matrices A and B as follows.

Answer:

Transpose, Determinant, and Matrix Inverse

1. Transpose the Matrix

Transpose matrix is ​​a matrix that is operated by exchanging row elements into columns and column elements into rows from the initial matrix. The notation of the transpose matrix is ​​usually with ^AT .

The transpose operation only occurs with matrices and vectors. In a scalar there is no transpose operation because it only consists of one row and one column. This causes the scalar value to be equal to the transpose of the scalar.

Transpose matrix has several properties, including the following.

• (AT) ^T = A
• (A + B) ^T = A ^T + B ^T
• (A – B) ^T = A ^T – B ^T
• (kA) ^T = kAT ^where k is a constant
• (AB) ^T = B ^T A ^T

In order to better understand the transpose matrix, You can listen to the example below.

2. Matrix Determinants

The determinant is a value that is calculated through the elements of a matrix similar in shape to a square. The symbol for the determinant of matrix A is det (A), det A, or |A|. A square matrix is ​​a matrix that has the same number of rows and columns.

If the number of rows and columns is different then the determinant cannot be found. Keep in mind that the basic theory of matrices is the addition of columns in a table or subtracting, multiplying, or dividing the values ​​in a column.

The determinant has certain distinctive properties such as in a matrix A and B of order n x n as follows.

• |AB| = |A| |B|
• |AT| = |A|. The symbol T is a matrix transpose.
• |A-1| = 1/|A| or also known as matrix inverse.
• |kA| = kn|A|. K is a real number and n is the order of matrix A.
• If in a matrix all elements, both rows and columns, are 0, then the determinant value is also 0.
• If the two rows or columns in the matrix are the same or multiples, then the determinant value is 0.

In order to better understand the determinant of matrices, You can listen to the following examples of determinants.

a. Determine the determinant value of the matrix of order 2 x 2 below.

b. Determine the determinant value of the matrix of order 3 x 3 below.

sec(A) = 1.1.2 + 2.4.3 + 3.2.1 – 3.1.3 – 1.4.1 – 2.2.2

= 2 + 24 + 6 – 9 – 4 – 8

= 11

3. Inverse Matrix

Inverse means the opposite. Meanwhile, the inverse matrix is ​​the opposite of a matrix. If the matrix is ​​multiplied by the inverse it will become an identity matrix. The matrix inverse is denoted by A ^-1 . The terms of the matrix inverse, namely the determinant value of the matrix is ​​not equal to zero.

Determination of the inverse of a matrix has two rules or ways based on the order. The following details how to determine the inverse.

a. Inverse Matrix Based on Order 2 x 2

The inverse matrix of order 2 x 2 can be found in the following way.

To better understand the inverse matrix of order 2 x 2, You can listen to the following problem.

b. Inverse Matrix Based on Order 3 x 3

The inverse matrix of order 3 x 3 can be found by the Gauss Jordan elimination method. The system can be stated as follows.

The square matrix A is eliminated by means of algebraic operations to form an identity matrix. If matrix A has become an identity matrix, it will turn into the inverse of matrix A.

To better understand the inverse matrix of order 3 x 3, You can listen to the following problem.

Example of a Matrix Problem and its Solution

To better understand the matrix, You can listen to some of the matrix problems and their solutions below.

1. Determine the value of x + y from the matrix below.

Answer:

When you know an equation in the matrix, what you can do is solve it step by step.

From the matrix operations and matrix similarities above, several equations can be found between them as follows.

So the value of x + y is 23.

2. It is known that matrices A and B are as follows.

If A + B = C, then determine the inverse matrix C!

Answer:

3. The matrices A and B are known as below.

If C = AB, then determine the value of the inverse matrix C!

Answer:

4. The travel agent “Lombok Charming” offers travel packages as shown in the table below.

	Package I	Package II
Rent hotels	5	6
Tourist attraction	4	5
total cost	3,100,000	3,000,000

The appropriate matrix form for determining the cost of renting a hotel each night and the cost of one tourist attraction is…

Answer:

For example, hotel rental = x and tourist attractions = y, then the table above can be presented in matrix form, more or less like the following.

To get x and y values ​​in the matrix equation, you can use the matrix inverse as follows.

5. Determine the determinant of matrix (A + B) ² from matrix A and matrix B as follows.

Answer:

By applying the rules of matrix multiplication and matrix determinant |A ⁿ |=|A| ⁿ will then be obtained.

So, the determinant of matrix (A + B) ² is 0.

6. If matrix A = then the value of A ² – 2A + I is…

Answer:

By using the matrix multiplication rule can be obtained as follows.

7. The inverse matrix A is known as follows.

How many x matrices satisfy the relationship:

Answer:

By applying one of the properties of matrix A . A ^-1 = I so it can be written as follows.

8. Determine the determinant of A ^T A + BB ^T from the following two matrices.

Answer:

So, the value of A ^T A + BB ^T = 5

9. Determine matrix A from the product of the following matrices.

Answer:

10. Determine the inverse of matrix X that satisfies the following equation.

Answer:

By applying the properties of the matrix A . B = C then B = A ^-1 . C, then the following equation is obtained.

Characteristics of a Liberal Democracy – Liberal democracy is the political system used by most modern European countries. Before becoming the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia as it is today, you need to know that the Indonesian state has also used a liberal democratic political system.

Based on historical records, it turns out that the Indonesian state was once led not by a president as it is now. In a country, we often recognize the terms head of government and head of state. However, of course you have also heard of the term Prime Minister, right?

In the early period of independence until entering guided democracy or more precisely in 1950 to 1959, the Indonesian state adopted a system of government known as liberal democracy.

So, in this article, we will present a discussion of liberal democracy, starting from the characteristics of liberal democracy, its meaning, strengths and weaknesses, and its cabinet. Let’s see more!

The difference between the Head of Government and the Head of State

Before entering into a discussion of the characteristics of liberal democracy. We need to know that the term for head of government and head of state in Indonesia is currently held by a President.

The head of state is basically a figure who is a representative of a country for interests at the domestic and international levels. In addition, a head of state also has a very important role because he is a representative of a country being led.

However, in many other countries, the position of head of state is not only occupied by a president. For example, in several countries that adopt a monarchy or royal system (Saudi Arabia, England), the head of state will be occupied by a king.

In contrast to the head of state, the head of government is a position that has the responsibility to lead the running of a country’s government. In a country that adheres to a parliamentary system, the head of government is held by a person called the prime minister.

In Indonesia itself, the head of government during the liberal democracy era was led by a prime minister. So, as part of learning the history of citizenship education, it is certainly important for the younger generation to know what happened in the past.

What Is Liberal Democracy?

Liberal democracy basically means democracy that departs from individual rights. This means that every citizen or individual becomes the ruling party in this democratic system. Those in power have the same rights regardless of their ethnic origin or religion.

Meanwhile, another understanding says that liberal democracy is a political system that protects individual rights from government power in a constitutional way. This makes the decision of the majority to determine the determination of government policies that are subject to restrictions.

According to Robert Dahl, liberal democracy has two important concepts that need to be known. The two concepts include contestation and participation. Contestation itself means a debate or objection that can be realized with the right to form parties and freedom of the press.

Freedom of the Press as a Result of Liberal Democracy

As previously stated, freedom in a liberal democracy has resulted in many parties being formed. This freedom is also an opportunity for each party to accommodate aspirations that are often different from one individual to another. The existence of differences in political views that are accommodated is one of the triggers for the emergence of contestation.

When the Indonesian state embraced liberal democracy, the culture of contestation seemed very strong. This is very visible when there is a fairly dynamic cabinet change. Within 9 years of liberal democracy, there have been 7 cabinets that have ruled.

Robert Dahl himself understands the concept of participation can be realized through general elections. The general election itself must be held in a fair and equitable manner so that all citizens who have voting rights can participate. There were around 172 parties that competed in the 1955 election.

Characteristics of Liberal Democracy

After knowing the meaning and history of liberal democracy, the next discussion is the characteristics of liberal democracy. The following are certain characteristics possessed by a liberal democratic system, including:

1. Political participation that can be followed by all levels of society

The liberal democratic system provides freedom for all individuals to be able to participate in politics without discriminating against race, religion, or ethnic origin. The emergence of various groups or groups of people who took part is an illustration of the various parties that competed in the 1955 election (Indonesia’s first election).

The first general election ever held by Indonesia was attended by various participants. In fact, not only parties participate, there are those who participate in elections as individuals. The 1995 election itself was followed by parties, such as the Indonesian Communist Party (PKI), Indonesian Socialist Party (PSI), Murba, Young Communist Forces (Acoma), to R. Soedjono Prawirosoedarso.

2. Voting through elections in a certain period in secret

The next feature of liberal democracy is voting in elections which are carried out in a certain period in secret. In a liberal democracy, voting is something that is very important because elections are the path that must be taken by political participants to win seats in government.

3. Facilitation of individual freedom

One of the values ​​that must exist in liberalism is individual freedom. Therefore, a liberal system cannot be embedded if individual freedom is eliminated. One way that is commonly used to implement individual freedom is by channeling thoughts through affiliation with certain politics.

In the implementation of liberal democracy, it is possible to have political parties with a large number. The history of Indonesia itself has recorded that there were several parties based on the religion of Islam, including Masyumi, Nahdlatul Ulama, the Indonesian Islamic Syarikat Party, and the Indonesian Tarbiyah Movement. There are 4 parties for the Muslim community, of course it is proof that one of the values ​​that must exist in a liberal democracy is that individual freedom must be facilitated.

4. A government that can form laws in accordance with a majority vote in parliament

When Indonesia adopted a guided democracy system of government, the head of government was held by a prime minister. The prime minister here is a representative of the party winning the majority of votes or it can be said the party winning the election. Meanwhile, when entering the liberal democracy era, there were many policy changes.

Some of the policy changes that have taken place are understandable. This can be seen from the frequent changes of cabinet during that era. Within 9 years of liberal democracy, there have been 7 cabinet changes.

5. Limited government power

One of the most visible characteristics of a liberal democracy is the limited powers of the government. One of the reasons for the government’s power to be limited is as an effort to prevent a government that is only controlled by one particular group. This is important in a liberal democracy so that the check and balance mechanism remains in effect in a government in power.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Liberal Democracy

Of all the existing government systems, it must be recognized that no system is perfect. Each system has its own advantages, as well as the disadvantages of the government system adopted. This applies to the liberal democratic government system that is widely adopted by various countries. The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of a liberal democratic system that you need to know, including:

1. Advantages of Liberal Democracy

• Liberal democracy accommodates various different views that occur at the grassroots level, for example all citizens can form their own parties.
• The power of a liberal democratic government has limitations so that it is easier to supervise.

2. Lack of Liberal Democracy

• The political climate of a liberal democracy is not always good when there are too many parties.
• In accordance with what happened when the Indonesian state used a liberal democratic system, political parties were more focused on maintaining power than thinking about a policy that had a good impact on the nation and state. A country must always maintain its stability. However, there are often ideological differences that arise in many political parties, which hinder policy making, such as laws and so on.

The Governing Cabinet In Times Of Liberal Democracy

After learning about the definition and characteristics of liberal democracy, in the following, we will continue with a discussion of the cabinet that ruled during the liberal democracy era.

It should be noted that when entering the post-1998 reform era, Indonesia was led by several cabinets, namely the Gotong Royong Cabinet and the United Indonesia Cabinet. The use of the name of the post-reform cabinet is different from that during the liberal democracy. Several cabinets that ruled Indonesia during a liberal democracy used the name of the Prime Minister as the name of their cabinet.

1. The Natsir Cabinet (6 September 1950 – 21 March 1951)

The first cabinet to rule in the era of liberal democracy was the Natsir cabinet. The cabinet that has been in power for less than a year must end its term after being granted a vote of no confidence.

During his cabinet leadership, Natsir, who came from the Masyumi Party, made one of the most well-known policies in history, namely that Indonesia registered itself to become a member of the United Nations. Not only that, Natsir also issued an economic policy called the Benteng Program. The Benteng program itself is aimed at local entrepreneurs so they can be more advanced.

Apart from that, Natsir’s cabinet was the first party to try to hold general elections. Even though in the end his leadership period had to end before the election could take place.

2. Sukiman Cabinet (27 April 1951- 3 April 1952)

In the history of liberal democracy in Indonesia, the Masyumi party has occupied the highest seat in parliament three times and formed a cabinet. This cabinet that has been in power for almost a full year is the second cabinet that has succeeded in leading Indonesia in the era of liberal democracy.

Each cabinet has its own focus in issuing policies. In the Sukiman cabinet, several policies were born, such as standardization of minimum wages, establishment of labor union regulations, and holiday allowances (THR).

3. Wilopo Cabinet (3 April 1952 – 3 June 1953)

After the Masyumi party came to power twice in a row, the Wilopo Cabinet, which came from the Indonesian National Party, finally won the lead so that it is entitled to occupy the highest seat in the parliament.

This cabinet, which has been in power for two months longer than the Sukiman Cabinet, issued the same policy as the previous cabinet, namely efforts to prepare for Indonesia’s first general election. However, his fate was no different from that of his predecessor cabinet, which failed to hold elections because it had to end first through a vote of no confidence.

4. Ali Sastroamidjojo I Cabinet (31 July 1953 – 12 August 1955)

After the failure of the Wilopo Cabinet, the Indonesian National Party again managed to lead a cabinet with a new name, namely the Ali Sastroamidjojo Cabinet. During Ali Sastroamidjojo’s leadership, Indonesia successfully hosted the first Asian-African Conference (KAA) which was located in Bandung.

It didn’t stop there, Ali Sastroamidjojo’s cabinet also issued a policy known as the Ali Baba Economic System. This program that focuses on the economy has the goal of creating local entrepreneurs through organizing training to granting credit and import permits.

5. Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet (12 August 1955 – 3 March 1956)

The cabinet that ruled during the next liberal democracy was the Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet. This cabinet, which came from Masyumi, was the only cabinet that was not disbanded due to a vote of no confidence by the existing party factions.

One of the great achievements ever made by the Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet was the successful holding of elections and handing over the reins of power to the winner of the election. In the first 1955 elections in Indonesia, the Indonesian National Party won.

6. Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo II (20 March 1956 – 4 March 1957)

As the party that won the 1955 election, the Indonesian National Party has the right to form a cabinet to run its government. Ali Sastroamidjojo returned to represent the PNI as Prime Minister. In this second term of leadership, Ali Sastro did something that could be said to be brave. The Ali Sastro Cabinet decided to cancel the contents of the Round Table Conference (KMB) as a form of protest against the Dutch.

Although elected through a general election mechanism, this second Ali Sastro cabinet eventually had to end its term of office like its predecessor cabinet. The Ali Sastroamidjojo cabinet, which has been in power for more than a year, again faced a motion of no confidence.

7. Djuanda Cabinet (9 April 1957 – 5 July 1959)

Djuanda’s cabinet became the last cabinet in the liberal democracy era. Djuanda himself served on the basis of obtaining a mandate from President Soekarno. The cabinet that has been in power for the longest time during this liberal democracy has had several extraordinary achievements, including the issuance of the Djuanda Declaration.

The Djuanda Declaration itself was issued as a form of establishing the territorial boundaries of Indonesia’s seas. The end of Djuanda’s cabinet leadership came when President Soekarno issued a presidential decree. This decree also marked the end of liberal democracy in Indonesia.

Closing

The era of liberal democracy has long passed, many of the figures who filled it have long preceded us. As the younger generation who will continue the baton of their predecessors, of course we must recognize an important chapter in the history of our country.

Those are some discussions of liberal democracy, such as the definition of liberal democracy, the characteristics of liberal democracy, the advantages and disadvantages of liberal democracy. Hopefully all the discussion above can add insight as well as be useful for Sinaumed’s.

For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about the characteristics of liberal democracy, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The Boundary of the Americas – The Americas are one of the continents in the western part of the earth. Where this one continent is often divided into two sub-continents, namely North America and South America. However, in general the Americas are one continent as a whole. The total area of ​​the Americas is 42,549,000, with an estimated population of 965 million. Based on its position on the map, the geographical location of the American continent is surrounded by three oceans, namely the Arctic Ocean to the north, the Atlantic Ocean to the east, and the Pacific Ocean to the west and south. America can be divided into several regions, namely North America, Central America, the Caribbean Islands, and also South America.

Meanwhile, based on its position according to longitude and latitude, the astronomical location of the Americas is at 83°N–55°S and 10°W–170°W. The American continent stretches from the northern hemisphere to the southern hemisphere and its entire territory is in the western hemisphere. The American continent also has a border area with the surrounding area, both in the north, west and south. In brief, these are some of the vast boundaries of the Americas.

– North side : Arctic Ocean
– East side : Atlantic Ocean
– West side : Pacific Ocean
– South side : Pacific Ocean, Antarctic Ocean

America’s Boundary

Below we will discuss in more detail about the boundaries of the American continent, be it from land boundaries or water boundaries to the north, east, west, and south.

1. North side

To the north, the American continent is bordered by the waters of the Arctic Ocean which is close to the North Pole.

2. East side

Then to the east, the American continent is bordered by the waters of the Atlantic Ocean which separates the Americas from the continent of Europe.

3. West side

To the west, the Americas are bordered by the waters of the Pacific Ocean which separates the Americas and Oceania and the Asian continent to the west.

4. South side

To the south, the Americas are bordered by the Pacific Ocean or the Antarctic Ocean. The two oceans do not have clear water boundaries in the south, because the Antarctic Ocean is a confluence of three oceans namely the Pacific, Atlantic and Indian Oceans.

It should be noted that the area of ​​the Americas itself reaches 41,825,581 square kilometers and places it as the second largest continent after Asia. Quoting from the Ministry of Education and Culture’s Learning Resources site, the astronomical location of the Americas is between 35 degrees West Longitude – 170 West Longitude and 83 degrees North Latitude (LU) – 55 degrees South Latitude (LS).

Meanwhile, in terms of geographical location, the Americas are located in the western hemisphere. Where the Americas are located between the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. This continent is also flanked by the waters of the Arctic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. Based on its territorial division, the Americas are divided into North America, Central America and South America which are home to 35 countries. The North and South American territories are connected by the Isthmus of Panama.

The Influence of the Astronomical Position of the Americas

There are several influences related to the astronomical location of the Americas as seen from the position of latitude and longitude. The following are some of the impacts and also the influence of the astronomical location of the Americas and their explanations.

1. Climate Conditions of the Americas

This area of ​​the American continent has a different climate according to the location of the region. On this one continent there are four climates.

a. Polar climate

Regions with arctic climates have relatively long winters and very short summers. This polar climate exists in the northernmost region of the Americas.

b. Subtropical climate

In this climate, there are four seasons, namely winter, spring, summer, and autumn. Regions that experience this climate are in the southern region and also the northernmost region.

c. Tropical climate

This climate brings high rainfall and humidity and hot temperatures throughout the year. Regions that experience this tropical climate include Central America and South America.

d. Desert Climate

Regions that have a desert climate often experience temperature changes in a very fast tempo and have low rainfall. This desert climate covers the areas that are behind the mountains in the Americas.

2. Natural Conditions of the Americas

The natural conditions in North America, Central America and South America have different characteristics. This causes the landscape conditions of the Americas to have high variations. The North American region has complex mountains which are a series of Rocky Mountains. This mountain range consists of the Cascade Mountains, the Western Sierra Madre Mountains, and also the Sierra Madre Nevada. There is also the Grand Canyon as the widest and also the largest canyon in the world which was formed by the flow of the Colorado River.

Meanwhile, in South America, there are the Andes Mountains which have the highest peak on Mount Aconcagua, which is 6,959 meters above sea level. There are also the Guayana Plateau, the Patagonia Plateau, and the Brazilian Plateau which supply springs for major rivers such as the Amazon River. The lowland itself is very fertile and one of them is the vast Amazon Forest. It is different from the natural conditions in Central America, which are quite complicated and geologically irregular. The Central American region is dominated by plateau plains and mountains with the Mexican Plateau being quite popular.

To the south, are the Isthmus of Panama and the Isthmus of Tehuantepec. On the Isthmus of Panama, a canal was made that connected the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. It is also known as the Panama Canal.

3. Biodiversity

The American continent has some biodiversity, namely in the form of flora and fauna, especially those in the South American region. There is some natural diversity such as tropical rain forests, deserts, and also tundra caused by its astronomical and geographical location.

4. Time Zone

There are several time zones in the Americas, including the outer islands of countries in the Americas, including:

– UTC-12, covers the outer islands of the United States.
– UTC-11, covers the territory of American Samoa, the outer islands of the United States.
– UTC-10, covering Hawaii (US) (Hawaii Time Zone).
– UTC-9, covering Alaska (US) (Alaska Time Zone).
– UTC-8, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Pacific Time Zone),
– UTC-7, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Mountain Time Zone).
– UTC-6, includes Chile, Ecuador, Honduras, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, Belize, Mexico, Canada & the United States (Central Time Zone).
– UTC-5, includes Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Panama, Bahamas, Haiti, Peru, Cuba, Canada & United States (Eastern Time Zone).
– UTC-4.30, covering Venezuela.
– UTC-4, includes Brazil, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Barbados, Aruba, Bermuda, Dominica, Guyana, Guadaloupe, Antigua & Barbuda, Saint Kitts & Nevis, Trinidad & Tobago, Saint Lucia, Canada & United States (Atlantic Time Zone ).
– UTC-3, includes Brazil, Uruguay, Argentina, Suriname.
– UTC-2, includes Brazil.

5. The Condition of the Residents of the Americas

Quoting from the IPS Module published by the Ministry of Education and Culture in 2022, the Americas are inhabited by more than 1 billion people as of 2016. There are two residents there, namely indigenous people and immigrant residents. The original inhabitants of the Americas are the Eskimos and Indians, whose ancestors are traced back to the Mongols. Compared to the original inhabitants, immigrants from outside who have come in waves since several centuries ago, including also from Europe, are more dominant in the Americas. However, mixing also occurs there.

Immigrants or immigrants in the Americas are divided into four major groups, namely the Mongols or yellow skin, Negro people or black skin, European people or white skin, and also Egyptian people. Therefore, there are many ethnic groups that until now inhabit the Americas. For example, from these ethnic groups, namely Cheyenne, Comanche, Sioux, Navajo, Pueblo, Cherokee, Iroquois, Mulato, Creole, and also Huron.

6. Landscapes

The Americas have different landscape conditions and are divided into North America, Central America, and also South America. These natural conditions cause differences in landscapes such as mountains, animals, and also rivers.

a. North America

North America stretches from Alaska in the north to Mexico in the south. The climate in the northern region tends to be colder compared to other parts of the American continent. The famous mountains in North America are the Rocky Mountains which consist of the Cascade, the Western Sierra Madre Mountains, and the Sierra Madre Nevada. While the broad valley area that is quite famous in North America is the Grand Canyon.

On the North American continent, a number of long rivers flow which form the border between Mexico and the United States. Where the rivers include the Mississippi River, Missouri River, Colorado River, Arkansas River, and Rio Grande River.

b. Central America

Central America consists of mountains and plains up to 2,500 meters high. In the southern part of Central America, there is a canal that connects the Pacific Ocean with the Atlantic Ocean.

c. South America

South America has mountains, plateaus, lowlands, and also rivers. The Andes Mountains are the highest mountains in the Americas with a peak reaching 6,959 meters above sea level. Then in the southern part of the Americas, there is a large river, namely the Amazon river. The river flows into several tributaries covered by the Amazon jungle. This Amazon forest has a variety of flora and fauna because it is in a tropical climate. Examples of animals that live in the tropical climate of America are bison, alligators, bears, lamas, jaguars, cougars, monkeys, lizards, snakes, and many more.

Characteristics of the Americas

Every continent in the world certainly has its own characteristics, and the Americas are no exception. The following are some of the characteristics of the Americas, including:

1. Physical Characteristics

In general, the Americas are divided into two regions, namely North and South America. Even though both are in the Americas, the two regions have different climates. The climate in North America is subarctic climate, while in the south it looks a bit tropical. South America has two climates, namely the northern part with tropical climate and the remaining part with cold climate.

The climate division also affects the distribution of flora and fauna. This is due to the existence of diverse landscapes. Brazil has tropical rain forests and the Amazon River, so that it is inhabited by various kinds of plants and animals. While in North America there are grasslands that can be used for agriculture.

2. Socio-Cultural Characteristics

When Columbus discovered the Americas and called it the New World, which indicated that a narrow understanding of looking at the world, where this world was not only limited to the European continent. Increasingly, America is not only inhabited by Europeans. But also Asian and African people also came to America. Thus, there was an encounter between various tribes, races, ethnicities, and religions in every region of the Americas.

These meetings created an increasingly diverse American population. This certainly has an impact on social and cultural life. A person or group who comes from outside the Americas does not only come with a body, but also with a different social and cultural background. This has made America have diverse social and cultural positions that have survived to this day.

In its socio-cultural development, the Americas also experienced assimilation which gave birth to a new culture. These variations take the form of religion, art, race, and so on. For example, in South America, North America the dominant use of English. However, in South America they prefer to use Portuguese or Spanish.

Meanwhile, religions that are developing in the Americas include:

– Catholicism, many residents of Central America and South America.
– Protestant Christianity, widely adhered to by the population of North America.
– Islam is the religion of many people of Arab, Malay and Negro descent.
– Judaism, many American residents of Jewish descent.
– Hinduism, many Americans of Indian, Nepalese and Sri Lankan descent adhere to it.
– Buddhism, Taoism, Confucianism and Shinto are widely followed by people of Chinese, Japanese, Korean and Indo-Chinese descent.
– Anglican Christianity, many people of British descent.

3. Economic Characteristics

The Americas have a distinctive economic pattern when viewed from the size of its area, the variety of landscapes, and also geopolitical influences. The economy in the Americas has advantages, namely in the field of trade. This is because some of the countries with the largest economies in the world, including those in the G20, are part of the Americas.

In the Americas alone there are five countries that are officially listed on the G20 website. Among them are Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Mexico, and the United States. The economic activities in the Americas are also supported by the strength of the United States as the most influential country in the world. Countries in the Americas do not only rely on trade, but also trade. Countries in Latin America such as the United States, Venezuela, and others rely on petroleum as a mainstay commodity. There are also several countries that use mineral mining as an economic driver.

This is an explanation of the vast boundaries of the Americas and the influence of astronomical and geographical location on natural conditions, climate, population, and socio-culture. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the vast boundaries of other continents, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The Book of Safinatun Najah – Basically, all Muslims in this world are required to study fiqh which contains knowledge of legal issues that regulate daily life in Islamic law. In the science of jurisprudence, we do not only study how to worship properly, but also with regard to buying and selling systems, and so on. Well, one of the books that contains the science of fiqh is the book Safinatun Najah which was written by a scholar from Yemen based on the Shafi’i school of thought. If You doesn’t know the form and content of the Safinatun Najah book, that’s okay , because we will study it in this article.

The author of the book Safinatun Najah is Sheikh Salim bin Abdullah bin Sa’ad bin Sumair Al Hadhrami who succeeded in summarizing the laws in jurisprudence clearly and of course using language that is easy to understand. That is why, this book is often intended for novice students at Islamic boarding schools. Just a little trivia , Syekh Salim bin Abdullah died in Jakarta in the 13th century H. So, what is the Safinatun Najah book? What are the contents contained in the book? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is the Safinatun Najah Book?

The Book of Safinatun Najah or which has the full name as Safinatun Najah Fiima Yajibu ala Abdi li Maulah, which means ‘ The Boat of Safety in Studying the Obligations of a Servant to His Lord ‘. Well, basically, the book of Safinatun Najah is a book that contains the basics of fiqh written according to the Shafi’i school of thought. The author of this book is Sheikh Salim bin Abdullah bin Sa’ad bin Sumair Al Hadhrami who is a scholar from Yemen. He succeeded in writing this book in a language that was easy to understand, so that it is often used as a reference for studying jurisprudence, especially by novice students.

However, even though it is considered concise, the book of Safinatun Najah still covers various kinds of basics of jurisprudence, you know… Starting from the signs of puberty, the correct method of ablution, what are the pillars of Islam, how to take a mandatory bath, how to pray correctly, when to pray prayer, fasting worship, zakat worship, and how to dismantle the body.

There are 3 total divisions in the book of Safinatun Najah. The first part contains the basic Islamic aqidah which includes the pillars of faith, the pillars of Islam, and the creed. Apart from that, it also explains the characteristics of a person who is mature and how to perform ablution to avoid being unclean.

Furthermore, in the second part, it will contain the method of obligatory bathing, the legal requirements for ablution, and what is forbidden for people who have hadada. In this second part, it also explains about tayammum, zakat worship, to the management of the corpse. Then, the third part will contain matters related to fasting, starting from the requirements of fasting, the pillars of fasting, to the pilgrimage.

Contents of the Safinatun Najah Book

Previously, it was explained that in the book of Safinatun Najah there are 3 sections, each of which explains Islamic beliefs. Well, here is a description which is accompanied by no Arabic language, only Latin.

CHAPTER I INTRODUCTION: Pillars of Islam and Pillars of Faith

In the name of Allah, the Most Gracious, the Most Merciful

All praise is only for Allah, the Lord of the worlds, and to Him we seek help in all matters of this world and the hereafter. And shalawat and greetings may always be poured out on the great Prophet Muhammad SAW The closing of the prophets, also to family and friends. And there is no effort except with the help of Allah, the Most High, the Most Mighty.

Discussion 1: Pillars of Islam

There are five pillars of Islam, namely:

1. Testify that there is no god but Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala and Prophet Muhammad Shollalloohu ‘Alayhi wa Sallam is His messenger.
2. Establish prayer (five times).
3. Pay zakat.
4. Ramadan fasting.
5. The pilgrimage to the baitullah is for those who are able to carry it out.

Discussion 2: Pillars of Faith

There are six pillars of faith, namely:

1. Believe in Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala.
2. Believe in all the Angels
3. Believe in all the holy books.
4. Believe in all the Prophets.
5. Believe in doomsday.
6. Believe in the provisions of good and bad from Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala.

Discussion 3: The Meaning of “Laa Ilaaha Illallah”

As for the meaning of “Laa Ilaaha Illallah” namely: There is no God who has the right to be worshiped in reality other than Allah.

CHAPTER II: Discussion of Tahara (Purification of Hadats)

Discussion 1: Signs of Baligh

There are 3 signs of baligh, namely:

1. Age has reached 15 years for male or female.
2. Dreaming (junub) for boys and girls when they pass the age of nine.
3. Menstrual bleeding for women after the age of nine.

Discussion 2: Requirements for Using Stones for Stending

There are 8 conditions for the permissibility of using stones to marry, namely:

1. Using three stones.
2. Purify the unclean place with the stone.
3. The unclean is not dry.
4. The unclean does not move.
5. The istinja place is not exposed to other objects even though it is not unclean. 6. The uncleanness does not change the location of the istinja (the back of the pubic opening and the front of the pubic head).
6. The unclean is not exposed to water.
7. The stone used must be sacred.

Discussion 3: Pillars of Wudhu

There are 6 pillars of ablution, namely:

1. Intention.
2. Wash face.
3. Wash both hands up to the elbows.
4. Sweep part of the head.
5. Wash both feet up to the ankles.
6. Orderly.

Discussion 4: The intention of ablution

Intention is deliberately in the heart (to do) an action at the same time when doing it.

As for pronouncing this intention, it is sunnah, and the time when you first wash part of your face. The orderliness in question is not giving priority to one member of ablution over another member of ablution.

Discussion 5: Types of Water

There are two kinds of water; A little water and a lot of water. A little water is water that is less than two qullahs and a lot of water is up to two qullahs or more. A little water is unclean if it falls into it, even if it does not change.

As for large amounts of water, it will not become unclean unless the taste, color or smell of the water changes.

Discussion 6: The Reasons That Require Bathing

There are 6 things that require bathing, namely:

1. Inserting the genital head (male) into the vagina (female genitalia).
2. Semen discharge.
3. Menstrual bleeding (menstrual).
4. Puerperal bleeding (blood that comes out after giving birth).
5. Give birth to.
6. Die.

Discussion 7: Pillars of Bathing

There are two obligations in taking a bath, namely:

1. Mandatory bath.
2. Evenly distributes water to all parts of the body perfectly.

Discussion 8: Requirements for Valid Wudhu

There are ten conditions for ablution, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Tamyiz (age and reasonable).
3. Holy from menstruation and childbirth.
4. Clean of anything that can block water from reaching the skin.
5. There is nothing in any of the members of the ablution that changes the authenticity of the water.
6. Knowing that the law of ablution is obligatory.
7. It is not permissible to give `tiqad (belief) that one of the fardhu-fard wudu` is sunnah (not obligatory).
8. The purity of ablution water.
9. Enter the prayer time that is done.
10. Continously

These last two conditions are specific to da`im al-hadats.

Discussion 9: Ablution Cancellation

There are four things that invalidate ablution, namely:

1. If something comes out of one of the two genitals; front (qubul) back (anal) like wind and others, except semen.
2. Loss of mind is like sleeping and so on, except sleeping in a steady sitting position by pressing his seat to the ground.
3. Contact between the skin of a man and the skin of an adult woman who is not a muhrim without any barriers.
4. Touching the genitals or touching the anus with the palm of the hand or the palm of the finger.

Discussion 10: Actions that cannot be done in a state of hadats

People who cancel their ablution (minor hadats), are prohibited from doing the following four things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf (circle the Kaaba seven times).
3. Touching Mushaf Al-Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.

People who are junub (big hadas) are prohibited from doing the following six things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf.
3. Touching Mushaf Al Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.
5. Silence (I’tikaf) in the Mosque.
6. Reciting Al-Qur’an.

Women who are menstruating should not do the following ten things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf.
3. Touching Mushaf Al-Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.
5. Silence (I’tikaf) in the Mosque.
6. Reciting Al-Qur’an.
7. Fast.
8. Divorced.
9. Walking inside the mosque – if he is afraid that he will defile it.
10. Have fun with your wife between the navel and knees.

Discussion 11: Permissible Conditions for Tayammum

There are three reasons for permissible tayammum, namely:

1. There is no water for ablution.
2. There is a disease that results in not being able to use water.
3. There is only water to meet the drinking needs of humans or animals that are muhtaram (respected).

As for besides Muhtaram, there are 6 types of Humans or animals that are not respected there are six types, namely:

1. People who leave the obligatory prayer.
2. Married people who commit adultery.
3. apostate.
4. Kafir Harbiy (One who fights the Muslims)
5. Stray dogs (like to bite).
6. Pig.

Discussion 12: Terms of Tayammum

There are ten conditions for doing tayammum, namely:

1. Tayammum with the ground.
2. Using holy ground is not unclean.
3. The land has never been used before.
4. Pure from other mixtures such as flour and such.
5. Make tayammum.
6. Wipe his face and hands with two different strokes.
7. Eliminate all uncleanness in the body first.
8. Trying to find the Qibla direction before starting tayammum.
9. Tayammum is done after entering the prayer time.
10. Do tayammum for every obligatory prayer.

Discussion 13: Obligations in Tayammum

There are five pillars of tayammum, namely:

1. Move dust.
2. Intention.
3. Wiping face.
4. Wipe both hands up to the elbows.
5. Order between two strokes.

Discussion 14: Abrogation of Tayammum

There are three invalidators of tayammum, namely:

1. Everything that breaks ablution.
2. apostate.
3. Doubtful that there is water, if he does tayammum because there is no water.

Discussion 15: Unclean Can Become Holy

There are three unclean things that can become holy, namely:

1. Khamr (water squeezed from wine) which takes another form (eg vinegar) by itself.
2. Tanned carcass skin.
3. All unclean who has turned into animals.

Discussion 16: Types of Uncleanness

There are three unclean, namely:

1. Great uncleanness (Mughallazhah), i.e. dogs, pigs or those born from one of them.
2. Light uncleanness (Mukhaffafah), namely the urine of a baby boy who does not eat anything other than his mother’s milk and is not yet two years old.
3. Moderate uncleanness (Mutawassithah), that is all unclean except the two unclean ones that have been mentioned.

Discussion 17: How to Clean Up Unclean

Great uncleanness (Mughallazah), purify it by washing it seven times, one of which is using dust, after the impurity is gone.

Light uncleanness (Mukhaffafah), purifies it by sprinkling water thoroughly and removes the unclean substance.

Moderate uncleanness (Mutawassithoh) is divided into two parts, namely:

1. ‘Ainiyyah, namely impurity that still shows its color, smell or taste, so the way to purify this uncleanness is by removing its color, smell and taste.
2. Hukmiyyah, i.e. impurity that does not see its color, smell and taste, so the way to purify this impurity is simply by pouring water on the object affected by the impurity.

Discussion 18: Menstrual Blood (Menstruation)

The fastest menstrual period is a day and night, but generally for six or seven days, and the longest is 15 days. The earliest sacred period between two menstruations is 15 days, but generally 24 or 23 days, and there is no limit to the maximum period.

The fastest postpartum period is a moment, generally 40 days, and the longest is 60 days.

CHAPTER III: PRAYER

Discussion 1: Udzur Prayer

1. Sleep
2. Forget

Discussion 2: Requirements for Valid Prayer

There are eight conditions for the validity of prayer, namely:

1. Holy from the big and small hadats.
2. Clean clothes, body and place from unclean.
3. Close genitals.
4. Facing the Qiblah.
5. Enter prayer time.
6. Know the pillars of prayer.
7. Do not believe that among the pillars of prayer as sunnah.
8. Stay away from all that invalidates prayer.

Kinds of Hadas

There are two kinds of Hadats, namely: Small Hadats and Big Hadats.

1. Minor hadats are hadats that require a person to perform ablution,
2. Major hadats are hadats that oblige a person to take a bath.

Limitation of Male and Female Aurat

There are four types of genitalia, namely:

1. The genitals of all men (free or slave) and female slaves during prayer are between the navel and the knees.
2. Awra women are free when praying, namely the whole body except the face and palms.
3. Awra of free women and slaves to men who are ajnabi (not muhrim), that is, the entire body.
4. Awra of free women and slaves for muhrimya men and women, which is between the navel and the knees.

Discussion 3: Pillars of Prayer

There are seventeen pillars of prayer, namely:

1. Intention.
2. Takbiratul ihram (pronounce “ Allahu Akbar ”).
3. Stand up for those who are able to pray fardhu.
4. Read Surah Al Fatihah.
5. Ruku’ .
6. Thuma’ninah (pause) during bowing.
7. I’tidal (standing after bowing).
8. Thuma’ninah (pause during i’tidal).
9. Bow down twice.
10. Thuma’ninah (pause while prostrating).
11. Sit between two prostrations.
12. Thuma’ninah (pause while sitting).
13. Final Tasyahud (tahiyat).
14. Sitting at the final tasyahud time.
15. Shalawat to the prophet at the end of tasyahud.
16. Regards.
17. Order (in order).

Discussion 4: Procedures for Intention

There are three degrees of intention, namely:

1. If the prayer is performed fardhu, it is obligatory that the intention is qasdul fi’li (carrying out the prayer), ta’yin (name of the prayer being performed) and fardhiyah (fardhunya).
   2. If the prayer is performed as a sunnah that has a time or has a cause, it is obligatory that the intention to perform the prayer and the name of the prayer performed is the sunnah Rawatib (before and after fardhu-fardhu).
   3. If the prayer is performed as a sunnah Mutlaq (without a cause), it is obligatory to do only that prayer.

What is meant by qasdul fi’li is “I intend to pray (make up for it)” , and what is meant by ta’yin is like midday or asr, while fardiyah is the intention of fardhu.

Discussion 5: Terms of Takbiratul Ihram

There are sixteen conditions for takbirotul ihrom, namely:

1. Performed in a standing state when praying fardhu.
2. Spoken in Arabic.
3. Using the pronunciation of “Allah”.
4. Using the pronunciation of “Akbar”.
5. Sequentially between the two pronunciations.
6. Do not extend the letter “Hamza” from the pronunciation of “Allah”.
7. Do not extend the letter “Ba” from the pronunciation of “Akbar”.
8. Do not translate the letter “Ba”.
9. Do not add the letters “Waw berharakat” or “wau breadfruit” between the two pronunciations.
10. Do not add the letter “Waw” before the pronunciation of “Allah”.
11. Do not pause between the two words either long or briefly.
12. The words “Allahu Akbar” can be heard by himself.
13. Enter the prayer time if the prayer has a certain time.
14. Say takbiratul ihram while facing the qibla.
15. There is no mistake in pronouncing one of the letters of the sentence.
16. Takbiratul ihram makmum must be done after the takbiratul ihram of the priest.

Discussion 6: Legal Requirements for Reading Surah Al-Fatihah

There are ten conditions for reading Surah Al Fatihah, namely:

1. Order (according to the order of the verses).
2. Continuously (without being interrupted by other actions).
3. Pay attention to the letters (makhraj) as well as the tasydid places.
4. Pay attention to tasydid-tasydidnya.
5. Not long interrupted between the verses of Al Fatihah or interrupted briefly with the intention of ending the reading.
6. Read all the verses of Al Fatihah and basmalah including one of the verses of Al Fatihah.
7. Do not use language (tone/rhythm of reading) which can change the meaning.
8. Read Surah Al Fatihah while standing while praying fardhu.
9. Listening to Al Fatihah reading for himself.
10. Not distracted by the dhikr of others.

Discussion 17: Tasydid in Surah Al-Fatihah

Tasydid letter “Lam” jalalah in pronunciation ( الله ).

2. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحمن ).
3. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحيم ).
4. Tasydid “Lam” jalalah on pronunciation ( الحمد لله) .
5. Tasydid letter “Ba’” in the sentence (ربّ العالمين ) .
6. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحمن ).
7. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحيم ).
8. Tasydid letter “Dal” in pronunciation ( الدّين ).
9. Tasydid letter “Ya’” in the sentence ( إيّاك نعبد).
10. Tasydid letter “Yes” in the sentence ( وإيّاك نستعين ).
11. Tasydid letter “Shad” in the sentence ( اهدنا الصّراط المستقيم ).
12. Tasydid letter “Lam” in the sentence (صراط الّذين ).
13. Tasydid “Dhad” in the sentence ( ولا الضالين).
14. Tasydid letter “Lam” in the sentence (ولا الضالين).

Discussion 8: When Do We Raise Hands in Prayer?

There are four places where it is sunnah to raise your hands when praying, namely:

1. When takbiratul ihram.
2. When bowing.
3. When getting up from bowing (I’tidal).
4. When rising from the initial tasyahud.

Discussion 9: Legal Requirements for Prostration

There are seven legal requirements for prostration, namely:

1. Sujud with seven members of prostration.
2. Open forehead (nothing covering the forehead).
3. Pressing the weight to the head.
4. There is no other purpose except prostration.
5. Not prostrating to a moving place of prostration if he is moving.
6. Raise the lower part (back) above the top (head).
7. Thuma’ninah (pause) in prostration.

Closing (The Problem of Prostration)

There are seven limbs that must be placed at the place of prostration, namely:

1. Forehead.
2. Right palm.
3. Left palm.
4. Right knee.
5. Left knee.
6. The sole of the toes of the right foot.
7. The soles of the left toes.

Discussion 10: Tasydid in the Final Tasyahud

In the tasyahud sentence there are twenty-one harakah (lines) of tasidid, sixteen of which are located in the sentence of tasyahud which must be read, and the remaining five are in the sentence which completes the tasyahud (which is sunnah to be read), namely:

1. “Attahiyyat”: harakah tasydid is located in the letter “Ta’”.
2. “Attahiyyat”: the harakah tasydid is located in the letter “Ya’”.
3. “Almubarakatusshalawat”: harakah tasydid in the letter “Shad”.
4. “Atthayyibaat”: harakah tasydid in the letter “Tha’”.
5. “Atthayyibaat”: harakah tasydid in the letters “ya’”.
6. “Lillaah”: harakah tasydid in “Lam” jalalah.
7. “Assalaam”: in the letters “Sin”.
8. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letters “Ya’”.
9. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letter “Nun”.
10. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letters “Ya’”.
11. “Warohmatullahah”: in “Lam” walk.
12. “Wabarakatuh, assalaam”: in the letter “Sin”.
13. “Alainaa wa’alaa I’baadillah”: in “Lam” jalalah.
14. “Asshalihiin”: in shad letters.
15. “Ashhaduallaa”: in “Lam alif”.
16. “Ilaha Illallaah”: in “Lam alif”.
17. “Illallaah”: in “Lam” walk.
18. “Waasyhaduanna”: in the letter “Nun”.
19. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “mim”.
20. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “Ra’”.
21. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “Lam” jalalah.

Discussion 11: Tasydid in Saying Shalawat to Tasyahud

At least the sentence of the prophet’s prayer that meets the standard of obligation in the final tasyahud is Alloohumma sholliy ‘alaa Muhammad .

(As for) the vowel tasydid in the sentence of the prophet’s prayer is in the letters “Lam” and “Mim” in the pronunciation of “Allahumma”. And in the letter “Lam” in the pronunciation of “Shalli”; and in the letter “Mim” in Muhammad.

Discussion 12: Reciting Greetings at the Final Tasyahud

The minimum greeting pronunciation at the end of tasyahud is “ Assalamu’alaikum ”. There is a tasydid on the sin letter of the pronunciation ” Assalamu “.

Discussion 13: Obligatory Prayer Times

There are five obligatory prayer times:

1. The time for the midday prayer: Starts when the sun goes down (from the middle of the sky to the west) and ends when the length of an object’s shadow is equal to the length of the object.
2. Asr prayer time: Begins when the length of an object’s shadow is slightly greater than the length of the object and ends when the sun sets.
3. Maghrib prayer time: Begins when the sun sets and ends with the disappearance of the red mega (sunshine of the evening).
4. Isha prayer time: Begins with the disappearance of the red megaphone and ends with the rising of the sadiq dawn.
5. Fajr prayer time: Starts with the rising of the sadiq dawn and ends with the rising of the sun.

There are three colors of evening sunlight (mega), namely:

1. The red mega appears at sunset.
2. mega yellow and white appear at Isha time.

It is sunnah to postpone (end) the Isha prayer until the yellow and white light disappears.

Discussion 14: Times Not Allowed For Prayer

One is not allowed to pray sunnah prayers without cause or sunnah muthlaq prayers at the following times:

1. When the sun rises to rise it is roughly equal to the size of the pike.
2. When the sun is right in the middle of the sky until it shifts slightly except on Friday.
3. When the sun is yellowish to sink.
4. After Fajr prayer until sunrise.
5. After the Asr prayer until sunset.

Discussion 15: Break Times During Prayer

There are six places for saktah (stopping as a pause from one action to another) at the time of prayer, namely:

1. Between takbiratul ihram and prayer iftitah.
2. Between iftitah and ta’awudz prayers.
3. Between ta’awudz and reading Surah Al Fatihah.
4. Between the end of Surah Al Fatihah and saying amen.
5. Between saying amen and reading the letter of the Qur’an.
6. Between reading the letter of the Qur’an and bowing.

Discussion 16: Pillars of Prayer Required by Thuma’ninah

The pillars of prayer that are required to do it with tuma’ninah are four, namely:

1. When bowing.
2. When i’tidal.
3. When prostration.
4. When sitting between two prostrations.

Thuma’ninah is a moment of silence after moving (from the previous position) until all limbs remain (not moving) with a time more or less like saying tasbih (subhanallah).

Discussion 17: The Reasons That Require Sajud Sawi

There are four reasons for prostration for forgetfulness, namely:

1. Leaving part of the ab’adus namaz (sunnah work in prayer is bad if one leaves it).
2. Doing something that cancels (even though he forgot), if done on purpose and does not cancel if he forgets.
3. Move the pillars of qauli (which are spoken) to their place.
4. Doing the pillars of Fi’li (which is done) with the possibility of excess.

Discussion 18: Actions in Prayer Included in the Sunnah of Ab’adh

Sunnah Ab’adh there are six, namely:

1. Early tasyahud.
2. Sit tasyahud early.
3. Shalawat for the prophet Muhammad during the early tasyahud.
4. Blessings to the Prophet’s family at the end of tasyahud.
5. Du’a qunut.
6. Stand up for qunut prayer.
7. Shalawat and greetings to the prophet Muhammad, his family and friends when praying qunut.

Discussion 19: Prayer Cancellation

There are fourteen cases that invalidate prayer, namely:

1. Hadats (such as urinating and defecating).
2. Exposed unclean, if not removed immediately, without holding the impurity.
3. Open nakedness, if not closed instantly.
4. Says two letters or one letter that can be understood on purpose.
5. Eat (a little) on purpose.
6. Even if you eat a lot, you forget.
7. Move with three moves in a row even if you forget.
8. Jumping that spoils prayer.
9. Overreaching hitting.
10. Adding pillar fi’li on purpose.
11. Faster or slower the two pillars of prayer from the priest without excuse.
12. Intend to stop praying.
13. Hanging his prayer with something.
14. Hesitating in stopping the prayer (between continued or stopped).

Discussion 20: When is it obligatory to make the intention as a prayer leader?

A priest is required to intend to become a priest in four circumstances, namely:

1. Be the Imam of Friday prayers.
2. Become the priest in the i`aadah prayer (repeated prayer).
3. Become an imam for congregational prayer vows.
4. Being the priest of the plural taqdim prayer with the cause of rain

Discussion 21: Requirements for the Makmum to Follow the Imam

There are eleven conditions for the congregation to follow the priest, namely:

1. Do not know the cancellation of the priest’s prayer because of hadats or something else.
2. Do not believe that the priest is obliged to make up (replace) the prayer.
3. A priest is not being a mammum.
4. An imam is not illiterate (must have good reading of the Qur’an).
5. The position of the congregation does not exceed the place where the priest stands.
6. Makmum must know the movement of the priest’s prayer movements.
7. Being in one mosque (place) or within a distance of approximately three hundred cubits.
8. The congregation intends to follow the imam or the congregational intention.
9. The prayer of the priest and the congregation must be in the same way and kaifiyat.
10. Makmum does not differ between the Imams with sunnah actions that are very different or very different.
11. The congregation must follow the priest.

Discussion 22: Legal and Illegal Congregational Models

There are 9 models of congregational prayers. There are 5 valid congregational models, namely:

1. Men follow men.
2. Women follow men.
3. Sissy follows the men.
4. Women follow sissy.
5. Women follow women.

There are four models of illegitimate congregation, namely:

1. Boys follow girls.
2. Men follow sissy.
3. Sissy follows women.
4. Sissy follows sissy.

Discussion 23: Legal Terms for Plural Taqdim

There are four legal conditions for plural taqdim (joining the first two prayers), namely:

1. Starting from the earlier prayer time.
2. Multiple intentions.
3. Consecutive.
4. Udzurnya continuously.

Discussion 24: Final Plural Legal Requirements

There are two final plural legal conditions, namely:

1. The intention of ta’khir when there is still time left for the first prayer is simply the length of time to complete the prayer.
2. The excuses continued until the time for the second prayer was finished

Discussion 25: Requirements for Qashar (summarizing) Prayer

There are seven conditions for qashar, namely:

1. Travel distance reaches two marhala or more (About 80 km).
2. The journey undertaken is a permissible journey (not a journey to do immorality).
3. Know the law of permissibility of qashar.
4. The intention of qashar when takbiratul `ihram.
5. The prayers that are recited are the ruba`iyah prayers (prayers that consist of four cycles).
6. The journey is carried out continuously until the prayer is finished.
7. Do not follow the person who is itmam (a person whose prayer is not qashar) in some of his prayers.

Discussion 26: Legal Requirements for Friday Prayers

There are six conditions for the validity of Friday prayers, namely:

1. Friday sermons and prayers are held after the noon time.
2. Friday prayers are held within the boundaries of the region.
3. Done collectively.
4. The Friday congregation is at least forty (40) free male, mature and native of the area.
5. There is no other Friday jama’ah that precedes and competes in the same area.
6. Friday prayers are held after two Friday sermons.

Discussion 27: Pillars of the Friday Khutbah

There are five pillars of the Friday sermon, namely:

1. Praising Allah (saying Alhamdulillah ) in these two sermons.
2. Salawat to the Prophet Muhammad in these two sermons.
3. Instruct the congregation to fear Allah.
4. Read a verse of the Qur’an in one of the sermons.
5. Pray for all Muslims at the end of the khutbah.

Discussion 28: Legal Requirements for the Friday Khutbah

There are ten legal conditions for Friday sermons, namely:

1. Holy from small hadas and big hadas.
2. Clothing, body and place must be clean from all impurity.
3. Close genitals.
4. The sermon is delivered standing up for those who can afford it.
5. The two khutbahs are separated by sitting for a long time like thuma’ninah in prayer but a little longer.
6. The two sermons were carried out sequentially.
7. The sermon and Friday prayers are held sequentially.
8. Both sermons were delivered in Arabic.
9. Friday sermons were heard by 40 men (independent, mature and native of the area).
10. Everything is carried out after entering the midday prayer time.

CHAPTER IV: Management of the Corpse

Discussion 1: Obligations of Muslims for the bodies of Muslims

The obligation of Muslims towards his brother who died there are four cases, namely:

1. bathe.
2. shroud.
3. pray.
4. Bury.

Discussion 2: How to Bathe the Body

The way to bathe the corpse is at least by wetting the entire body of the body with water. The most perfect way to bathe a corpse is to clean its qubul and anus, clean the dirt from its nose, perform ablution, bathe it while rubbing it with bidara leaf water and douse it with water three (3) times.

Discussion 3: How to shroud a corpse

The shroud is the minimum with a piece of cloth that covers the entire body.

The perfect way for men is to cover their entire body with three pieces of cloth, while for women it is with clothes, khimar (head covering), sarong and 2 pieces of cloth.

Discussion 4: Pillars of the Body Prayer

The pillars of the funeral prayer are seven (7), namely:

1. Intention.
2. Four times takbir.
3. Stand up for those who can.
4. Read Surah Al-Fatihah.
5. Read shalawat on the Prophet after the second takbir.
6. Pray for the deceased after the third takbir.
7. Regards.

Discussion 5: How to Bury a Dead Body

The way to bury the corpse is at least in a hole that can cover the smell of the corpse and protect it from wild animals. The most perfect way is to bury it in the ground which is deep enough and wide enough, and the cheek is placed on the ground and it is obligatory to face it towards the Qibla.

Discussion 6: Circumstances Permitted To Dismantle Graves

Dead bodies may be exhumed under four circumstances, namely:

1. To be bathed if it has not changed shape.
2. To face it towards the Qibla.
3. To retrieve buried treasure with corpses.
4. The woman whose fetus was buried with him and it is possible that the fetus is still alive.

Discussion 7: The Law of Asking for Help from Others in Ablution (Isti’anah)

There are four isti’anah laws, namely:

1. Change.
2. Aula’s mistake (difference to what is more important)
3. Makruh.
4. Must.

Mubah if only asks to get water. It’s a mistake in the hall if you ask for water to be poured over someone who is performing ablution. Makruh if asked to pour water for people who wash the members of his ablution. It is obligatory to ask for water to be poured on a sick person when he is weak.

CHAPTER V: Zakat

Discussion 1: Assets that are Obligatory to Issue Zakat

There are six types of assets on which zakat is obligatory, namely:

1. Cattle.
2. Gold and silver.
3. Grains (which are the staple food).
4. Trade treasure. Zakat that must be issued is 4/10 (2.5%) of trading results.
5. Hidden treasure.
6. Mine results.

CHAPTER VI: Fasting

Discussion 1: How to Determine the Beginning of Ramadan

Ramadan fasting is obligatory with one of the following provisions:

1. By completing the month of Sha’ban 30 days.
2. By looking at the moon, for those who see it alone, even though he is wicked.
3. By establishing it with fair testimony for people who don’t see it firsthand.
4. With news from someone whose history is fair, the truth is also believed, whether those who heard the news confirmed it or not, or if the one who brought the news was not believed, but the people who heard confirmed it.
5. With berijtihad the entry of the month of Ramadan for those who doubt it.

Discussion 2: Requirements for Valid Fasting

There are four (4) conditions for valid Ramadan fasting, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Reasonable.
3. Holy from eg menstrual blood.
4. Know the time allowed to fast

Discussion 3: Requirements for Obligatory Fasting of Ramadan

There are five conditions for obligatory fasting in Ramadan, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Taklif (charged for fasting).
3. Able to fast.
4. Healthy.
5. Muqim (not traveling).

Discussion 4: Pillars of Ramadan Fasting

There are three pillars of Ramadan fasting, namely:

1. intention every night.
2. Abstain from anything that breaks the fast while still remembering, being able to choose (no coercion) and not in ignorance that is forgiven.
3. Fast.

Discussion 5: Qadha, Kafarat, and Imsak

The punishment for a person who breaks his fast for one day in Ramadan because of sexual intercourse is that he is obligated to make up his fast and is obliged to pay expiation and a strict reprimand for breaking his fast.

It is obligatory to make up the fast and must refrain (from eating and drinking until it is time to break the fast) in six conditions:

1. The person who breaks the fast on purpose. This only applies in the month of Ramadan.
2. The person who leaves the intention at night for the obligatory fast.
3. People who eat sahur because they think it’s still night, even though dawn has already risen.
4. People who break their fast because they think the sun has set, even though the sun has not yet set.
5. People who believe that it is the thirtieth day of the month of Sha’ban, even though it is already the first day of Ramadan.
6. People who already drink water from gargling or from water that is put in the nose.

Discussion 6: Fasting Cancellation

There are 6 invalidators of fasting, namely:

1. apostate.
2. Period.
3. Postpartum
4. Give birth to.
5. Just a little crazy
6. Intentional fainting and drunkenness if it occurs throughout the afternoon.

Discussion 7: The Law of Canceling the Fast and the Punishment

Breaking the fast during the day of Ramadan is divided into four types, namely:

1. Mandatory, like women who are menstruating or giving birth.
2. Allowed, such as people traveling and people who are sick.
3. It’s not obligatory, nor is it allowed, like crazy.
4. It is forbidden, like someone who postpones making up up Ramadan, even though in fact he might be able to do it until the time for making up up is up.

Those who break their fast are required to make up for their fast in 4 ways, namely:

1. The person who is obliged to make up the qadha and pay the fidyah. There are two types: (a) women who break their fast because they are worried about the condition of their babies and (b) people who delay making up their fasts until the next Ramadan arrives.
2. The person who is required to make up the fast without paying the fidyah is like a person who faints.
3. People who are required to pay fidyah without making up for it, such as very old people (who are no longer able to fast).
4. People who are not required to make up the qadha and do not need to pay fidyah, are like crazy people who are not making it up.

Discussion 8: Eating and Drinking That Does Not Invalidate Fasting

Circumstances which do not break the fast even though (food/drink) has entered the mouth (swallowed) there are seven kinds, namely:

1. Do it in a state of forgetting.
2. Don’t know the law.
3. Forced by someone else.
4. When something is put into the oral cavity, it is because of the saliva that flows between the teeth, while it is impossible for him to spit it out.
5. When the entry of street dust into the oral cavity.
6. When something from the flour sieve enters the oral cavity.
7. When the entry of flies that are flying into the oral cavity.

Source:

Al Batawiy, Abu Razin. (2011). Matan Safiinatun Najaah Fi Ushulid Diini Wal Fiqhi . Muktabah Ar Razin.

The Best Hours of the Midnight Prayer and Its Virtues – Salah midnight is one of the worship services in Islam. This prayer service is carried out at night and you have to sleep first. This is what makes the midnight prayer a worship that is quite heavy to do. However, Allah SWT promises many things for his servants who regularly perform midnight prayers.

However, midnight prayers must also be done correctly. Can’t be any time. When is the best time to do it? This article will discuss the best time to perform the midnight prayer. In addition, it will also explain how the priorities are.

Best Hour of Midnight Prayer

1. The First Third of the Night

One of the best hours to perform the midnight prayer is in the first third of the night. The first midnight prayer can be done after the evening prayer. Limit on the first time around until 22.00.

A Muslim who wants to pray the midnight prayer can immediately carry out the midnight prayer after the evening prayer. Must still sleep before the midnight prayer.

2. Third of the Second Night

The second time to perform the midnight prayer is in the second third of the night. This time around 22.00 until early morning. Precisely at 01.00. Compared to the first third of the night, this time is somewhat more important. This is because the third time on the second night is believed to have fadhilah and many of its own features.

In the second third of the night, many people are asleep. Therefore, the midnight prayer service is quite heavy. Muslims who wish to perform the midnight prayer are advised to get up at the prime time. It is believed to get more priority.

In the hadith narrated by Abu Dawud, there is an explanation of one of the superstitions. The hadith reads “Whoever gets up (prays at night) and reads ten verses, he will not be recorded as negligent. Whoever wakes up (night prayer by reading a hundred verses) will be recorded as those who submit. And whoever wakes up (night prayer) by reading a thousand verses then he will be recorded as muqanthirin (those who get many times the reward). Infinity”.

3. The Last Third of the Night

The third time that can be used for the midnight prayer is in the last third of the night. The time of the last third of the night starts at 01:00 until just before dawn. Among the three best times to perform the midnight prayer, the last third of the night is the most important.

This happens not without reason, the last third of the night is the best time to worship. At this time it is believed to be an efficacious time. Especially when you want to pray to Allah SWT.

During the last third of the night, Allah SWT descends into the sky of the world. According to a hadith narrated by Bukhari and Muslim, Rasulullah SAW said “Every night Allah SWT descends into the sky of the world until the last third of the night remains. He (Allah SWT) also said, “Is there any servant of Mine who asks so that I will surely give him what he asks for? Is there any servant of mine who prays until surely I will answer his prayer? Is there any servant of mine who makes istighfar until I forgive his sins?”

The Excellence of the Midnight Prayer

The midnight prayer is a very good practice to do. Allah SWT says in the letter Al-Isra verse 79 “And part of the night, perform additional midnight prayers (as a form of worship): hopefully your Lord will raise you to a commendable place”.

Therefore, the midnight prayer service has many benefits and advantages for anyone who performs it. Here are the virtues of the midnight prayer:

1. Get a commendable and noble place

One of the virtues of the midnight prayer is that it is placed in a commendable and noble place in the sight of Allah SWT. This is the promise of Allah SWT to his people. Allah SWT promises to elevate His people to praiseworthy places. This is promised to Muslims who are diligent and sincere when carrying out the midnight prayer. The midnight prayer which is performed sincerely and diligently and to hope for the pleasure of Allah SWT will bring many benefits.

2. His prayer was granted

The next priority for carrying out the midnight prayer is that the prayers that are being said can be answered. Allah SWT promises to grant the prayers of a Muslim who is an expert at midnight prayers, or regularly performs midnight prayers.

Rasulullah SAW once said this in a hadith. Rasulullah SAW said “At night, there was a time when a Muslim asked for the good of the world and the hereafter, surely Allah SWT gave him. It goes on every night.” In the hadith narrated by Muslim and Ahmad from Jabir

3. Removing sins and mistakes

Not only granting the prayers that are said, the midnight prayer also has other virtues. The priority is as an eraser of sins and mistakes that have been made. In the hadith, Rasulullah SAW said “Do qiyamullail. Because that’s the habit of the pious people before you, a form of taqarrub, an eraser of sins, and a hindrance to doing wrong.” HR. Tirmidhi from Abu Umamah Al-Bahili.

4. Become a master of dhikr

A Muslim who regularly performs the midnight prayer will become a dhikr expert. This was conveyed directly by Rasulullah SAW. Rasulullah SAW explained that someone who wakes up at night, then wakes up the other members of his family and performs two rak’ahs will get a good reward. They will be included in the group of women and men who remember Allah SWT a lot. This is stated in the hadith narrated by Abu Dawud, Nasa’i, and Ibn Majah from Abu Sa’id Al-Khudri

5. Be humble

Allah SWT says that people who regularly perform midnight prayers will always be humble and friendly. Humility is emitted through peace of mind in living daily life.

6. The Bridge to Heaven

The midnight prayer is also a bridge to the entrance to heaven. Allah SWT has given a finished product to His servant. The promise is intended for obedient servants to Allah. However, Allah SWT will also give hell as a punishment for servants who disobey Allah SWT.

Allah SWT shows his servants the way to go to heaven. One of them is to perform the midnight prayer service regularly.

The virtue of the next midnight prayer is that it can be a bridge to heaven. Allah SWT has promised heaven for servants who obey Him. Instead, He made hell a punishment for servants who disobeyed Him.

“O people, spread greetings, give food and pray at night when humans are sleeping: surely you all will enter heaven safely.” HR. Tirmidhi

7. Help in the afterlife

“Verily, those who fear Allah will be in (heavens full of) gardens and springs of water. (In Heaven) they can take whatever God bestows upon them. Verily they were before that (in the world) are the people who do good. They sleep very little at night. And at the end of the night they ask forgiveness (to Allah SWT). QS. Az-Zariyat 15-18.

The verse above explains that the midnight prayer has a very great virtue. One of them is that it can become a helpful practice in the hereafter.

8. Maintain physical health

The midnight prayer also has physical benefits. Tahajud prayer is the best therapy for the treatment of various diseases. Therefore, a Muslim who diligently performs the midnight prayers will have good immune system. So that he is not easily infected with viruses or disease. So surely he will always be healthy.

Rasulullah SAW said, “Perform night prayers because it is a tradition of righteous people in front of you, a means of getting closer to Allah, preventing sins, eliminating wrongdoing, and preventing all kinds of diseases from the body.” in the hadith narrated by Tirmidhi.

• Procedure for Ablution
• Procedure for Dhuha Prayer
• Procedure for Midnight Prayer
• Procedure for the Prayer of the Corpse
• Mandatory Bathing Procedures
• Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
• Definition of Morals
• Noble Qualities
• Honest Behavior in Islam
• Definition of Zakat
• Pillars of Hajj
• Understanding Faith In Angels
• Understanding Aurat
• List of 99 Asmaul Husna
• Zakat Fitrah and Zakat Mal

That is the best hour and the virtue of the midnight prayer for Muslims. There are many other miracles regarding the midnight prayer. You can find it at www.Sinaumedia.com.

Source: from various sources

WS Rendra’s poetry – Poetry, the art of writing uses a variety of languages ​​with additional semantics and metaphors to add to the beauty of the writing. Poetry is stanzas that contain a beautiful sentence that is arranged and packaged as attractively as possible. Poetry has a complete uniqueness accompanied by figure of speech, so poetry connoisseurs don’t get tired of enjoying it.

In the world of literature, in Indonesia itself, many famous writers have been born who are legendary. His names have gone global and can inspire anyone who reads and meditates on his poems.

One of them, is WS Rendra. Who doesn’t know the famous Indonesian poet whose real name is Willibrordus Surendra Broto? Just by looking at the name Rendra, Sinaumed’s definitely knows this poet right away, because his literary works are so popular.

Rendra is known as the richest poet in Indonesia. No wonder, because he is very productive in creating and using metaphors to support dramatic and visual imagery in his poems.

In fact, WS Rendra also earned the nickname The Peacock for his appearance as a poet who always fascinated the audience. A lover, like a peacock that stretches its beautiful tail to attract the attention of its lover. It is for them, lovers, WS Rendra pours out his love through poetry in his book entitled Poems of Love which can be found at sinaumedia.

However, before taking a peek at some of his love poems. The saying goes, if you don’t know, you don’t love. Come on, Sinaumed’s , let’s first get to know WS Rendra through his short biography.

Get to know WS Rendra at a glance

WS Rendra alias Willibrordus Surendra Broto, born in Solo on 7 November 1935. He is the son of Raden Cyprianus Sugeng Brotoatmodjo and Raden Ayu Catharina Ismadillah. The Rendra family is a Catholic family who grew up in a Javanese cultural environment.

His father was a teacher at a Catholic school in Solo which taught Indonesian and Javanese. Apart from that, Rendra’s father was also known as a performer of traditional drama or playwright.

Rendra’s artistic talent did not only come from his father. His mother was also an artist, namely a serimpi dancer at the Surakarta Hadiningrat Kasunanan Palace.

In addition, Rendra’s artistic talents grew because of his family’s habits. Born into a blue-blooded Javanese family, of course at special moments meetings between families were held.

At the event, one by one the family members were asked to sing spontaneously. However, it is usually preferred for children or young family members. It was at that time that Rendra’s talent began to show, even though he was only five years old.

In 1942, Rendra started his education by entering kindergarten. Until 10 years later, in 1952 he entered high school at the Catholic school, Solo where his father taught. Meanwhile, during school, his literary talent began to show when he was in junior high school. At that time, Rendra had started to show his ability by writing poetry, short stories, and plays for various school activities.

Not only writing, it turns out that he is also good at the stage. He began to recite his poems on the school stage. Not only that, Rendra also staged one of his plays entitled Fake Legs when he was in junior high school. Growing up with all these habits and an environment full of art and culture, it is not surprising that Rendra has become an artist who has produced numerous literary works, from poetry, plays, short stories, and others.

When he was in high school, Rendra returned to staging his drama entitled People at the Bend of the Road . It was from the drama performance that it was the first time that he received the main prize and award from the Regional Office of the Ministry of Education and Culture, Yogyakarta. The award made him very excited to continue working.

He began to publish his poetry for the first time in the mass media in 1952 through the Siasat magazine . After that, his poetry flowed smoothly to grace various magazines at that time, such as Story, Art, Basis, Confrontation, and New Strategy.

After graduating from high school, Rendra went to Jakarta with the intention of attending the Foreign Affairs Academy. Unfortunately, it turns out that the academy has closed. He also decided to go to Yogyakarta and enter the Faculty of Letters at Gadjah Mada University.

During his studies in Yogyakarta, Rendra was fond of participating in Yogyakarta theater activities. However, in 1954, Rendra received an invitation from the American government to attend a literature seminar at Harvard University, so he did not finish his studies at Gajah Mada University. Even so, Rendra received an Honoris Causa Doctorate from his campus.

In 1961, after returning from America, Rendra began to establish a theater group in Yogyakarta. However, the group stopped because he went back to America in 1964, because he received a scholarship to deepen his knowledge of drama and dance from the American Academy of Dramatical Art (AADA).

His departure for America at that time caused his theatrical activities in Yogyakarta to stop. Rendra completed his education abroad in 1967.

After completing his education, in 1968 Rendra re-established his theater with a new name, namely Bengkel Theatre . The play that became his first performance was Bip-Bop . The theater community he made became the talk of all Indonesian people, because it gave a new color and atmosphere to theater life in the country, especially Yogyakarta.

In his new theater, that’s where Rendra found his life partner. Rendra had a love of location with Sunarti Kelvin, a playwright in Bengkel Theater who inspired Rendra a lot in his work.

However, even though he was married to Sunarti. In 1970, Rendra married Sitoresmi Prabuningrat and converted from Catholicism to Islam. Since then, he started using the name Surendra Broto only.

WS Rendra’s Love Poems

From a glimpse of his life’s journey, of course this Indonesian writer is indeed adept at playing with words of love. Through his book entitled Poems of Love , published by Bentang Pustaka, WS Rendra has recorded 30 titles of his love poems.

He divided these love poems into three periods, namely the First Puberty (1954-1958) which he wrote during his student days at Gadjah Mada University. Second Puberty (1968-1977), namely poems written after he attended college in New York. Finally, Third Puberty (1992-2003), contains the poems he wrote during the 1998 reform period.

First Puberty (1954-1958)

In the First Puberty there are 24 poems, which contain stories of young love that are as they are. So sweet and romantic. Presented in a short, light, and simple form, but really shows the feelings of people who are in love.

The poems are entitled Request, Hair, Miss, Clothes, Papaya, Bicycle, Green Skirt, The Two of Us, His Passion, Temprament, Sculpture, To The Clouds Passing, Repentance, Bicycle Lover, Two Birds, One, Optimism, Pantun, Roosters , Be Not Away, Beloved, Evil Wind, Whispering To Your Own Ear, and Falling Flowers.

Request

O round moon

look out the window my love!

he sleeps alone,

just a friend of a longing heart.

Hair

My beloved hair 

very beautiful and long.

he said,

that hair to ensnare my heart.

Miss

Fir tree from afar

imagine the length of her hair

So I miss my girlfriend too.

We both

Because our school is not finished yet

we are not married yet.

But in the soul

we have many grandchildren.

His passion

My boyfriend likes

heard me tell a story.

In storytelling I always satirized

that I love him very much.

Temperament

River stone

hit by the sun.

How hot!

When the night descends again

calm at times.

The moon is cool

and the water sings

endless.

If we get angry

on lovers

forever.

Sculpture

Under the sapodilla tree

on a bench

under the blue sky

above the gray earth

– Rest two longing hearts.

Two Birds

Are two birds

nest together.

We are both like birds

fly without a nest.

Already One

Your anxiety is my anxiety.

Let’s walk hand in hand

in real life,

and we love.

We stared into each other’s eyes for a long time

and understand more

can no longer be separated.

You are a pin

that has been pinned.

I am a ship

which has been anchored and moored.

We are both lava

which can no longer be described.

Optimism

Love us both

is a palace of porcelain.

The wind has brought peace

wrapped us in a hug.

The earth has given strength,

because we have stepped

with firmness.

Don’t be far away

Don’t be far away

like the moon

can only be seen. 

Be the wind

caress my hair.

And we will

will always be together.

Beloved

My beloved is like a magpie.

Her voice is melodious.

His eyes are glass.

His heart is blue.

My beloved is like a magpie.

Nestled beautifully in the heart.

my magpie,

our hearts are a rainbow of dozen colors.

Autumn Flowers

Fall flowers

over the dead

all who were with him fell

My darling.

Fall flowers

above where you are buried

fall all matters of affairs between us.

Alright, let’s just let it go

no promises will see you in heaven

because in heaven we don’t need romance.

Asmara was only born on earth

(where everything ends in dead land)

it follows human life

and if life alone has fallen

he also fell together.

There are some memories left

but nothing more than fraud

or some sort of suicide deterrent.

There may also be sadness

it was to him a kind of price or honor

which will soon fall apart.

My darling.

Fall, yes, fall

all fall

life, romance, dew on flowers – 

what we take is only useful.

Second puberty (1968-1977)

Unlike the First Puberty which contains short love poems. In the Second Puberty the poems presented are longer and more complex about life. The second puberty contains 3 poems entitled Letters from a Wife (Steacher, April 30, 1968), Behind You Back (1972), and Not in Madrid (1977).

The poem Not in Madrid tells about a dialogue. An epic romance through dialogue between a man and a woman. There are also several symbols that are always visible, one of which is the plus symbol (+).

Meanwhile, in the poem Surat a Wife, it tells about Rendra’s experience, who at that time was affectionately called Willy. When he was in junior high school, a male friend of his asked Rendra for help, so he could write a heartfelt poem for his girlfriend. The next day the woman came to Rendra, so that he could also write a reply letter for her male friend. Rendra was amused because the woman did not know that the woman had asked Rendra to answer her own writing.

It ‘s so funny . Sinaumed’s , did you also experience periods of sending love letters at school?

Furthermore, the third poem on the Second Puberty tells about the aging life of someone named Rusman. The series of words are arranged so simple and romantic.

Actually, the three poems were first published in newspapers and magazines when Rendra was still in junior high and high school. The publication of his poems in the newspaper started as a fad from his good friend, DS Mulyanto, who sent his poems to newspapers and magazines.

Third puberty (1992-2003)

Third puberty , namely love poems that Rendra wrote in 1992-2003. Especially during the 1998 reform era, this was because Rendra was also increasingly open to the face of the state and state administration. Therefore, the last three poems on the Third Puberty contain critical awareness of the state administration and anthropology of the Indonesian nation.

The three love poems are titled Love Poems Written at the Age of 57, Hai Ma!, and Maybe Because of the Moon .

Love Rhymes Written at Age 57

Any closed space will crack

because it contains time that always offsets

And finally it will explode

if the energy of time continues to be blocked

 

My love for you my Juwit

Genuine and real

It happens by itself, I don’t know why

I just realized that it actually exists

 

My love for you my Juwit

Then space and time

in my human life

Space love I empower

but time is out of reach

Now I realized

the age of love is longer than the age of romance

The treasure of love culture…

dating, separation, marriage

can not formulate time energy of love

 

And now my verse

Is it possible to formulate my love for you

 

The poem begins with the words,

and the words in poetry also space and time

away from the dictionary, away from history,

free from human corruption

Thus my verse

dare to represent my love for you

 

My Juwit

I’ve never been satisfied kissing you

You are like a book I never finish reading

You are the moss inside my skull

You’re not perfect, easy stomachache,

get headaches easily and your temperament is often high

You find it hard to face yourself

And behind your grace and flexibility

you are afraid of the world

 

My Juwit

Apart from analysis boxes

my love for you is real

You are not beautiful, but beautiful and juwita

Definitely not immaculata, but a myth

in my heart

 

Until here I end the reflections of my love for you

If you obey, there will be no end

I sincerely present to you:

 

My love for you has time

This verse will also take time

What is clear is that it will last longer

of my age and yours

Hi, Mom!

Ma, it’s not death that shakes my heart

but life that does not live

because it loses power and loses its nature

there are nights I walk the long hall

aimlessly anywhere

Cold air entered my empty body

even though there is no wind

the stars became fireflies

which further emphasizes the presence of darkness

no thoughts, no feelings, no nothing.

 

Life is mortal, Ma

but helplessness renders me absent

sometimes I feel cast out into the wilderness

shunned by Mother and Father and rejected by neighbors

or I was stranded in the market

I talk but people don’t listen

they tore up books and laughed at ideals

I’m angry, I’m scared, I’m shaking

but failed to compose language.

 

Life is mortal, Ma

that’s easy for me to accept

but sitting hugging knees alone in the savanna

make my life worthless

sometimes I feel like people are pulling me here and there

foaming at the mouth just from laughing

live polluted by pleasantries

and people pass the time with crazy fights

which is without a problem

or love without romance

and unfinished intercourse

 

Life is mortal of course, Ma

but a managed acrobatics of thought and falsehood

messed up my stomach then

pushed me screaming

while not knowing why

it feels like after dying over and over again.

 

There is nothing more surprising in this life.

 

But Ma, every time I realize that you are in my life

I feel the course of blood flow throughout my body.

My glands are working

my soul sings, the world is present

the gecko on the wall rang

the gardener was heard talking to his son

life becomes real, my nature returns.

 

Remembering you Ma, is remembering daily obligations

the simplicity of the prose language, the beauty of the poetry

We’re always having fun exchanging ideas, right Ma?

each side has goals

Each party has real obligations

 

Hi Mom!

Do you remember

I hug you on the boat

when your stomach hurts and I calm you down

with kisses on your neck?

Masyaallah… I’ve always been fascinated by the smell of your skin

Do you remember that time I said

doomsday may come, my life is full of meaning

Hehehe waahh.. I really have nothing to lose when I meet you in this life

and when I write poetry

I also feel that yesterday and tomorrow

is today.

 

Disaster and luck are the same.

The sky outside, the sky in the body is united in the soul.

Yes, Ma…

Maybe because of the Moon

The moon spreads the scent of lust

from his body.

Which then sticks to the leaves of the cape tree

who trembles.

 

A tomcat groaned

with a magic sound.

Saying poetry that he could not write.

And, Ma, I took your soul

which is far from my reach.

 

I wrote my love poem

Because I can’t whisper to you.

Missing wading Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,

And all Sunday.

Hatch like the saliva of the sky

Who became the stars.

 

Crystals of hope and desire

flashing in the water

hit the sleeping stones.

 

Passion for work during the day

at night into a passionate romance.

Because of the stars, the cape tree,

wind, and nocturnal insects.

 

Ma, your sleeping body

lying on a sailboat

drifting in the sky

sail the sky.

So, those are the famous poems by WS Rendra. Even though times have become more modern, the existence of romantic poetry by senior writers will always be remembered. As the younger generation, of course we can’t forget this literary work …

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Author: Indah Utami

Also Read!

1. Types of Old Poetry, What’s There?
2. Understanding Literary Theory and History
3. Poetry Figures in Indonesia, Who Is Your Favorite?
4. Get to know what is figurative language and examples
5. Understanding Poetry and How to Make It
6. 7 Indonesian Writers in their Era
7. What Is Romanticism?

Each country has a different duration of sunshine. In Indonesia, which is a tropical country, it gets sunlight longer than in countries with four seasons. This happens almost all year round.

Like humans, animals and plants also need sunlight. Sunlight does have an important role in life on earth. Without it, life would be somber and even no life at all. Everyone’s dead.

Then, what are the benefits of sunlight for animals? Sinaumed’s will get answers by listening to the following explanation.

Overview of the Sun

The sun is the center of the solar system. It is also the closest star to Earth. The composition of the sun consists of various kinds of gases that are under high pressure so that they make themselves hot. These gases consist of 76% hydrogen, 22% helium, 2% oxygen and other gases.

The sun is the largest planet with a size of 109 times the diameter of the earth. It weighs up to 300,000 times the weight of the earth. This is caused by the material that composes it in the form of gas so that its shape is actually a collection of gases. The temperature of the sun’s surface reaches 6,000 ⁰ C which is emitted into outer space until it reaches the earth’s surface.

Meanwhile, the core temperature of the sun reaches 15-20 million degrees Celsius. It also emits large enough energy waves in the form of electromagnetic waves. These waves consist of visible light waves, microwaves, X-rays, infrared rays, gamma rays, and ultraviolet rays.

The source of solar energy comes from fusion reactions that occur in the sun’s core. The fusion reaction itself is a combination of hydrogen atoms to become helium. This reaction produces enormous energy.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 1 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

1. The Core of the Sun

The innermost part of the sun is the sun’s core. There, fusion reactions occur as a source of solar energy. The temperature reaches 15,000,000 degrees Celsius. The energy generated from the fusion reaction will be distributed to the outermost layer, then it will also be emitted into outer space.

2. Photosphere

The photosphere is part of the sun’s surface. This layer emits light so that it can provide illumination in everyday life. The temperature reaches 16,000 ⁰ C. Its thickness reaches approximately 500 km.

3. Chromosphere

The chromosphere is the layer above the photosphere. Its function is as the sun’s atmosphere. Its thickness reaches 16,000 km with a temperature of approximately 9,800 ⁰ C. It looks like a red band around the moon during a total solar eclipse.

4. Corona

The corona is the outermost layer of the sun’s atmosphere. Its temperature reaches 1,000,000 ⁰ C. It has a grayish color which is caused by the ionization of the atoms due to the very high temperature. The corona will appear during a total solar eclipse.

This is because almost all of the sun’s light is covered by the moon. It looks like a crown with a gray color.

The sun is not always healthy, just like the earth. He also experienced distractions due to his own activities. Here are some disturbances that occur in the sun.

1. Sun Spots

Sun bitnik is a very strong magnetic field that appears in an area on the sun. These spots are holes on the sun’s surface. From these holes, hot gas is ejected from the core of the sun. This causes interference with radio wave telecommunications on the surface of the earth.

2. Clots in the Photosphere (Granulation)

The clumps in the photosphere appear due to the propagation of hot gas from the sun’s core to the surface. This causes, the surface of the sun is not flat but lumpy.

3. The Flame of the Sun

The solar flare is a gas distribution from the edge of the sun’s chromosphere. The flame tongue is also often referred to as the prominence or protuberant. Its altitude can reach 10,000 km. It is composed of protons and electrons of hydrogen atoms moving at high speed.

The mass of these particles can reach the earth’s surface. Before entering the earth, the emission of these particles is restrained by the earth’s magnetic field (Van Allen belts). This causes the speed of the particles to decrease and move toward the poles. Then, these particles will glow which is known as an aurora.

The scattering of these particles disrupts the radio wave communication system. Aurora itself is in the southern hemisphere called the Aurora Australis, while the aurora in the northern hemisphere is called the Aurora Borealis.

4. Explosion ( Flares )

Flares are gas explosions that occur above the surface of the sun. It can cause interference to radio communication systems. This is because, gas eruptions consist of electrically charged gas particles.

Benefits of Sunlight for Animals

Sunlight gives life to every living thing on earth. Animals are no exception. Launching from various sources on the internet, here are the benefits of sunlight for animals.

1. Source of Vitamin D

Animals need vitamin D, just like humans. The sun provides free intake of these vitamins in an easy way. It is enough for animals to be in the sun, so vitamin D for the body will be fulfilled. Thus, body processes driven by calcium can be assisted, for example the formation of strong teeth and bones.

2. Warms the Body

Reptiles really need the sun’s heat to warm themselves. The goal is to survive.

3. Maintain Temperature Balance

In order to keep the body temperature warm and stable, the animals will take advantage of sunlight in their daily activities. Animals are grouped into two based on the effect of temperature on the environment, namely homoithermic and poikilothermic.

Homoitherms are warm-blooded animals, while poikilotherms are cold-blooded animals. Both types of animals need sunlight. The goal is to develop adaptations, especially in regulating body temperature.

4. Streamlining the Digestive Process of Food

Sunlight can help animals to expedite the digestive process of food in the body. This is because sunlight contains heat.

5. Speed ​​up the Adaptation Process

Animals often move from place to place to survive. He must quickly adapt. With the help of sunlight, they can adapt to their environment quickly.

6. Provide Food

Animals are classified into three based on the type of food. The three types are herbivores (plant eaters), carnivores (meat eaters), and omnivores (meat and plant eaters).

Herbivorous animals need the sun’s energy the most. This is because the sun helps the growth and development of plants. When plants thrive, herbivorous animals will not lack food.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 3 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

7. Provide oxygen

Sunlight is one of the raw materials for photosynthesis in plants. If the intake of sunlight is sufficient for plants to photosynthesize. Thus, the oxygen used to breathe animals and humans will be met.

Benefits of the Sun for Humans

Sunlight is needed by humans, especially for their physical needs. Without sunlight, humans will find it difficult to move. The following are the benefits of sunlight for human life which are summarized from various sources on the internet.

1. Being a Source of Vitamin D

Vitamin D is needed by the body. Every human being must receive sun exposure of approximately 4,000 to 9,000 IU/day or about 10 to 20 minutes every day. Vitamin D is very useful for the development of bones and teeth as well as helps the absorption of calcium in the body.

2. Become a Source of Information

Sunlight is the main and free source of lighting for life on earth. The presence of the sun allows us to see without the need for electricity. It is also a source of lighting at night. You do this by storing light in solar panels.

3. Become a source of electric power

Sunlight is one source of solar power. Currently, some Indonesian people have switched to using independent sources of electrical energy, namely solar power with solar panels.

4. Lose Weight

UV rays emitted by the sun can convert cholesterol into vitamin D. Cholesterol is certainly not good for the body. It can cause various diseases and lead to excess body weight. By basking in the sun, we will get many benefits, for example, getting vitamin D while losing weight.

5. Increase Body Immunity

Based on research conducted by Georgetown University Medical Center on solar thermal energy. The research found that sunlight can provide energy to T cells which are one of the cells with an important role in the human immune system.

6. Become a source of heat

Sunlight is a natural source of heat needed by humans in their daily needs. For example to warm themselves, drying clothes, making salted fish, and other activities.

Benefits of the Sun for Plants

Sunlight benefits every living thing on earth. Animals, plants and humans depend on sunlight for their lives. Here are the benefits of sunlight for plants.

1. Helps the Photosynthesis Process

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), photosynthesis is the utilization of sunlight energy (artificial sunlight) by green leafy plants or bacteria to convert carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates. Photosynthesis occurs when there is sunlight and carbon dioxide.

Plants that carry out photosynthesis have stomata which will absorb carbon dioxide. Meanwhile, chlorophyll absorbs light. At the same time, water from the soil will be absorbed by the roots to be carried to the leaves.

Photosynthesis itself aims to convert water and carbon dioxide into oxygen and hydrogen. Hydrogen is needed by plants for the process of growth and development. Meanwhile, oxygen is released to the outside.

2. Assist Agriculture and Plantation

Sunlight is very influential in agriculture or plantations. This relates to the process of photosynthesis carried out by plants. If plants get enough sunlight then growth will occur to the maximum. Thus, these plants will be utilized by humans and animals.

3. Adding Nutrition

Sunlight is the best source of nutrition for plants. These nutritional needs can easily be obtained through sunlight. It can help the process of growing sprouts to be richer in nutrients.

4. Helps the Growth Process

The sun is useful for activating chlorophyll, warming seeds, giving a green color, keeping the temperature stable, accelerating the growth process in plants, and so on.

Disorders Arising from Lack of Exposure to Sunlight

Humans will experience various disorders when they lack exposure to sunlight. The following are the disorders experienced by humans which have been summarized from the klikdokter.com page.

1. Depressive Disorders

Exposure to sunlight can increase the release of the hormone serotonin. This hormone acts as a mood enhancer and helps a person feel calm and focused.

Lack of sunlight can cause serotonin levels to decrease. This condition increases the risk of major depression.

2. Insomnia

Lack of sunlight can cause loss of circadian rhythms (the body’s internal clock). This results in disturbed night sleep. This condition if it occurs continuously will trigger insomnia.

3. Heart Problems

Vitamin D produced by the body functions as a self-protector from various types of diseases. One of them, heart disease. Without sunlight, the body will have difficulty producing vitamin D. Even though ultraviolet (UV) rays play a role in regulating blood pressure. Therefore, vitamin D deficiency can increase the risk of cardiovascular problems.

4. Cancer

Excess sunlight can cause skin cancer. However, sufficient amount of sun is useful for preventing cancer. People who live in areas with less sunlight are more likely to suffer from certain types of cancer. This is inversely proportional to people who live in places that are exposed to more sunlight.

Cancers caused by a lack of sunlight include ovarian cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, Hodgkin’s lymphoma, prostate cancer, and so on.

5. Rickets and Osteomalacia

Rickets is a disorder that causes weak and soft bones. This is caused by a deficiency of vitamin D. In adults, the condition of soft bones and break easily is called osteomalacia.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 5 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

6. Arthritis and Fibromyalgia

Arthritis or fibromyalgia can occur due to a lack of sunlight. This is related to the vitamin D that is produced. Adults who don’t get enough sun will often feel aches in the muscles and bones or feel a little stiff in the morning.

Nutrients in the form of calcium and collagen can work together to form bones. However, without adequate intake of vitamin D it will disrupt the process. As a result, the bone can actually ache and a throbbing sensation may appear.

7. Multiple Sclerosis

The risk of multiple sclerosis (MS) can occur due to lack of sunlight which is also related to a lack of vitamin D. Multiple sclerosis is an autoimmune disease that occurs when the body’s immune system attacks healthy cells.

In a person with MS, the immune system attacks the cells located in myelin, the protective sheath that surrounds the nerves in the brain and spinal cord. Damage to the myelin sheath will interfere with nerve signals from the brain to other parts of the body. the damage can cause symptoms that affect the brain, eyes, and spinal cord.

8. Osteoporosis

Vitamin D, which comes from sunlight, plays a big role in maintaining bone health. With sufficient levels, vitamin D can maintain bone health, prevent osteoporosis and other bone disorders.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy – We certainly know that there are many benefits of solar thermal energy. As the largest source of energy in the world, the sun has provided many benefits to the life of living things on earth, such as humans, animals, plants, and even the planet itself.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, the sun can be interpreted as a star which is the center of the solar system of the Milky Way galaxy. As the center of the solar system, the sun naturally also plays a role in emitting heat and light to Earth and other planets. The sun is also known to have a large content of hydrogen and helium.

As human civilization progresses, solar thermal energy begins to be used for various purposes in everyday life, such as industry, households, and offices. It doesn’t stop there, here are some of the benefits of heat energy from sunlight for human life that you need to know. Come on, see the following reviews!

A. The Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy for Humans

1. Solar electricity

The sun is one of the energy that will never run out or can be said as renewable energy. So do not be surprised if the first benefit of solar energy is that it can be used as an energy source for electricity. Electricity from the sun itself is known as solar electricity.

By utilizing solar thermal energy as a source of electricity, this allows you to have an electricity supply that is safe and good for the environment. We know for ourselves that so far humans still depend on coal to power electricity. Meanwhile, it is believed that solar energy electricity will provide extraordinary benefits for humans such as for homes, buildings and factories.

2. Give light

The next benefit of solar thermal energy is that it can be used as a source of lighting for humans. If there is no solar energy in the form of light, of course the world will be engulfed in darkness. This will make all mankind unable to see anything in the surrounding environment.

The light source that comes from the sun is certainly very different from the lighting provided by the lamp. The lamp itself can turn on if it is powered by electricity first. Therefore, along with the use of cheaper solar panel technology, you can use it as a source of natural light in the morning and energy reserves for lights at night.

3. Solar vehicles

In everyday life, humans cannot be separated from the role of vehicles to move. One of the benefits of solar energy that is being discussed today is, of course, solar powered vehicles. Solar vehicles are believed to be the most widely used mode of transportation in the future.

However, the use of this solar vehicle itself is still not widely owned today. This is because solar power is not yet widely available to many people. Therefore, the way that can be done to realize this vehicle is of course to make changes to the source of electricity, from coal to renewable energy such as the sun.

B. The Benefits of Solar Energy for Health

After knowing the benefits that solar thermal energy can provide for human life, the following will explain a series of benefits of solar thermal energy for human health, including:

1. Source of Vitamin D

Not only does it only have benefits as renewable energy, solar thermal energy can actually be one of the nutrients needed by the body. Based on research conducted by The Institute OF Medicine, a person should always receive vitamin D intake of 4000-9000 IU/day or about 10 to 20 minutes every day.

As an excellent source of nutrition for the body, the sun’s heat energy is also known as the sunshine vitamin or in the world of health it is known as vitamin D. Human skin basically has a type of cholesterol which has a function as a builder of vitamin D. When this compound is exposed to UV radiation -B from the sun, the compound will turn into vitamin D.

When compared to vitamin D that comes from food or even supplements, vitamin D can circulate twice as long in the human body. It’s just that, the amount of vitamin D that can be absorbed by the body really depends on various factors, such as age, season, sunscreen, even clothing.

2. Strengthens bones

The sun’s heat energy is very well used to strengthen bones. Vitamin D itself is known to have an important role in regulating calcium as well as making phosphorus levels in the blood more stable. Basically, the human body needs very good vitamin D to be used in absorbing calcium

A child must have high levels of vitamin D. This is because low levels of vitamin D in children will cause rickets. Rickets itself is a disorder of growing bones that causes calcium to fail to be stored in the bones.

The same thing can happen to adults. Lack of vitamin D levels will have the potential to cause someone to get osteomalacia or softening of the bones. In addition, many people are also known to have osteoporosis due to a lack of vitamin D in the body.

3. Improves Mood

Basking in the sun for 10 to 15 minutes per day is also very good for preventing stress and depression. Of course you can use this when you want to start the day to be more enthusiastic about your activities and work. Someone who has decreased sun exposure is known to be more susceptible to stress and depression.

The benefits of solar thermal energy are basically to support the release of serotonin and endorphins. These two hormones are closely related to mood so they can make a person happier. No wonder, if sunlight is effective in providing overall calm so as to avoid depression.

4. Improve Sleep Quality

Besides being able to make blood circulation in the human body smoother, solar thermal energy is also known to be very beneficial for improving one’s sleep quality. When the retina of the eye is exposed to sunlight, the body will begin to produce serotonin.

As Healthline wrote, a small study conducted in 2014 showed that office workers experienced improved sleep quality when they received lots of natural light or solar thermal energy. This of course can help the body regulate the internal clock so that it effectively improves the quality of one’s sleep.

5. Lowers Blood Pressure

The second benefit of solar energy for human health is that it can be used as a way to lower blood pressure. When the skin gets the sun’s heat energy, a compound called nitric oxide is released into the blood vessels. This process itself is effective enough to help lower blood pressure levels. This in turn will also greatly help to reduce the risk of heart attack and stroke.

According to a journal published by the Journal of Investigate Dermatology Suggest, exposure to UVA rays produced by sunlight has the benefit of dilating blood vessels. The dilation of blood vessels itself can be understood to provide space for blood so it can flow normally.

6. Prevent Cancer

As a natural source of vitamin D, solar thermal energy is known to be very good for human health, such as preventing certain cancers. Several studies have shown that exposure to natural heat energy or sunlight can reduce the risk of colorectal, prostate, breast cancer and non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma.

7. Lose weight

The sun’s heat energy that exposes UV rays is proven to be able to convert cholesterol in the body into vitamin D. Cholesterol that is too high in the body can make the body have excessive body weight. Therefore, sunbathing will be perfect for those of you who are or want to lose weight.

8. Increase Body Immunity

According to research conducted by researchers from the Georgetown University Medical Center regarding solar thermal energy, it is known that based on a special mechanism, sunlight can provide energy to T cells. T cells themselves are one of the cells that have a central role in the human immune system.

The discovery itself has proven that the sun’s thermal energy can be directly used to activate immune cells through accelerated cell movement. Cells basically need to move to do their job, for example, to reach a site of infection or regulate the body’s immune response.

B. The Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy for Animals

In general, solar thermal energy has the benefit of providing warmth to all living things on earth. Therefore, all creatures that live in this world are very dependent on energy from the sun. The sun can be said to be an important energy for the survival of all living things on earth.

Well, here are some of the benefits of solar thermal energy for animals, including the following:

1. Warms the animal’s body in order to survive. This is especially for reptile-type animals such as crocodiles, snakes and lizards.

2. As a source of vitamin D. Just like humans, animals also need vitamin D and the sun is a natural source to get this vitamin.

3. Some animals take advantage of the heat from the sun to help expedite the process of digesting food.

4. Keep the animal’s body temperature warm and stable.

5. The sun helps the process of photosynthesis of plants which are a source of food for animals. Helps the growth of the animal’s body to be faster.

6. Some animals need sunlight to accelerate the process of animal adaptation to their environment.

7. As a source of lighting to find prey and food. As a guide for flying animals. Regulates sleep cycles.

C. The Benefits of Solar Heat Energy for Plants

A plant or plant is known to need solar thermal energy in order to continue to reproduce. The sun has a very important role in maintaining the temperature or air temperature to remain stable. If the air temperature is unstable, it can make the plants wither quickly and cannot grow optimally.

Plants that are at an air temperature that is too low will result in the evaporation process taking longer. This will ultimately have a direct impact on the survival of other creatures, such as humans and animals.

Therefore, the following are some of the benefits of solar thermal energy for plants, including:

1. Helping the process of photosynthesis which is useful for producing food for plants.

2. Helps the process of plant growth as a whole.

3. As the best source of nutrition for plants.

4. Maintain plant temperature to be more stable and balanced.

5. Warms the seeds on plants.

6. Activate the chlorophyll contained in plants.

7. Gives green color to plants.

8. Helping the growth of flowers and leaves, plants exposed to sunlight will quickly flower and grow tall.

9. Helping the process of growing sprouts to become richer in nutrients.

Thus the benefits of solar thermal energy for humans, animals and plants. Based on the explanation above, we can conclude that the existence of the sun has a very important role for all living things on Earth. This is because the sun can be said to be the source of life for planet Earth and other planets.

Without the sun, planet Earth would have temperatures unusable for life, not even by bacteria or microorganisms. If the sun suddenly does not emit its light, this can cause changes in planet Earth’s air temperature to drop drastically.

The earth’s temperature will not drop to 0 degrees Celsius (0C) immediately, because the Earth still stores heat from solar radiation from the time/time when the sun still emits its rays. It takes a very long time for the Earth’s temperature to drop to 0 0C. However, as long as that happens the cycle of life on Earth will be disrupted until it finally disappears before Earth’s temperature reaches zero.

This is because the absence of sunlight will cause plants to be unable to carry out the process of photosynthesis, which converts carbon dioxide and water into oxygen and glucose. If the sun stops shining, then the process of photosynthesis will stop. As a result, plants cannot produce the glucose or oxygen needed by animals and humans.

Benefits of Gotong Royong – Who doesn’t know what mutual cooperation is? Indonesian people are certainly familiar with this one verb. Because, the Indonesian people themselves are famous for their hospitality and good nature that likes to help. So, what exactly is the meaning of gotong royong?

Mutual cooperation is one of the characteristics of the Indonesian people, especially Bulukumba. In accordance with what is stated in the 3rd Pancasila precept, namely the unity of Indonesia. The behavior of gotong royong or mutual assistance has existed and been owned by the Indonesian people since ancient times. Gotong royong is a national and cultural personality that is inherent and rooted in people’s lives.

Meaning of Mutual Cooperation

Gotong royong is an activity carried out jointly and has a voluntary nature. So that the activities carried out can run smoothly, light, and also easy. One example of what can be done in mutual cooperation is building public facilities, cleaning the village environment, or community service.

This mutual cooperation attitude should be shared by all elements and layers of society in Indonesia. Because, by having this awareness, all levels of society will find it easier to carry out all activities by mutual cooperation.

That way, all the things that will be done will be easier and also quickly completed as well as smoother and more advanced. Not only that, with the awareness of all levels of society in implementing the attitude of mutual cooperation, an increasingly close brotherhood relationship will be created.

As the times progress, many cultural values ​​enter and become a part of the life of Indonesian society. In addition, people’s lives gradually began to change. From an agrarian economy to an industrial economy. Today, the industrial economy is more developed and advanced. Therefore, many living arrangements are based on economic considerations. So that many people who have a materialistic nature and the value of mutual cooperation that used to be very attached to it are now starting to fade.

Understanding Gotong Royong According to Experts

1. According to KBBI

The definition of gotong royong according to KBBI is cooperation or mutual help, and mutual assistance among members or a community

2. According to Koentjaraningrat

Gotong royong is a collaboration, where a person is said to have faith if he loves his brother as he loves himself.

3. According to Sakjoyo and Pudjiwati Sakjoyo

They revealed that gotong royong is a tradition of mutual help between people in various fields of social activity. Whether it’s based on neighbor relations, kinship, and based on practical efficiency and there are also other cooperative activities.

4. According to Koentjaraningrat

He revealed that gotong royong is a concept that is closely related to the life of people who work as farmers in an agrarian society. Gotong royong is a system for deploying additional personnel outside the family to fill deficiencies in farming production activities.

5. According to Mubyarto

Gotong royong is a joint activity to achieve a common goal.

Benefits of Gotong Royong

The following are some of the benefits we can get if we apply this attitude to social life.

1. So that the environment around us can look cleaner, more comfortable, and more beautiful

2. A sense of solidarity can be established within the community

3. In order for our life in society to be better with mutual cooperation

4. General activities or activities can be completed more quickly without the need to spend a lot of RT/RW funds and cash. If it is in the form of physical development, of course with mutual cooperation it will greatly save the budget. This is because the costs that were previously for labor will be reduced because these activities are carried out in mutual cooperation.

5. With gotong royong, brotherhood and togetherness among citizens will be tighter. All neighbors know other neighbours, officials know workers, traders know drivers, the rich know neighbors who are less affluent, and so on.

6. The security of the environment around the house is safer, because all residents already know each other. So if later there are suspicious people entering residential areas, it will be easier for residents to detect them.

7. Peace and serenity in social life will be felt more, because all residents already know each other.

8. Mutual cooperation knows no difference. So when it will be done, everything feels the same.

Types of Mutual Cooperation

You need to understand that gotong royong is divided into several types, according to what is being done. Here are some types of mutual cooperation that you need to know.

1. Community Service

Community service is one of the activities or activities carried out together in the surrounding community. This activity is a form that can increase the sense of mutual help between people and mutual care.

Community service is usually carried out when there is a cleaning of the neighborhood or when there is an event on August 17th. With community service, we will get to know our neighbours, RT/RW, and local residents where we live. Of course this can foster a sense of mutual care between neighbors and residents.

2. Disaster Response

The second type of mutual cooperation is disaster response. Where this activity is a process of response from the community to work together in dealing with a disaster or calamity. Disaster response usually starts with small things such as caring for the surrounding community who are experiencing difficulties, helping others, and so on.

3. Deliberation

Not many of us know that deliberation is a type of mutual cooperation. Why is that? Because deliberation is a way or media to reach consensus or agreement. With deliberations, the community can gather and discuss the problems being faced. Then from this activity, an agreement will emerge regarding the solution to be carried out.

With deliberations, the community can also exchange ideas, thoughts and opinions that aim to reach a consensus. The hope is that the agreement will benefit all parties involved.

4. Great Harvest

The main harvest is usually done during the harvest season. This activity is a condition of the harvest season on a fairly large scale from all agricultural fields. Usually, the harvest season is done twice a year or depending on the farm.

During the harvest season, usually the community will work together to help with the harvesting process. Later they will share some of the harvest to the people who help. So, this will certainly increase the sense of caring and sharing between each other.

5. Study Together

Studying together is also a type of mutual cooperation. Where in this activity students and students carry out a collaboration in solving a problem or material that is considered difficult. By studying together, it will be easier for us to understand material that we think is difficult. Because, we can ask directly to friends who already understand.

Characteristics of Gotong Royong

The following are some of the characteristics of mutual cooperation that you need to understand.

1. Gotong-royong is one of the basic characteristics that is a pre-eminence of the Indonesian people and is not shared by citizens of other countries.

2. With gotong royong, many people have a high sense of caring and togetherness is created in every activity carried out together.

3. Has a noble value from ancient times to the present for generations.

4. Gotong royong highly upholds human values ​​and cares for others. In gotong royong activities, all activities and work will be carried out together. Without discriminating or looking at the position and degree of a person.

5. Gotong royong also has the meaning of helping each other to achieve harmony and also happiness in living life in society.

6. Mutual cooperation activities are also carried out voluntarily. So don’t expect anything in return.

Collaborative Goals

One of the goals of having gotong royong is its value. Where there will be enthusiasm that can be manifested in the form of individual actions or behavior. They will unite to carry out an activity together for the common good without expecting anything in return or reward.

The following are the values ​​contained in mutual cooperation activities, including:

1. Togetherness

In gotong royong activities, it will reflect the togetherness that is created in the community. That is, the community voluntarily and jointly helps other people as well as for the public interest that can be used together.

2. Unity

Togetherness that is created from mutual cooperation activities is also able to give birth to unity among citizens. With this unity, the community will become closer, stronger, and able to deal with problems that arise in their neighborhood.

3. Willing to Sacrifice

With gotong royong activities, it will foster an attitude of self-sacrifice. The sacrifice in question can be anything. Such as energy, time, ideas, even money. All sacrifices made purely for the common good. Communities are willing to make sacrifices and put aside personal interests to meet the needs of the common community.

4. Please Help

One of the goals of gotong royong is to foster an attitude of mutual assistance between communities. Where people want to help and help others in need. It is their help that will benefit others and also themselves.

5. Socialization

By doing these activities, people become aware that we are social beings. Where activities help each other can make people know each other. So that the socialization process can be maintained.

The Goals of Mutual Cooperation for Self and Society

1. The purpose of mutual cooperation is to invite the whole community to always work together in order to increase togetherness. Because, as a social community, of course we cannot live without the help of others. In a sense, we will always need other people in our lives.

2. Working together is also able to make the community more cohesive and can get to know each other. With these activities, it will be easier for people to help each other. For example, when we are going to build a house, harvest agricultural products, work on the fields, help neighbors who are having a celebration, and also help each other in advancing the country. In this way, all the tasks we will do will definitely feel lighter and easier to complete.

3. Making all work and any activity easier and lighter.

4. Creating unity and integrity among citizens.

5. Can save expenses or budget.

6. Can complete a job more quickly and efficiently.

7. This activity is able to strengthen the bonds of brotherhood among members of the community. Where they can gather with anyone who is in the implementation of mutual cooperation.

Efforts to Preserve Mutual Cooperation

This is one of the hopes of all community members so that the spirit of gotong royong will always exist and be sustainable. Don’t let it fade away with the advancement of the times in the digital era. Therefore, we need some efforts to preserve the mutual cooperation behavior so that it can survive. Here are some efforts we can do to preserve this attitude.

1.In preserving the attitude of gotong royong, we need the awareness of all parties or members of the community to have an attitude of being willing to sacrifice for the public interest.

2. Reducing and minimizing some of the assumptions that reveal that mutual cooperation behavior is not an important thing to do. In this way, it is possible that the community will be motivated and made aware that instilling an attitude of mutual cooperation is important and needs to be done.

3. There is no community that uses certain things or cases, for example Race, to ride it with mutual cooperation behavior. If this is done, it will hurt and tarnish the values ​​contained in the mutual cooperation attitude.

4. Reducing the distance that exists between layers or members of society. With this, of course, when mutual cooperation is carried out, each individual has the potential to feel awkward.

5. We need the government’s role to always voice the importance of mutual cooperation.

6. The government can set an example for the community so that they always carry out the habit of mutual cooperation by being active directly in the field.

7. The government needs to give gifts or rewards to certain parties who always want to preserve the culture of mutual cooperation. If this is done, it will provide motivation and enthusiasm so that people always preserve this culture.

Obstacles of Mutual Cooperation in the All-Digital Age

Making good things and perpetuating mutual cooperation is not easy to do. One of them is to maintain the spirit of mutual cooperation in the community. The following are some of the obstacles that may be encountered related to the attitude of mutual cooperation in society.

There is a response that reveals that the Indonesian nation’s gotong royong is mutually beneficial. While this is now something that is difficult to obtain or obtain. Where now, the majority of people will do mutual cooperation if there will be rewards that will be received later.

The increasing trend of increasing the number of cases of violence and other conflicts related to religion has become a separate record for the Indonesian people. We need to understand that with this conflict, it will become a separate threat in the future for the integrity of our nation.

1. The values ​​and characteristics of mutual cooperation that have existed and been developed since the beginning have not been thoroughly explained. So that it will have an impact on students’ understanding which is only half about this mutual cooperation attitude.

2. There is a lack of understanding on the part of the community that it is no longer relevant to use the principle of gotong royong. So that all parties in society consider this to be something that is right and not wrong.

3. The social feeling that was once ingrained in Indonesian society has now begun to fade. Both in urban and even in rural areas. Maybe in urban areas we can still understand. Because, they have experienced a fairly heavy lifestyle. Without money, they will be miserable and even starve. Meanwhile, living in the countryside still has the convenience of surviving, even though it is included in the class of people who cannot afford it.

4. Lack of role from the government itself. Where they never go directly to the field or into the community to improve and awaken the social spirit that has long faded.

Those are some explanations about the importance of gotong royong in Indonesian society. Do you still maintain the attitude of gotong royong where you live?

In recent years, aromatherapy candles have become very popular because they claim to relieve stress and anxiety. Aromatherapy fragrances come from essential oils that are scientifically proven to provide health benefits. However, there is no research that proves that aromatherapy candles can relieve colds in babies.

Are you a fan of aromatherapy candles? For those who love this product, aromatherapy candles have become the solution to many problems at home. Smell an unpleasant odor in the room? You can light aromatherapy candles. Or are you in a bad mood? Aromatherapy candles can also lift your mood in an instant.

Many people are very fond, some even obsessed with using scented candles to relieve stress. However, there are also those who argue that scented candles can be bad for health. Why is that? Check out the review below.

As the name implies, aroma candles are a type of candle that is mixed with essential oils or essential oils to produce fragrance. Well, the fragrance that is released is claimed to be able to overcome stress, anxiety and other health conditions.

Actually, the health benefits obtained from aroma candles are from the essential oil content . There have been many studies that reveal the health benefits of essential oils . The aromatherapy content in the candle will evaporate when burned and then fill the air in the room.

Benefits of Aromatherapy Candles for Health

Fatigue and stress problems are an integral part of everyday life, especially for people who work in big cities. That is why, many are then looking for various ways to relieve fatigue, one of which is by using aromatherapy.

Doing meditation with aromatherapy, or simply relaxing and resting in a quiet room with an aroma candle is an easy, inexpensive and effective way to relieve stress. When viewed from this side, aroma candles can be said to provide positive benefits for health. Because, health does not only include physical, but also mental health.

Launching from Medical News Today , a study revealed that the content of essential oils in aromatherapy candles can reduce cortisol levels in the body. The hormone cortisol is a hormone involved in the stress response in the body. When the levels are reduced automatically the risk of stress also decreases.

Another study published in the National Library of Medicine explained that bergamot essential oil, which is often mixed into aroma candles, can actually overcome negative emotions, fatigue, and cortisol levels. When viewed from its effect, aroma candles may have the potential to slightly relieve colds in babies. However, there is no specific research that reveals the benefits of aroma candles for treating colds in babies.

However, what is known for certain, aroma candles can indeed have a calming effect, so that it makes a person more relaxed when inhaling them. Unfortunately, with the increasing popularity of aromatherapy candles, now many aroma candles are circulating whose fragrances are not derived from essential oils and many are made from artificial fragrances. Exposure to artificial fragrances needs to be watched out for because it can actually cause migraines, headaches to asthma attacks.

It can be difficult to tell which candles contain artificial fragrances and which contain only essential oils. Therefore, you have to be more observant when you want to buy scented candles. Also, it’s best to talk to your doctor before using scented candles for baby colds to ensure safety and effectiveness.

Dangers of Aromatherapy Candles for Health

Even though it is considered to have a positive impact on mental health, it turns out that aromatherapy candles also have a negative impact. Experts say that scented candles can harm your health as well as the environment.

Why is that? It turns out that aroma wax can produce toxins that harm the body when inhaled. However, of course not all types of scented candles are like that. Therefore, you should start being critical and vigilant, and need to examine in more detail about the content of the wax ingredients used to make these aromatherapy candles.

In several developed countries, such as England, companies that produce aroma candles have been asked by the government to reduce emissions from these candles. In addition, the government also asked aroma candle companies to warn consumers about the negative impact of their products on health. This is quite a concern in England because quite a lot of people there routinely use scented candles to perfume their rooms and homes.

As additional information, most aroma candles are made from paraffin wax , which has been studied to release chemicals that are harmful to lung health. Several other types of aroma candles also use a metal-core wick, which can also release toxins that are harmful to lung health.

In addition, inhaling aromatherapy is also not good for people with a history of asthma because it can trigger an attack. However, the use of scented candles for people who do not have previous respiratory problems is relatively safe. Keep in mind that scented candles are still a combustion product that creates smoke, so scented candles should not be used in tightly closed (no ventilation) or confined spaces.

You need to make sure you don’t fall asleep or leave the room when the scented candle is burning because it can trigger a fire. Do not light aroma candles near flammable objects. Candles should be placed out of reach of children. Also avoid burning scented candles for more than two hours. Make sure the candle is always clean, including from the remaining burning wick from previous use.

Several types of aromatherapy should be avoided by pregnant women. Pregnant women who want to use aromatherapy should first consult with their obstetrician. The use of aromatherapy candles that cause tumors or cancer on the other hand cannot be scientifically proven. However, some “naughty” aromatherapy candles often claim that aromatherapy candles can treat cancer. This is also not true.

Safe Ways to Use Aromatherapy Candles

So that you can still get the benefits of aromatherapy candles for your mental health without disturbing your body’s health, choose aromatherapy candles made from natural wax , such as soybeans. These natural aromatherapy candles emit much less soot and harmful chemicals than those made from paraffin wax .

Then, also choose aromatherapy candles that have a short wick and no metal core to reduce the production of air pollution and soot. Always check the ingredients listed on the label and do a search whether these substances are harmful to health.

One more thing, you also have to limit the time you use aromatherapy candles to reduce the amount of chemicals circulating in the room. Apart from that, there are actually other alternatives to be able to fill the room with aromatherapy besides using candles. Some of them are by using the essence oil directly or a special aromatherapy steam device. Both tend to be safer for your lung health.

How to Keep Aromatherapy Candles Lasting

Many candles with a scent that you like have a price that is not cheap. Therefore, it’s only natural that you would want them to last longer. When you need it, you can grab a lighter and enjoy its relaxing and pleasant aroma.

The following will explain how to make aromatherapy candles last longer, but you still have to understand that there will be times when they will run out too. To make aromatherapy candles last longer, here are some tips you can do:

1. Choose the Right Candle

In fact, aromatherapy candles with soy ingredients have a lower melting point than paraffin wax. Therefore, if you choose soy-based waxes, they can last up to 50 percent longer. Plus, if you are smart enough to choose one with an interesting scent, you can enjoy the fragrance even when the candle is not lit.

2. Put it in the Right Place

Don’t place a candle on a fireplace, near a fire, near a window that gets a lot of sunlight, or near a radiator. This is because warmth can speed up burning and shorten the life of aromatherapy candles. Also avoid lighting it in a drafty area as this can result in an uneven burner.

3. Don’t Turn On Too Shortly

Burning aromatherapy candles for just a few minutes at a time won’t do you any good. In the end, you’ll only melt the wax in the center near the wick while the outer edges won’t burn, because they don’t have time to get hot and melt. It really is just a waste of wax. So, make sure you always burn aromatherapy candles until all the top layers of the wax melt evenly.

4. Cut the Axis

When you first buy an aromatherapy candle, the wick will be just the right length. However, when the candle goes out sometimes mold can get there which means the candle will burn faster and produce more soot. Cutting the wick reduces the height of the flame, ensuring the candle burns more slowly and lasts longer.

For pillar candles, you can use scissors, but if the candle is in a container, it’s best to use wick trimmers. This will ensure the wick is cut evenly, not crookedly, and the wick trimmer has a small cup to ensure the trimmings don’t fall into the wax.

5. Align the Axis

To keep the burn even, you need to make sure the wick is straight up and down after each burn. If it looks leaning to one side, give it a quick slight adjustment with your finger, once it’s cool.

6. Sprinkle a Little Salt

This is one of the secrets to making aromatherapy candles last. Add a pinch of salt to the melted wax after you blow it out, then stir quickly with a toothpick, chopsticks or whatever utensil you have. The salt will slow down the baking time during the next baking time.

7. Limit Burn Time For Four Hours

This is actually for security reasons. Some unlucky people have reported that aromatherapy candles can explode after being left burning for too long. Ignoring this means that you run the risk of not only losing the candle, but possibly the whole house and the things in it.

How To Choose Aromatherapy Candles

Aroma candles come in several types and are made from different materials. Therefore, we have listed the points that should be considered when choosing a scented candle. Please refer to the detailed explanation of each point below!

1. Choose an Aromatherapy Candle Based on the Type of Container

Scented candles can be grouped by the type of container. Some are packaged in tealight containers, votive , cans, and glass jars. Each type of container has its own advantages. What packaged aromatherapy candles are right for you?

a. Tealight: Has a Short Burning Time

If you want to enjoy a relaxing aromatherapy candle in a short time, you can choose the tealight type. This candle has the smallest size compared to other types of aroma candles. In addition, the light weight makes this type of candle often used as a floating candle .

Tealight scented candles have a burning time of around 4–6 hours. Therefore, this type is suitable for those of you who want to use aroma candles in the short term. Those of you who get bored easily with one type of candle scent can try tealight scented candles.

b. Votive: One of the Easiest Types to Find

Votive type scented candles are often used as prayer candles in churches. The short and thick shape makes the aroma last longer. Generally, this type of candle is sold without a holder , so you have to buy the container separately. However, now there are votive candles that are sold complete with the container. Votive scented candles are one of the easiest types of scented candles to find. In addition, this aromatherapy candle has a burning time that varies from 4-24 hours.

c. Cans or Glass Jars: Easy to Take Anywhere

Candles in tins or glass jars are no less popular. You can start a fire as soon as you open the lid without needing a candle holder. In addition, you can take it with you on business trips or traveling. That way, you can enjoy the aroma whenever you feel tired and need some relaxation.

However, you need to be careful because the container is prone to conduct heat. To prevent the table surface from getting hot or stained, you should use a base made of glass, brick or stone. You also have to make sure the base has a flat surface and doesn’t wobble easily when touched.

2. Know the Ingredients of Aromatherapy Candles

The spread of aroma and the burning time of aromatherapy candles really depends on the materials used. Well, this time we will introduce the types of materials commonly used in aromatherapy candles.

a. Paraffin Wax: Usually Affordable

The price of aromatherapy candles made from paraffin is cheaper than other aromatherapy candles. Paraffin candles are suitable for those of you who are trying aromatherapy candles for the first time. However, this candle will give off a distinctive odor that might interfere with the aromatherapy scent.

Paraffin wax also leaves a residue due to the low level of distillation quality. So, we don’t recommend using it too often because the chemical content is not good for the body.

b. Beeswax: Suitable for Use in Bedrooms or Bathrooms

Do you want to enjoy aromatherapy candles in the bedroom or bathroom? Choose aromatherapy candles made from beeswax . Beeswax is a natural ingredient that is often used in cosmetic and food products.

Aromatherapy candles made from beeswax are safe for health because they do not leave excessive soot or smoke. The candles produced by these bees also have a sweet aroma that will spread throughout the room when lit. Another plus is that this wax is difficult to melt at low temperatures, so it can be enjoyed longer. However, beeswax is usually sold at a high price.

c. Soy Wax: Long Lasting and Diffuses Fragrance Quickly

If you want the scent of the wax to spread faster, waxes with more ingredients are recommended. This aromatherapy candle can quickly spread the fragrance in the room. This is of course very useful, especially for those of you who don’t have much time to relax.

Soy wax also tends to be more durable, so it doesn’t run out quickly. This type of wax is made from 100% pure soybeans and is usually produced by hand. If the melt spills on furniture, the soot is not difficult to clean. Plus, this wax is known to be safe for your kids and pets.

d. Palm Wax: Creates a Bright Light

If you want an aromatherapy candle that produces a bright light, palm wax candles can be considered. This candle is made from pure palm oil, contains no chemicals, and produces no pollutants. In addition, the aroma is also durable, so you can enjoy it longer.

e. Gel Candle: Transparent and Can Be Used as Room Decoration

Gel candles are not only relaxing, they can also be used to beautify a room or home decor. Aromatherapy gel type candles are made from petroleum. The fragrances used are also specially formulated to dissolve in oil.

Those of you who like beauty and serenity will love this type of aromatherapy candle. This beautiful candle is suitable to be placed near the entrance, living room or bedroom. These candles are sometimes decorated with beautiful shells or dried flowers. So that the light, aroma and beauty can be enjoyed optimally, the decoration layer and the layer of the burning candle are usually separated.

f. Japanese Cottonseed, Rice, and Wax: Other Natural Waxes to Consider

Other natural ingredients that are sometimes used as a base for making aromatherapy candles are cottonseed, rice, and Japanese wax. These three ingredients are not used as the main ingredient. Even so, all three can still be taken into consideration because they have different advantages.

The advantage of cottonseed wax is that it does not pollute the air. Meanwhile, rice-based candles can be enjoyed for a long time despite their small size. How about candles made from Japanese wax? This type of wax has all the advantages of cottonseed and rice waxes.

Now, you already know the good and bad effects of aromatherapy candles for health. In addition, by being more careful in using it, you can get the positive benefits of aromatherapy for mental health, while still reducing the risk of experiencing lung problems due to chemicals produced through burning it. Hope it is useful.

America is known as a free nation. The people have the freedom to be themselves. They can explore themselves. How to dress is not regulated or bound by state rules. Simply put, the state does not interfere with the affairs of its people.

Every place in the world has a long history. Also the uniqueness of each. Likewise with America. To get to know the Americas better, Sinaumed’s can listen to the following explanation which has been summarized from various pages on the internet.

Astronomical Location of the Americas

The astronomical location of the Americas is at 83°N–55°S and 10°W–170°W. The determination of the astronomical position is obtained based on the location of the region in longitude and latitude. This location means that the American continent stretches from 83 ⁰ north latitude to 55 ⁰ south latitude. Also, longitude 10 ⁰ west to 170 ⁰ east.

The area of ​​the American continent is approximately 42,330,000 km ² . The area of ​​the Americas is approximately 28.5% of the total surface area of ​​the earth. The majority of the Americas are in the western hemisphere. However, vertically the American continent is located in the northern and southern regions of the earth. Therefore, its territory stretches from north latitude to south latitude.

The continent of America is bordered by water. To the north it is bordered by the Arctic Ocean. It is bordered on the east by the Atlantic Ocean, on the south by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by the Pacific Ocean.

From the astronomical location of the Americas, it influences several things. Launching from the Tata Ruang.id page, following is the influence of the astronomical position of the American continent.

1. Climate

The climate on the American continent is not uniform. Some regions have different variations. Here are some climates that occur in the Americas.

• Wet tropical climate, covering Central America and parts of northern South America.
• Continental climate, covering the eastern part of the United States.
• Steppe climate, covering the eastern mountains of North America.
• The climate is arctic (cold), covering parts of Alaska and northern Canada.
• Desert climate, covering the western part of America.
• The climate is temperate, covering the coastal areas of Alaska and California.

2. Biodiversity

The American continent has biodiversity both in flora and fauna groups. Especially in the South America region. There are several natural varieties such as tropical rain forests, deserts and tundra which are formed due to their astronomical and geographical location.

3. Time Zone

In America there are several different time zones. The following is the division of time zones in the Americas.

• UTC-12, covers the outer islands of the United States.
• UTC-11, covers the territory of American Samoa, the outer islands of the United States.
• UTC-10, covers the territory of Hawaii (US) (Hawaii Time Zone).
• UTC-9, covering the territory of Alaska (US) (Alaska Time Zone).
• UTC-8, covering Canada, Mexico & United States (Pacific Time Zone),
• UTC-7, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Mountain Time Zone).
• UTC-6 includes Chile, Ecuador, Honduras, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, Belize, Mexico, Canada & the United States (Central Time Zone).
• UTC-5, includes Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Panama, Bahamas, Haiti, Peru, Cuba, Canada & United States (Eastern Time Zone).
• UTC-4.30, covering Venezuela.
• UTC-4, includes Brazil, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Barbados, Aruba, Bermuda, Dominica, Guyana, Guadaloupe, Antigua & Barbuda, Saint Kitts & Nevis, Trinidad & Tobago, Saint Lucia, Canada & the United States (Atlantic Time Zone) .
• UTC-3, includes Brazil, Uruguay, Argentina, Suriname.
• UTC-2, includes Brazil.

The Americas have native inhabitants, namely Eskimos and Indians. Then, came immigrants from countries in Europe, such as England, Italy, France, and Spain.

History of the Discovery of the Americas

Launching from the Kompas.com page, the recorded discoverer of the Americas was Christopher Columbus, an Italian sailor. However, in its development, this assumption was not proven. There has been speculation that Columbus was not the first person to discover America and interact with its native peoples.

Several Africans, Europeans, and Asians are believed to have reached the Americas before the exploration of Columbus in 1492. However, not all theories are accepted by scientists and historians.

Here are two versions of the theory of the discovery of the Americas.

1. The Vikings

The discoverers of the Americas before Columbus, who are recognized by historians, were the Vikings. The Vikings themselves are a term for Scandinavian people who once explored and plundered Europe and parts of North America around the end of the 8th century.

According to Icelandic history, the leader of the Vikings, Leif Eriksson, became the first person to discover America in around 1000. Long before Christopher Columbus’ voyage. It is suspected that he founded a settlement in L’Anse aux Meadows, located in Newfoundland and Labdaror, Canada.

This opinion is supported by historical and archaeological evidence in the form of the remains of a Viking settlement at L’Anse aux Meadows discovered by Norwegian explorers in 1960. The site is the only evidence of transoceanic contact prior to Christopher Columbus. The site was also designated as a World Heritage by UNESCO in 1978.

2. Christopher Columbus

When Europeans entered the century of exploration, Christopher Columbus became one of the Spanish representatives who sailed the Atlantic Ocean. Initially, Columbus’ goal of making the voyage was to find a route from Europe to countries in the East, namely Asia.

However, during the voyage that began in 1942, it landed in San Salvador, the Bahamas. Not in the East Indies as many have assumed. Further expeditions underway in 1493, 1498, and 1502 took him to parts of South America and Central America.

For his achievements, Columbus was named the discoverer of the Americas. However, in its development, this claim is considered wrong by most people. Columbus is more suitable to be named as the figure who introduced and paved the way for Europeans to America. This is also supported by the notion that Columbus never reached North America during his voyage.

Characteristics of the Americas

Every continent in the world has its own characteristics, America is no exception. Launching from the Idntimes.com page, here are the characteristics of the Americas.

1. Physical Characteristics

In general, the American continent is divided into two regions, namely North America and South America. Although both are located in the Americas. However, both have different climates.

In North America it has a subarctic climate, whereas, the southern region looks slightly tropical. The South American region has two climates, namely the northern part has a tropical climate, while the rest has a cold climate.

This climate division also affects the distribution of flora and fauna. This is due to the existence of diverse landscapes. Brazil has tropical rain forests and the Amazon River so that it is inhabited by a variety of plants and animals. Meanwhile, North America has grasslands that can be used as agriculture.

2. Socio-Cultural Characteristics

When Columbus discovered the Americas and called it the “New World”. Which indicates a narrow understanding in looking at the world, “this world is not only limited to the European continent”.

Increasingly, America is not only inhabited by Europeans. But also Asian and African people also came to America. Thus, there are encounters between various tribes, races, ethnicities, and religions in every region of the American continent.

These meetings created an increasingly diverse American population. This certainly has an impact on social and cultural life. A person or group who comes from outside the Americas does not only come with a body, but also with different social and cultural backgrounds.

This has made America have diverse social and cultural positions that have survived to this day. In socio-cultural development, the American continent also experienced assimilation which gave birth to a new culture.

The variations take the form of religion, language, art, and so on. Language, for example, in North America the predominance is English. However, in South America they use Portuguese or Spanish.

3. Economic Characteristics

The Americas have a distinctive economic pattern seen from the size of the area, the variety of landscapes, and geopolitical influences. The economy in the Americas has an advantage, namely in the field of trade. This is due to several countries with the largest economies in the world—including those in the G20—becoming part of the American continent.

On the American continent alone there are five countries that are officially listed on the G20 website. Among them are Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Mexico and the United States. Economic activity in the Americas is also supported by the strength of the United States as the most influential country in the world.

Countries in the Americas do not only rely on trade. But also mining. Countries in Latin America such as the United States, Venezuela, and others make petroleum a mainstay. There are also several countries that utilize mineral mining as an economic driver.

America’s Potential

Like other countries in the world, America also has natural potential. The following is the natural potential possessed by America which has been summarized from various sources.

1. Mining

America also has potential in the mining sector in the form of new coal, silver, gold, oil and natural gas. A coal-producing region in the Appalachian Mountains of Chile. Meanwhile, the gold and silver producing countries are Mexico and Missouri. The producers of natural gas and oil are in Mexico and Venezuela.

2. Agriculture and Agriculture

Agriculture in America produces rice, cotton, sugar, and coffee. Which agricultural products are scattered in various countries in the Americas. The rice producing countries are Georgia, Texas, California, Carolina and Louisiana.

Meanwhile, sugar-producing countries are Hawaii, Louisiana, Mississippi and Cuba. Coffee producing countries are Guatemala, Argentina, Columbia, and El Salvador. The cotton producing states are Arkansas, Georgia, Nevada, Alabama, Texas, Louisiana and Oklahoma.

3. Marine

Based on FAO data in 2005, America is the fifth largest producer in the world’s fisheries sector after China, Peru, India and Indonesia. In Canada it is a producer of salmon and herring. Herring, sardines and mackerel are produced in Peru. Meanwhile, mackerel is also produced in Chile.

America’s climate

Countries in the Americas have different climates. This is because the American continent has four climates, namely polar climate, subtropical climate, tropical climate, and desert climate. The following is an explanation of the four which have been summarized from the Tata Ruang.id page.

1. Polar climate

Polar climates are characterized by longer periods of cold air. Meanwhile, the summer time period is shorter. The polar climate is in the northernmost and southernmost areas of the Americas, around the west coast of the island of Api-api.

2. Subtropical climate

The subtropical climate can be recognized by the presence of four seasons, namely winter, spring, summer and autumn. The country on the American continent which has 4 seasons is located in the southern part of the northernmost region.

3. Tropical climate

The tropical climate can be identified by high rainfall, humidity and long temperatures throughout the year. Countries on the American continent with tropical climates are located along the Equator, namely Central America and South America.

4. Desert Climate

Countries that have a desert climate usually experience sudden and very fast temperature changes and low rainfall. This climate usually occurs in mountainous areas.

America’s Landscape

The Americas are divided into three parts, namely North America, Central America and South America. All three have different characteristics of the landscape. The following is an explanation of the three which have been summarized from the Tata Ruang.id page.

1. North America

The area of ​​North America stretches from Alaska in the north to Mexico in the south. The climate in this northern part is colder than the rest of the Americas.

In North America there are famous mountains, namely the Rocky Mountains. The mountain range consists of the Cascade, the Western Sierra Madre mountains, and the Sierra Madre Nevada. The North American region also has a wide and famous valley, namely the Grand Canyon.

This northern American continent has a number of long rivers that form the border between Mexico and the United States. These rivers include the Mississippi River, Colodaro River, Missouri River, Arkansas River, and Rio Grande River.

2. Central America

Central America’s landscape is made up of mountains and plains up to 2,500 meters above sea level. The southern part of the Central American region is the canal that connects the Pacific Ocean with the Atlantic Ocean.

3. South America

The landscape of South America consists of mountains, plateaus, lowlands and rivers. South America has the Andes mountains which are the highest mountains on the American continent, which are as high as 6,959 meters above sea level.

In the southern part of the American continent also flows a river which is included in the longest and largest river, namely the Amazon river. The river flows into a number of tributaries covered by the Amazon jungle.

Inside the Amazon forest grows a variety of flora and fauna because it is in a tropical climate. For example bison, bears, alligators, pumas, jaguars, lizards, monkeys, snakes, and so on.

The Area of ​​Each ASEAN Country – The ASEAN Organization or the Association of Southeast Asian Nations is an organization consisting of 10 countries located in the Southeast Asian region. Previously, the ASEAN organization was first formed on August 8, 1967 with only 5 member countries and Indonesia was one of the founding countries. Representatives from the five ASEAN founding countries were Adam Malik from Indonesia, Tun Abdul Razak from Malaysia, Rajaratnam from Singapore, Thanat Khoman from Thailand, and Narciso Ramos from the Philippines.

In the meeting of the five countries, foreign minister representatives signed an agreement called the Bangkok Declaration. By signing the declaration, this ASEAN organization was officially established and accepted new members. Most ASEAN countries have a sea area with a total area of ​​around 5,060,100 square km and a land area of ​​around 4,817,000 km2. Based on its astronomical location, the entire territory of these ASEAN countries is located at 28º North Latitude – 11º South Latitude and 93º East Longitude – 141º East Longitude. So that the majority of countries have a tropical climate because of their location close to the equator.

The Area of ​​Each ASEAN Country

As we already understand, ASEAN is a regional organization that facilitates cooperation between countries in Southeast Asia. Below, we will discuss the area of ​​each ASEAN country and their full profile.

As mentioned above, this organization was formed on August 8, 1967 in Bangkok, Thailand, through the signing of the Bangkok Declaration. Indonesia is one of the founders of this organization of Southeast Asian countries along with the Philippines, Malaysia, Singapore and Thailand. Southeast Asia is divided into two groups, namely mainland Southeast Asia or ATD, which consists of the Indochina Peninsula and the Malacca Peninsula. Then Maritime Southeast Asia or ATM which consists of the Philippine Islands and the Archipelago namely Indonesia, Singapore, Malaysia, Timor Leste, and also Brunei Darussalam or better known as the Malay Archipelago.

On the official website of the Indonesian Ministry of Foreign Affairs or the Ministry of Foreign Affairs, it is stated that Timor Leste is geographically located in the Southeast Asian region which officially registered itself as a member of ASEAN in 2011. Regarding Timor Leste’s membership, it is still being discussed by the 10 ASEAN member countries.

History records that initially ASEAN was formed with the aim of fostering cooperation among member countries in order to accelerate economic growth, encourage peace, and also regional stability, and form cooperation in various fields of common interest. In subsequent developments, this organization made various significant agendas in the political field such as the Declaration of Peace, Freedom and Neutrality (ZOPFAN) which was signed in 1971.

Then in 1976, the five initial member countries of ASEAN also agreed on the Treaty of Amity and Cooperation in Southeast Asia (TAC) which became one of the foundations for ASEAN countries to live side by side in peace. Information regarding ASEAN countries and their statements can be obtained from the website of the ASEAN-Indonesia National Secretariat, each country has different characteristics. Following are some explanations regarding the profiles of ASEAN countries and also the area size of each ASEAN country.

1. Indonesian

Indonesia itself is located between two continents, namely the continent of Asia and the continent of Australia. This geographical position which is a cross point of the world economy greatly influences Indonesia’s trading activities. By examining its history. Indonesia had experienced the bitterness of Dutch and Japanese colonialism for more than 300 years.

After Japan lost to World War II, the Republic of Indonesia finally became an independent country on August 17, 1945. After 76 years of independence, Indonesia was led by President Joko Widodo. But as we know, this is not the first time Joko Widodo has served as head of state. After his term ended in 2019, Joko Widodo again won the general election held in the same year.

This republic with the form of a unitary state has the ideology of Pancasila. This is also a guideline for all citizens. Based on democracy, Indonesia has a presidential government system.

Capital: Jakarta
Population: 275.77 million
Religion: Islam, Protestant, Catholic, Hindu, Buddhist and Confucian
Language: Indonesian
Currency: Rupiah
Area: 1,904,569 square km
Head of state and head of government: President

2. Malaysian

As one of the five founding countries of ASEAN, this country has 13 states and 3 federal territories. After being separated from the British colony, Malaysia is now part of the Commonwealth. The country with the capital city of Kuala Lumpur has a national language, namely Malaysia with the Malaysian Ringgit currency.

Currently, the Malaysian government adheres to a parliamentary democracy with a constitutional monarchy system. Therefore, the king there acts as head of state, while the prime minister occupies the position of head of government. At the end of 2020, the country’s population reached 32.6 million people. Where the Malaysian population comes from various ethnic groups. More than 69 percent are dominated by bumiputera including Orang Asli, Sarawak, Sabah, and also indigenous Malays.

Capital: Kuala Lumpur
Population: 32,730,000 people
Religion: Islam, Buddhism, Christianity, Hinduism and traditional Chinese religion.
Languages: Malay, English, Chinese and Tamil
Currency: Ringgit (MYR)
Area: 329,847 sq km.
Head of state: King
Head of government: Prime minister

3. Thailand

Thailand has topography in the form of land surface that is crossed by rivers in the middle, highlands in the northeast, forests, mountains. and hills in the north, and there are still many hills in the south. The area that is the center of activity in this country is usually in the lowlands, the Chao Phraya River. Thailand itself is located on the Eurasian Plate, but close to the Indian Ocean. So that it has the potential to be hit by a tsunami and also an earthquake.

As we know, this country is nicknamed the White Elephant Country. Where Thailand is also an ASEAN country that has never experienced European colonialism. Directly bordering Laos and Cambodia, Thailand has a system of government in the form of a constitutional monarchy. This makes the head of state of Thailand a king. For state and government affairs. Thailand handed over the job to a Prime Minister.

Capital: Bangkok
Population: 70 million
Religion: Theravada Buddhism, Islam, Christianity and Hinduism.
Language: Thai
Currency: Baht (THB)
Area: 513,120 km2
Head of state: King
Head of government: Prime minister

4. Brunei Darussalam

This very small country only has an area of ​​about 5,765 square km. However, the people who live there have a fairly high standard of living, because this country is also one of the richest countries in Asia. For a long time, Brunei Darussalam has relied on oil and gas as the backbone of the country’s economy. Located in the northwestern part of Borneo Island in Kalimantan, Brunei is an Islamic Sultanate. The country with the capital city of Bandar Seri Begawan became independent in 1984 after being a British protectorate for a long time, namely since 1888.

The government system of Brunei Darussalam is in the form of an absolute monarchy. Where the current sultan and Prime Minister of Brunei Darussalam is Hassanal Bolkiah. The culture in this country is firmly rooted in Malay origins which are also reflected in the style of language, architecture, and customs. Therefore, the national language used in this country is Malay followed by English as a second language which is quite popular in this country. Brunei officially became a member of ASEAN in 1984. Where this country joined as a member of ASEAN after gaining its independence.

Capital: Bandar Seri Begawan
Population: 423,196 million
Religion: Islam, Christianity, Catholicism, Buddhism and animism
Language: Malay, English and Mandarin
Currency: Brunei dollar (BND)
Area: 5,765 square km
Head of state and head of government : Prime Minister

5. Vietnamese

Vietnam is one of three countries officially part of ASEAN. Where this country has actually stated that it wants to join ASEAN since 1922. In the end, in 1995, this country with the capital city of Hanoi followed in the footsteps of its friends in Southeast Asia to join ASEAN. The form of Vietnam is a communist republic system. However, with the existence of the Vietnamese Communist Party, it remains the most dominant political institution. The head of state for Vietnam is the president. The prime minister handles government affairs.

Then, regarding the country’s economy which is growing quite rapidly because it is supported by industries engaged in retail, manufacturing, agriculture, food, and also infrastructure. In addition, the tourism sector is one of the biggest contributors to Vietnam’s economy.

Capital: Hanoi
Population: 97,338,579 people.
Religion: Buddhism, Catholicism, Caodaism, Protestantism, Hoahaoism
Language: Vietnamese
Currency: Dong (VNB)
Area: 331,230.8 square km.
Head of state: President Head of government: Prime minister

6. Laos

On the 30th anniversary of ASEAN, Laos decided to join the countries in Southeast Asia in 1997. This country has territory in the heart of mainland Southeast Asia. Where Laos is a country with a population of around 7.169 million people. Replacing the kingdom of Laos, the Lao People’s Democratic Republic was established in December 1975. According to the UNDP website, Laos’ progress in poverty alleviation can be seen significantly over the past two decades. This is evidenced by UNDP data that the poverty rate fell by around 23 percent from 1992 to 2015.

Laos itself has abundant natural resources. A number of historical relics and natural beauty in Laos have made this country popular for foreign tourists.

Capital: Vientiane
Population: 7,275,560 people.
Religion: Buddhism, Satsana Phi, Islam, Christianity.
Language: Lao, French and English Currency: Kip (LAK)
Area: 237,955 sq km.
Head of state: King Head of government: Prime minister

7. Singapore

Besides Malaysia, Singapore is also one of the ASEAN countries that joined the Commonwealth after becoming independent from the United Kingdom. In addition, Singapore is also one of the pioneer countries for the formation of ASEAN. This island nation with a population of only 5.7 million people has a capital city which is also named Singapore. There are four official languages ​​in Singapore, namely English, Mandarin, Tamil and Malay.

The Parliamentary Republic is Singapore’s form of government. Where the head of state will be held by a president. The prime minister has the role of head of government in Singapore.

Capital: Singapore
Population: 5.8 million
Religion: Buddhism, Christianity, Islam, Taoism and Hinduism
Languages: English, Chinese, Mandarin, Malay and Tamil
Currency: Singapore Dollar (SGD)
Area: 721.5 km square
Head of state: President Head of government: Prime minister

8. Myanmar

Myanmar is the largest country in mainland Southeast Asia. This country decided to join ASEAN member countries in July 1997. Like Laos, Myanmar also joined on the 30th anniversary of ASEAN. This region of Myanmar is in the western part of mainland Southeast Asia. Currently, the population of Myanmar is 54.2 million. The capital city of Myanmar is Naypyitaw. Actually, the form of government of this country adheres to a republic system with a president as the head of state. However, currently Myanmar is under a military junta and until mid-2021 is still experiencing political turmoil.

Country name: Myanmar (Republic of the Union of Myanmar)
Head of state: President
Head of government: Prime Minister
Capital city: Nay Pyi Taw (Naypyidaw)
Independence day: January 4
Language: Burmese
Currency: Kyat (MMK)
Population: 52.89 million people (2016)
Total area: 676,578 square km.

9. Philippines

This archipelagic country which is formed from approximately 7,000 islands is also one of the pioneers in the formation of the ASEAN organization. The Philippines is located in the western Pacific Ocean, where this country is a country that has a population of more than 109 million people in 2019. For approximately 300 years, the Philippines was under Spanish colonialism.

Then in 1898, the Philippines succeeded in becoming independent from Spanish colonialism. However, the United States seized control of Spain in the Philippines through the Spanish-American War. This made the Philippines controlled by the US which was followed by the outbreak of the Philippine-American War that occurred in 1899 to 1902. This Spanish-American invasion had a lot of influence, especially on the religion, language, and style of government of the Philippines.

Capital: Manila
Population: 109.6 million
Religion: Protestant, Catholic, Islamic
Language: Filipino/Tagalog and English
Currency: Peso (PHP)
Area: 343,448 square km
Head of State and head of government: President

10. Cambodia

Cambodia was one of the last countries to join the ASEAN organization in 1999. This country is known as a garment exporter. Cambodia’s tourism sector is also relatively strong. This makes Cambodia one of the countries with quite rapid economic growth in Southeast Asia. Cambodia itself adheres to a constitutional monarchy system with a royal form of government. This system makes the king as the head of state and the government will be headed by the prime minister.

Capital: Phnom Penh
Population: 16,718,965 people.
Religion: Theravada Buddhism, Islam, and others.
Language: Khmer, French and English
Currency: Riel (KHR)
Area: 181,035 sq km
Head of state: King Head of government: Prime minister

This is an explanation of the area of ​​each ASEAN country and various interesting information regarding the 10 ASEAN countries. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about ASEAN countries, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Angklung Musical Instruments – Before discussing further about the angklung musical instrument, it is better, first of all, to read the facts related to angklung below:

Each angklung can produce one note or chord and several players must collaborate if they want to play a melody. Then, the black bamboo used to make angklung is harvested for two weeks a year, when the crickets “sing”. The bamboo must also be cut at least three segments above the ground to ensure the roots can continue to propagate.

Then, education related to angklung is passed on from generation to generation generally orally, and will increase if it is carried out in educational institutions. In terms of the game, players must collaborate and previously must work together, respect, discipline in togetherness, be responsible, concentrate, develop memory, and artistic feelings for each other.

Through this statement, have you felt the greatness of the angklung, the inventor, and the players? Through this article, we will learn the typical Indonesian angklung musical instrument, together!

About Angklung

Angklung is a musical instrument from Indonesia which consists of 2 to 4 bamboo tubes suspended in a bamboo frame. Bond using rattan rope. These tubes are carefully trimmed and cut by expert angklung craftsmen to produce certain tones.

Traditional angklung uses pentatonic scales. However, Indonesian musician Daeng Soetigna introduced the diatonic angklung in 1938. This angklung is also known as the padaeng angklung.

The angklung musical instrument is closely related to customs, cultural identity and art in Indonesia. This instrument is usually played during certain ceremonies, such as rice planting, harvesting, and circumcisions.

Angklung can be hung and arranged in rows to be played solo, or one angklung can be shared between groups and played by each player who is responsible for sounding one note in a pattern or melody.

Cultural Diplomacy Tools

In relation to the spread of culture, the practice of cultural programs between different countries can be a powerful tool to fight stereotypes and negative perceptions. Performances and the visual arts also have their own strengths.

In this way, art and music as a tool of cultural diplomacy with soft power is a form of ” social healing “, which is a peaceful way to heal “social ailments” that originate from a lack of communication and misunderstandings.

With this explanation, it can be understood that the development of Indonesian angklung can be explored and is suitable for cultural diplomacy purposes.

 

Sound Characteristics

The main thing related to the sound of the angklung instrument is the bamboo tube. We only need to shake the angklung to play it because our shaking will create a tone.

The bamboo tube is “hit” and produces sound when someone shakes the instrument. When the angklung is shaken continuously, the impression of the bamboo tube being hit will not quickly disappear. In angklung with a larger diameter or like other bamboo musical instruments where the tube is struck, the impression of “blow” will disappear as if the bamboo is being blown like a flute.

Another aspect that influences the character of this punch is also influenced by the bamboo itself. Unlike strong wood, bamboo is relatively light. The influence of this material is on sound resonance which usually affects the character of bamboo musical instruments. The sound produced will be shady, light, and beautiful even though sometimes the bamboo has a large diameter.

There are several technical principles for playing songs that are arranged and sung with the angklung musical instrument. For example, the rocking technique is often used to express the main melody of a song because of the unique characteristics of the angklung. In a musical performance, the characteristics of this instrument also depend on the form of the arrangement, the type of song, and so on.

Angklung cannot stand alone as a single musical instrument, mainly because it only produces one single note that is the same. Indeed, the Padaeng angklung has two tubes, but the tone is still the same. The difference is that one other tube produces a tone one octave higher.

Uniquely, in the accompaniment type angklung, there are three to four tubes that produce chords in one angklung.

When angklung is played in an ensemble or in a team, its characteristics are the same as bamboo plants which never stand alone and will always grow in groups. Beautiful and solid, right?

From Sundanese, Global

Our beloved country, Indonesia, does have various cultures, including regional musical instruments. One of them is the angklung, which is a traditional musical instrument that has been popular for a long time. Getting here, this art also makes the regional culture richer.

This one musical instrument is already worldwide and not only a regional wealth. Angklung has been recognized by UNESCO on the Representative List of the Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity as a World Cultural Heritage.

Another achievement from angklung to date is that it was recorded in the Guinness Book of World in 2011. Due to the joint angklung playing which was held in Washington, United States, this award was also given.

Interestingly, the angklung instrument at that time performed one of the songs belonging to the legendary singer Michael Jackson, namely “We Are The World” whose playing was led by the founder of Saung Angklung Udjo, Daeng Udjo.

History of Angklung

Before Indonesia recognized the influence of Hinduism around the 5th century AD, it is believed that angklung already existed. Jaap Kunst in Music in Java argues that angklung is also found in South Sumatra and Kalimantan, although it is a traditional West Javanese musical instrument.

It is noted that the history of the use of angklung in West Java itself began during the Sunda Kingdom, namely around the 12th to 16th centuries. The game of angklung in that era was performed for the sake of worshiping Nyai Sri Pohaci as a symbol of Dewi Sri, namely the Goddess of Fertility or the Goddess of Rice.

Apart from worship, the story recorded in the Sundanese Song also reveals that this instrument was played to boost the morale of the soldiers during war. Although its use is very different from today, the angklung is still used as a musical instrument for various performances.

For example, the angklung performance was performed by Daeng Soetigna, a national angklung figure, at the 1946 Linggarjati Negotiations after the proclamation. Currently, Daeng himself is known as the Father of Indonesian Angklung who succeeded in creating this instrument with a diatonic scale that can be played in harmony with other musical instruments.

The student, Udjo Ngalagena, also continued Daeng’s efforts to preserve the angklung. Udjo himself is known as the founder of a leading cultural arts tourist spot called Saung Angklung Udjo (SAU) in Bandung.

Udjo also promoted the widespread use of angklung in Indonesian music education. He founded Saung Angklung Udjo in 1966 as a center for learning and performing angklung.

Currently, SAU is operated by Udjo’s family and children who are still actively promoting angklung and various other arts, particularly from Sundanese.

Not only teaching music and dance classes to its students, the SAU center also hosts a daily “Bambu Sore” tour performance, which is home to a bamboo craft factory that makes high-quality bamboo souvenirs and angklung instruments.

Until the end of his life, Udjo was also very active in reaching out to villages and schools to spread angklung culture and finally received support for angklung education from the government.

 

How to Play Angklung

In playing the angklung, there are two basic principles, namely shaken or short hit , which in Sundanese is called “centok”. This principle is the same as pizzicato in the violin. When the angklung is shaken, the sound comes out in good quality when shaken quickly. However, the impression of the bamboo being hit will be more dominant if the angklung is shaken at a slow frequency.

This impression will be exacerbated if the team of angklung players has only a few members, around 10-12 players. As for this rocking technique, the nature of the angklung is not completely similar to that of a wind instrument. The hallmark of the sound of the angklung instrument is the combination of percussion instruments and wind instruments. These two characteristics are very important when playing angklung.

Here are the techniques for playing the angklung in more detail:

1. Strike / Kick Technique

As previously explained, this technique is performed by quickly pulling the base tube with the fingers into the palm of the hand. With this technique, the sound produced is only once.

2. Vibration/Kurulung technique

This technique is the most commonly used in playing the angklung. The trick, one hand holds the angklung frame while the other hand shakes the instrument. The angklung is shaken according to the desired tone until the tubes collide with each other and make a sound.

3. Tangkep Technique

Not much different from the kurulung technique, how to play the angklung with the tangkep technique is with one angklung tube held down with the finger. Its function, of course, is that the tube does not vibrate.

Types of Angklung

As a typical regional musical instrument that is widely spread in Indonesia, angklung has several types that need to be known. Following are the types:

1. Badeng Angklung

Previously, it should be noted that badeng is a type of art that emphasizes the musical aspect. Angklung is also the main musical instrument. Angklung badeng can be found in Sanding, Malangbong, Garut. Some of the songs contained in badeng art are Lailahaileloh, Ya’ti, Yautike, Kasreng, Solaloh, and Lilimbungan.

2. Angklung Gubrag

The name is indeed unique, like the character sound of something falling. This angklung can be found in Cipining Village, Cigudeg, Bogor. Angklung Gubrag itself is quite old. It is used to honor the Goddess of Rice in the activities of melak pare or planting rice, nunjal pare or transporting rice, and ngadiukeun or placing it in a barn.

3. Angklung Padaeng

This is the type of angklung introduced by Daeng Soetigna around 1938. This angklung uses diatonic tunings which are generally used to play international songs. So, this angklung can certainly be included in an ensemble with other international musical instruments as well.

4. Angklung Beans

Located in Baros, Arjasari, Bandung, beans are performing arts that are entertainment in nature. Angklung beans were originally used during agricultural events related to rice. However, at this time he began to switch functions as public entertainment.

5. Angklung Toel

Created by Kang Yayan Udjo from Saung Angklung Udjo in 2008, the toel angklung has a waist-high frame with several angklungs lined up upside down and covered with rubber. In playing it, players only need to “squeeze” the angklung and they will vibrate for a few moments because of the rubber there.

6. Angklung Sarinande

This angklung is the term for a padaeng angklung which only uses round tones without chromatic tones. Meanwhile, the basic note is C. One small unit of angklung sarinande contains 8 angklungs, from low to high to high. Meanwhile, the angklung sarinande plus contains 13 angklung, from low sole to high noodles.

7. Angklung Sri-Murni

Eko Mursito Budi’s idea was to create the Sri-pure angklung. This angklung itself was created specifically for the needs of the angklung robot. Sri-pure angklung uses two or more sound tubes with the same tone so that the tone that is issued is a pure or mono-tonal tone.

Angklung’s achievements

One of the facts about the Indonesian Angklung is its achievement. Even for the people of Indonesia, not many people know that angklung has been known on the world stage. One is in Europe. Here are some examples of angklung achievements, quoted from FactsofIndonesia.

The Angklung Choir Family (KPA) of SMAN 3 Bandung, one of the high school choir clubs, has made a breakthrough by holding Expand the Sound of Angklung (ESA). ESA itself is a music event where KPA has participated in three categories in European music festivals.

ESA has also been held and participated in four times, i.e. in 2002, 2004, 2008, and 2010. There have been many achievements on the list, for example:

• The 29th International Folk Festival in Gannat, France.
• The 19th International Folk Festival in Moerbeke-Waas, Belgium.
• Expand The Sound of Angklung 2002 also held two concerts in Heidelberg and Kiel, Germany.
• Aberdeen International Youth Festival (AIYF) in Aberdeen, Scotland. (This festival is the largest youth festival in the world that focuses on the development of young people’s music and theater).
• 36th International Festival of Mountain Folklore in Zakopane, Poland. (This is one of the oldest competitions on folk traditions. KPA3 was invited as the first participant from Indonesia. In this festival, KPA3 won 3 trophies).
• International Petras, Greece Norbanus Festival, 2008, in Norma, Italy.
• Festival of Rassegna, 2008, in Castiglione del Lago, Italy.
• International Society of Music Education International Conference, 2008, in Bologna, Italy.
• Maribor International Folkart Festival (June 29-July 3 2010).
• Summa Cum Laude International Youth Music Festival Vienna (3 July-8 July 2010) is organized by VIA MUSICA ( Vienna International Association for Music and Culture Exchange ) and provides a unique platform for choirs, bands, and the most talented youth orchestra in the world.
• International Folk Festival (Festival Internacional de Folklore) of Ciudad Real (13 July-20 July 2010) organized by the Association of Songs and Dances of Ciudad Real (Mazantini Group).
• International Folk Festival (Festival Folklórico Internacional) of Extremadura, Badajoz (21 July-29 July 2010).

 

Closing

The facts above successfully show how extraordinary the angklung is, one of Indonesia’s original musical instruments. As one of Indonesia’s cultural heritage, angklung has developed from just a traditional musical instrument that not many people know about to become the most famous traditional musical instrument from Indonesia.

Apart from the angklung musical instrument, of course there are still many traditional Indonesian musical instruments that are very worthy to be known. So, what Indonesian musical instruments have you played?

Sinaumed’s, you can broaden your knowledge regarding Indonesian musical instruments by reading books. In your steps, there’s nothing wrong with taking advantage of sinaumedia as the largest online bookstore in Indonesia, which is diligent in offering attractive promos to fill your book collection. The more you read, the more you know, the more you understand, and the #MoreWithReading.

Come on, improve the literacy culture of the Indonesian nation with sinaumedia, starting with you.

The Largest Continent on Earth’s Surface – Continents are the largest land masses on earth that have sizes from large and small. In one continent consists of various countries based on area. Hundreds of millions of years ago the earth had only one giant continent called Pangea . Due to the movement of the tectonic plates within the earth, changes and movements of the plates occur, thereby changing the continents of the future.

Experts estimate North America is moving away from the South American continent. Then there was a movement that made new continents on the surface of the earth. There are 7 of the largest continents on the surface of the earth which are the main continents on earth based on their surface area, namely the continents of Africa, North America, South America, Europe, Antarctica, Australia and Asia.

Geographers then identified continents. Not only land, continents are also counted from nearby related islands. For example, the island countries of Japan and Indonesia are included in the Asian continent. Meanwhile, Greenland and the islands in the Caribbean are included in the North American continent.

In general, continents are land masses connected to each other. Some people connect the continents of Europe and Asia to form a single continent of Eurasia. However, experts distinguish continents based on the plates beneath them. The continents of Europe and Africa have one mass, while the continent of Asia is marked by the Ural plate and mountains. These mountains separate the continents of Asia and Europe. Check out the following reviews about the largest continent on the surface of the earth.

The order of the largest continents on the surface of the Earth

1. Continent of Asia

Asia is the largest continent on earth’s surface bordered by the Ural Mountains and the Caucasus and the Arctic, Pacific and Indian Oceans. This continent covers 8.7% of the total surface area of ​​the earth and comprises 30% of its land area. With around 4.3 billion people, they make up 60% of the world’s human population today. Asia has a high growth rate in the modern era. For example, during the 20th century, Asia’s population nearly quadrupled.

The continents of Asia and Europe are continents that are connected by land and both form a giant continent known as Eurasia. The boundaries between Asia and Europe are so blurred that countries like Turkey can sometimes be included in both Asia and Europe. Some of the natural landscapes that are often used to separate the two continents are the Dardanelles Strait, Marmara Sea, Bosphorus Strait, Black Sea, Caucasus Mountains, Caspian Sea, Ural River (or Emba River), and the Ural Mountains to Novaya Zemlya. Apart from being directly adjacent to the European Continent, the Asian Continent also has a direct border with the African Continent which has land borders and meets around the Suez Canal.

Given its size and diversity, the Asian concept – the name goes back to classical times – may actually have more to do with human geography than physical geography. Asia is extremely diverse and within each of its regions there are well-defined ethnic groups, cultures, environments, economies, historical relationships, and systems of government.

2. Continent of Africa

Africa is the second largest continent on earth’s surface and the second most populous after Asia. With an area of ​​30,224,050 km² including adjacent islands, Africa covers 20.3% of the total land area of ​​the earth. With 800 million people in 54 countries, this continent is home to one seventh of the world’s population. With a population of 1.3 billion people as of 2018, this continent accounts for around 16% of the world’s human population.

The continent is surrounded by the Mediterranean Sea to the north, the Isthmus of Suez and the Red Sea to the northeast, the Indian Ocean to the southeast and the Atlantic Ocean to the west. This continent includes Madagascar and various islands. The continent also contains 54 fully recognized sovereign states, nine territories and two de facto independent states with limited or no recognition . The majority of the continent and its countries are in the Northern Hemisphere, with most and most of the countries in the Southern Hemisphere.

Africa’s average population is the youngest of all continents; the median age in 2012 was 19.7, when the worldwide average was 30.4. Algeria is the largest country in Africa by area, and Nigeria is the country with the largest population.

Africa, especially central East Africa, is widely accepted as the origin of humans and the clade Hominidae (great apes), as evidenced by the discoveries of the earliest hominids and their and later ancestors dating back to about 7 million years, including Sahelanthropus tchadensis, Australopithecus africanus, A. afarensis, Homo erectus, H. habilis and H. ergaster – The earliest Homo sapiens (modern humans), discovered in Ethiopia, around 200,000 years ago.

Africa straddles the equator and includes many climatic regions; it is the only continent that extends from the northern temperate zone to the southern temperate zone. Africa hosts a great diversity of human ethnicities, cultures, and languages. At the end of the 19th century, European countries colonized almost all of Africa; most countries in Africa emerged from the decolonization process in the 20th century. African countries work together through the formation of the African Union, which is headquartered in Addis Ababa.

3. Continent of North America

North America is the third straight continent in the northern hemisphere. To the north it is bordered by the Arctic Ocean and to the east by the North Atlantic Ocean, while to the south by the Caribbean Sea and to the west by the North Pacific Ocean. This continent covers an area of ​​24,500,000 km² or about 4.8% of the earth’s surface.

In 2016, the population is estimated at more than 579 million people. This continent is the third largest continent by area, after Asia and Africa, and is ranked fourth by population, after Asia, Africa and Europe. Both North and South America are named after Amerigo Vespucci, who was the first European to come up with the idea that America was not the same as the East Indies. He was the first European to discover the New World.

The only land connection from North America to South America is the Isthmus of Panama. (For geopolitical reasons, all of Panama – including the eastern section of the Panama Canal is often considered part of North America as well). However, according to some scholars, North America did not start on the isthmus of Panama, but on the isthmus of Tehuantepec, with the blocking area considered central America and resting on the Caribbean plate.

Most people tend to think of Central America as North America because they think that this area is too small to be a continent on its own. Greenland, although it is part of North America geographically and on the same tectonic plate (the North American plate), is not considered part of this continent politically.

4. Continent of South America

South America is the fourth largest continent on the surface of the earth, located between the Pacific Ocean and the Atlantic Ocean, which is connected to North America via the Isthmus of Panama. The continent is crossed by the equator, and most of the continent’s plains are in the Southern Hemisphere.

The western part of the South American continent consists of the Andes mountain range from north to south, while the eastern part of the continent is a lowland, mostly the Amazon river basin, with dense tropical forests.

Allegedly, South America was first inhabited by humans who migrated from Asia through the Bering Isthmus (now the Bering Strait) to North America and south to South America. Another conjecture regarding this migration to South America is from the southern part of the Pacific Ocean via the islands in Oceania.

The area of ​​South America is ranked fourth after Asia, Africa and North America, while the population is ranked fifth after Asia, Africa, Europe and North America.

5. Continent of Antarctica

Antarctica is the fifth largest continent on the surface of the earth which includes the South Pole of the Earth, almost entirely located in the Antarctic Circle and surrounded by the Pacific Ocean, Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean. With an area of ​​14.0 million km ² (5.4 million sq mi), Antarctica is the fifth largest continent after Eurasia, Africa, North America, and South America. In comparison, Antarctica is almost twice the size of Australia. About 98% of Antarctica is covered by ice which averages a minimum thickness of 1.9 km, the entire land area extends but in the north reaches the Antarctic Peninsula.

Antarctica has the lowest average humidity, the lowest average temperature of all the continents on earth, the driest continent, the windiest continent, and has the highest average elevation of all the continents. Antarctica is considered a desert, with only 200 mm (8 inches) of rain along the coast and much less inland.

The coldest place on earth is mostly covered in ice all year round reaching -89 °C (-129 °F). The population is the smallest far below the others (generally inhabited by researchers and scientists for a certain time only) around 1000 to 5000 people. Only organisms that can live and adapt to cold temperatures include various types of fungi, algae, bacteria, protists, plants, besides animals such as penguins, nematodes, seals. There is only tundra vegetation.

Legends and speculation about a Terra Australis (Southern Land) date back to ancient times, the first generally accepted discovery of the continent occurring in 1820 and the first recorded landing in 1821. However, a map made by Admiral Piri Reis in 1513 shows a southern continent which thought to be the coast of Antarctica. Antarctica is a free zone, although until now there are still several countries in the world that claim ownership of the territory on the Antarctic continent.

6. Continental Europe

Europe is geologically and geographically the largest peninsula or subcontinent on the surface of the earth’s sixth (jazirah). Separation as a continent is more due to cultural differences. It is bounded to the north by the Arctic Ocean, to the west by the Atlantic Ocean, and to the south by the Mediterranean Sea. The eastern boundary is still unclear because the separation of the continent itself was initiated by cultural factors. The boundaries that are often used as the boundaries of the continents of Europe and Asia are the Ural Mountains and the Caspian Sea.

This continent is the second smallest continent after Australia with an area of ​​10,180,000 km², whereas when calculated from its population, this continent is in third place with the most population (below Asia and Africa) with 742.5 million people in 2013 or equal to one eighth of the world’s population. The European continent is astronomically located at 35° N – 71° N and 11° West – 66° E.

Europe has a long cultural and economic history, starting with the Palaeolithic. The recent discovery at Monte Poggiolo, Italy, of thousands of handcrafted rocks that are carbon dated as far back as 800,000 years ago, provides important evidence.

The beginnings of Western democratic and individualistic culture are often attributed to Ancient Greece, although other influences, such as Christianity, also contributed to the spread of concepts such as egalitarianism and universality of law.

The Roman Empire divided the continent along the Rhine and Danube for several centuries. Following the decline of the Roman Empire, Europe experienced the rise of what is known as the Age of Migration. The period is known as the Dark Ages right up to the Renaissance. During this time, isolated monastic communities in Ireland, and elsewhere guarded, and carefully amassed the written knowledge that had previously been accumulated. The Renaissance and New Monarchies marked the beginning of a period of discovery, exploration and increase in scientific knowledge.

In the 15th century, Portugal opened the beginnings of discovery followed by Spain. Later France, the Netherlands and the United Kingdom joined in building large colonial empires with vast territories in Africa, America and Asia.

After a period of discovery, democratic concepts began to gain influence in Europe. Struggles for independence arose, especially in France during the period known as the French Revolution. This caused great upheaval in Europe as these revolutionary ideas spread across the continent.

The rise of democracy caused increasing tensions in Europe in addition to the tensions that were already there because of competition in the New World. Of these, the most famous conflict was when Napoleon Bonaparte seized power, and created the French Empire which fell shortly thereafter. After these events, Europe has slowly stabilized, but the remnants of the old period’s concepts have begun to crumble.

The Industrial Revolution began in Great Britain at the end of the 18th century, which led to a shift away from agriculture, increasing public prosperity and population growth. Many countries in Europe found their present form post-World War II. Since the end of World War II until the Cold War, Europe was divided into two main political and economic blocs: the communist countries in Eastern Europe, and the capitalist countries in Western Europe. Around 1989, the East Bloc broke apart with the fall of the Berlin Wall.

Geographically, Europe is part of the larger landmass known as Eurasia. The continent begins with the Ural Mountains in Russia, which defines Europe’s eastern boundary with Asia. The southeastern boundary with Asia is not clearly defined. Most common are the Ural River or the Emba River. The boundary continues with the Caspian Sea, and then the Caucasus Mountains, or the Kuma-Manych Depression, and all the way to the Black Sea; The Bosporus, Sea of ​​Marmara and Dardanelles end the boundaries of Asia. The Mediterranean Sea to the south separates Europe from Africa. The boundary on the west is the Atlantic Ocean.

7. Continental Australia

The Australian continent is located in the eastern and southern parts of Indonesia. With an area of ​​8,945,000 km ² . Discovered by James Cook from England in 1770. Therefore, until now Australia is still included in the British Commonwealth.

In geology, Australia (also called Australia-New Guinea, Sahul, Meganesia, Greater Australia, Australasia, or Australinea) is a continent consisting of (in size groups) the Australian mainland, New Guinea, Tasmania, and several nearby islands, which are located on the same continental shelf. The area is separated by seas beyond the continental shelf — the Arafuru Sea and the Torres Strait between Australia, New Guinea and the Bass Strait between mainland Australia and Tasmania.

This land was once united, but because of the ice that existed during the last glacial period melted, and submerged parts of the lowlands. The land that did not sink made the land that is now the island of New Guinea separated from the mainland of the Australian continent.

• Acquaintance with the Inventor of Algebra and Algorithms
• Get to know the history, heyday, and the founder of the Umayyad dynasty
• Understanding Mythology: Origins, Types, and Benefits of Studying It
• Who Founded the Abbasid Daula? This is short profile
• Who Discovered America? This is the historical explanation

The highest currency in the world – Currency is a unit of price as a legal payment [in every country. Each value is also different, so there are currencies from the lowest to the highest in the world. The rating is influenced by many factors, one of which is the exchange rate.

Well, Sinaumed’s must have known several currencies in the world. However, does Sinaumed’s really understand what the meaning, history and function of the currency itself is? If not, let’s look at the following information.

Definition of Currency

Currency as a means of payment and to carry out economic transactions in a country. The value also varies from one country to another. The difference between the value of a country’s currency and other countries is called the exchange rate.

Then, the term currency appreciation is an event if there is an increase in the value of the country’s own currency against the value of foreign currency. On the contrary, currency devaluation is an event when there is a decrease in the value of one’s own currency when compared to the value of foreign currency.

As for overseeing circulation as well as being the main producer of currency is the task of the central bank or financial authority of a country. As is the case in Indonesia, Bank Indonesia is the one who supervises currency circulation.

Definition of Currency According to Experts

Below will be explained further about the meaning of currency according to experts, including:

1. Cashmere

According to Kasmir, money is something that is generally accepted as a means of payment in a certain area or as a means of paying debts and purchasing goods and services.

2. Veithzal

Veithzal explained that money is an object that can be exchanged for other objects, as a calculating tool, a means of storing wealth and used to pay debts in the future.

3. Albert Geilord Hart

Albert Geilord Hart defines money as wealth that can be used to pay off a certain amount of debt at a time.

4. AC Pigou

According to AC Pigou, money is anything that is commonly used as a medium of exchange.

5. Denis Holmes Robertson

Denis Holme Robertson argues that money is anything that is commonly accepted in payment for goods and services.

History of Currency

Then how can that currency be used as legal tender like now, Sinaumed’s? Here’s an explanation.

History of Indonesian Currency

The legal currency in Indonesia is Rupiah. In fact, the Indonesian Rupiah is a sign of state sovereignty that all Indonesian citizens must respect and be proud of. The law that regulates currency is Law Number 7 of 2011.

The history of Indonesian currency can be traced back to the pre-independence and colonial times of the Windmill country where the Dutch guilder was the currency used in Indonesia at that time. Entering 1942 and the Japanese occupation, the type of military currency or gun pyo became a transaction tool along with guilders.

Indonesian independence and the defeat of Japan restored the position of the Netherlands along with the allies. In addition, the currency from Nippon was withdrawn and replaced with Netherlands Indies Civil Administration (NICA) money. In 1945, Indonesia banned the use of the NICA type of currency.

In 1946, the first currency issued by Indonesia was the Oeang Republik Indonesia (ORI), and was only valid until January 1950 with the currency of the United Republic of Indonesia (RIS) instead. Together with the shortness of the RIS government and the return of the NKRI form, the type of currency also stopped being used in August 1950.

With the opening of the country’s economy and the influence of global financial dynamics, policies were put in place to attract too much money in circulation in Indonesia. In 1953, Bank Indonesia replaced De Javasche Bank and issued the Rupiah currency.

History of world currencies

World history, especially in currency, is related to the development of human civilization. In ancient times, currency was unnecessary because the world’s population needed abundant natural resources.

When natural resources are running low and the human population is increasing, people must meet their daily needs by exchanging goods or bartering.

The progress of the times has brought people to make a medium of exchange even though it is not yet in the form of currency. When humans began to be able to learn letters and writing, currency was found as a transaction tool.

Currency Function

In general, the function of currency is as a medium of exchange. The following are currency functions, including:

Exchange Tool

As a medium of exchange, money functions to buy goods or services offered. In ancient times, people exchanged an item for another item that had the same value.

However, in this modern era the exchange of goods or services is done with money. For example, a clothing seller receives money for the purchase of merchandise. The merchant receives the money and the buyer gets the clothes. So, the function of money as a medium of exchange that exchanges goods or services for money.

Count Unit

The unit of account means that money is used to show the value or price of goods and services traded. Without a unit of account, humans will find it difficult to determine the price of goods and services.

For example, a tie costs Rp. 10,000 in a store and a shirt costs Rp. 40,000. If someone is going to buy both, he has to pay Rp. 50,000. So, the function of money as a unit of account that determines the price of goods and services traded.

Wealth Storage Tool

As a means of storing wealth, money functions as part of one’s wealth. Money can be deposited in cash or in a bank account. For example, money to make sudden trips out of town, rent lodging and to pay for educational needs.

So, the function of money is as a means of storing wealth to save money for emergency purposes and as savings for the future.

Debt Installment Standards

Debt installment standards mean that money is used to pay off debts to various parties. People use money to pay off debts in cash or installments/credit.

Factors Affecting Currency Exchange Rates

The currency exchange rate is the meaning of the exchange rate. This rate can experience ups and downs every day. Then, what can affect the change in value? Here’s the explanation:

High Interest Rates

Related to inflation, interest rates will be raised by the government to attract investment from investors when inflation occurs. That way, the value of the currency will stabilize again.

Political and Economic Conditions

Countries that have stable political and economic conditions will be more convincing in the eyes of investors.

Low Inflation

A country’s currency exchange rate will be high when the country’s civilization is prosperous and the inflation rate is low.

Public Debt

Countries with high debt will of course be assessed as weaker by investors, thus having a negative impact on currency exchange rates.

Balance of trade

Export-import activities also affect currency exchange rates. If a country experiences an increase in exports, the demand for domestic currency increases, so that the domestic exchange rate strengthens.

Conversely, if a country experiences an increase in imports, the demand for the partner country’s currency will increase and cause the domestic exchange rate to weaken.

Government policy

This is related to the prosperity of the country based on policies by the government which then becomes the basis for investor interest and the strength of the country’s currency.

List of Lowest and Highest Currencies in the World

If currency is a transaction tool with different exchange rates, then what are the lowest and highest currencies in the world? Let’s look at the following explanation:

Venezuelan Sovereign Bolivar (VES)

The lowest currency in the world is the Venezuelan Sovereign Bolivar (VES), which belongs to the Venezuelan state. The country that has the lowest inflation rate in the world, with the lowest value of 1 USD equivalent to 1,552,540 VES.

Iranian Iranian (IRR)

Iranial Iran has an exchange rate of 1 USD equal to 41.908 IRR. The country that ranks second in the lowest currency in the world has a rapid black market development due to the Iranian government’s policy of limiting access to foreign currency for its citizens.

Vietnamese Dong (VND)

The Vietnamese Dong (VND) is the country with the next lowest currency in the world. This is because the economy is dependent on agriculture and has not been centralized in a market economy. The exchange rate of 1 USD to Vietnamese Dong is 23,002 VND.

Omani riyals (OMR)

The currency in the third highest ranking in the world is the Riyal belonging to the Middle Eastern country, Oman. Its strength is based on the country’s economy which relies on its abundant natural resources. 1 Omani riyal is equivalent to 2.6 US dollars.

Bahraini Dinar (BHR)

The Bahraini Dinar is the second country with the highest currency value in the world. 1 BHR is equal to 2.65 US dollars. The strong economy and high incomes from the energy and gas sector contribute to the currency’s high value.

Kuwaiti Dinar (KWD)

The highest currency value in the world is the Kuwaiti Dinar. A stable economy and high demand for oil supplies from this country are the reasons for the strength of the Kuwaiti exchange rate. 1 KWD is equivalent to 3.32 US Dollars.

Types of Currency

Examples of currencies are the rupiah in Indonesia (IDR), the US dollar in the United States (USD), the Euro in the Eurozone (EUR) and the yen in Japan (JPY). There are a total of 180 currencies currently around the world. They are recognized as legal tender or legal tender by the United Nations (UN).

There are several terms and currency classifications, the following are:

Reserve Currency ( Reserve Currency )

The central bank holds it as foreign exchange reserves because of its relatively stable value and it is widely used in international trade. The US Dollar and Euro dominate, around 60% and 20% of global reserve currencies, respectively. Next there are Japanese yen, pound sterling, French franc, Chinese renminbi, Canadian dollar, Australian dollar and Swiss franc.

Hard Currency _

This currency has relatively stable purchasing power against other currencies from time to time. They come from countries with strong and stable economies and politics, including in terms of economic growth and inflation rates.

This hard currency is a means of payment and is widely used in international transactions. In addition, it also functions as a reliable store of value, so it is used as a foreign exchange reserve.

Another term for this currency is a strong currency or safe haven currency . Examples of hard currencies are the United States dollar, Euro, Swiss franc, British pound and Japanese yen.

Soft Currency _

This term is often referred to as a weak currency which refers to the currency of countries that have an unstable economy and politics. As a result its value fluctuates and depreciates significantly. Therefore, market participants tend to avoid.

Effect of Inflation

The main factor affecting the real value of money is inflation, in which the two have an inverse relationship. When inflation is high, the real value of money will fall. Prices of goods generally increase significantly, so that we get less goods for the same amount of money.

For example, when we buy a product for IDR 100. If the price goes up to IDR 200, we can only buy half of it. We call a condition when inflation increases significantly as hyperinflation which creates instability in the economy.

Likewise, negative deflation/inflation also endangers the economy. When the real value of money increases, we get more goods for the same amount. However, that hurts the business as they earn lower revenues and profits and assume a fixed sales volume. In addition, deflation can also increase the real value of debt ( debt deflation ).

Factors Affecting Currency Exchange Rates

There are several factors that affect currency exchange rates, including the following:

1. Exchange Rate System

If the government adopts a fixed exchange rate system, the exchange rate does not move to adjust supply and demand in the foreign exchange market. Conversely, under a free-floating system, exchange rates fluctuate according to demand and supply conditions.

2. Trade Balance

Exports drive the appreciation of the domestic currency by increasing the demand for it. So, its purchasing power strengthens relative to partner country currencies. Conversely, imports cause the depreciation of the domestic currency because it increases the demand for and purchasing power of the partner country’s currency.

Overall, the trade surplus leads to an appreciation of the domestic currency as exports exceed imports. Meanwhile, the trade deficit results in depreciation because imports are higher than exports or ceteris paribus .

3. Interest Rate Spreads

If the domestic interest rate is higher than the international interest rate, it attracts foreign capital inflows and increases the demand for domestic currency which leads to appreciation.

Likewise, a narrower interest rate spread due to an increase in domestic interest rates will also make the return on loan capital in the domestic market more attractive, thereby encouraging inflows.

4. Inflation Rate

Inflation represents an increase in the price of goods and services in general, including export products. High inflation makes domestic products more expensive and less competitive on international markets, reducing demand by overseas buyers. So, the results obtained, exports decreased and resulted in the domestic currency depreciating against the partner country’s currency or ceteris paribus .

5. Economic Policy

This policy is like an expansionary monetary policy that can increase the amount of currency circulating in the domestic economy. This leads to inflation and a decrease in the purchasing power of the domestic currency.

6. Speculation Activity

Speculation can affect exchange rates by buying or selling certain currencies, causing changes in demand and supply in the market. They usually take short-term profits by trading several undervalued or overvalued currencies .

That is the explanation of the highest currency in the world . So which books aren’t on the bookshelf right now, Sinaumed’s? If Sinaumed’s is still confused, still needs references related to currency, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we will always provide the best and most complete information for Sinaumed’s and get #MoreWithReading information with sinaumedia. I hope this article inspires you!

Author: Rosyda Nur Fauziyah

Also read:

sinaumedia Literacy – Learning is sometimes a boring activity for some people, especially learning with what they don’t like and are not interested in.

This is exacerbated by the purpose of studying this, sometimes many school lessons will not actually be used to plunge into life or the world of work. That makes school students less enthusiastic about learning something that is very far from their goals. Then how can you be enthusiastic about learning so that you can get good grades in Sinaumed’s tests and tests.

Moreover, did you know that the human brain has the potential to memorize information of 2.5 Pentabytes or the equivalent of thirty million hours of playing YouTube videos? However, so that the brain’s potential can be used effectively, there are some tips that you can apply. Here are some of them, effective ways of learning that have been proven by scientific studies by Neuroscience experts. Check these out Sinaumed’s!

The 14 Most Powerful Learning Strategies According to Neuroscience Experts

1. SPACED REPETITIONS

To make your memory skills stronger, repeat what you learn often. Experts prove that it is the synapses (the meeting point between the terminals of one neuron and another neuron) that makes memory ability increase. So that we will be more productive to study regularly.

In addition, make a summary of your learning outcomes. You can write down the main points. It can be points from learning materials, such as formulas. This will make it easier for you to understand the essence of learning. Because when you make a summary, you are actually repeating material that has been obtained before.

This repetition helps you recall notes more effectively. Apart from being in the form of a summary, you can also make a MindMap or Concept Map. According to research results, our brain actually tends to think circularly, holistically, and creatively.

So, if it is forced and put in notes and information in a linear manner, it is natural for the brain to have difficulty accepting it. Using a mindmap allegedly can increase memory up to 120% and can increase creativity. Using a mindmap can also shorten notes more effectively so that they seem a bit Sinaumed’s.

2. FIND YOUR OWN LEARNING STYLE

You must have your own learning style that makes you comfortable. In terms of your productive study time, for example, it varies from person to person. There are people who are more productive when they move in the morning or even at dawn. Some people feel more productive at night or in the middle of the night when people are asleep.

But there are also those who study when the time is urgent. With this way of learning, you also have to outsmart it by using study tips when you are stuck, which are powerful with abilities. In addition, there are those who are comfortable studying with friends, and there are also those who are comfortable studying alone in lonely conditions. Find out which one is best for you Sinaumed’s.

 

3. STUDY IN DIFFERENT LOCATIONS

You can memorize much more quickly and effectively in an environment richer in visual diversity. Two groups of students were studied to memorize random words, one group studied by moving around the classroom, while the other group only studied in a room without moving around. The group that learned by moving could remember the random words 40% better than the other group that didn’t move. So, you can also apply this moving technique to make your memory process better, Sinaumed’s.

 

4. GROUP LEARNING

Group study will make you have references to exchange opinions and actively communicate in learning, this method is very effective for those of you who find it difficult to study alone. Studying together will also allow you to give quizzes and ask questions and browse the Internet with friends to study material that you don’t understand.

 

5. POMODORO TECHNIQUE

Apply the Podomoro technique, by setting a timer for 25 minutes for study time. Then when the timer goes off, use 5 minutes to break or rest so that the mind becomes calmer and relaxed. Giving the pause can also give you motivation so you don’t get bored and bored. After 5 minutes of rest, set the timer again for another 25 minutes and start studying again and so on. Here’s how to apply the Podomoro technique in your study sessions, Sinaumed’s:

• Prepare Study Materials or Assignments: Trying to practice the Pomodoro learning technique, the first thing you have to do is choose the tasks or things you want to learn. Choose assignments or lessons based on their priority scale. You can choose from assignments that will be submitted immediately to tasks that can be completed several weeks or months back.
• Set a Timer: Do your assignments or reading material with focus until the timer goes off. Those 25 minutes are called the “work window.” Because you have to focus, you are not even allowed to glance at your cell phone even if only to see if there is a message or not.
• Short Break: After the timer sounds, even though your work is not completely finished, you must stop. Take three to five minutes to rest. During this rest interval, you can look at your cellphone, go to the restroom to relieve yourself, stretch, or even eat a snack to increase your energy.
• Start Studying or Doing Assignment Again After the rest interval, start the second “work window.” The rules are the same, that is, for 25 minutes you can only focus on work. Repeat this step for Sinaumed’s.

 

6. ALWAYS ACHIEVE THE HARDEST THINGS FIRST

Finishing the difficult things first each day is the next tip. When you have completed the more difficult things, you will automatically feel better and more confident that day. Apart from that, you will be motivated to complete other relatively easier things afterwards.

 

7. SERIOUS BUT FUN

A modern science study says that learning in a fun or fun way will speed up your understanding and remembering things.

Therefore, positive energy plays an important role in your learning process in Sinaumed’s. It can be done with your closest friends, avoid the speeding system overnight, also create conducive learning conditions. In addition, don’t forget to practice, for example for science subject matter.

You can learn material related to plants, animals, and others while practicing directly. That way, you can better understand the material being studied and not make the atmosphere feel boring quickly. Research to prove theories can also be an alternative to make your learning activities more enjoyable, Sinaumed’s.

 

8. LEARN WITH INTERVAL

To be able to remember something for a long time, repeat your studies periodically or at intervals. For example, when you memorize a vocabulary in a dictionary, the most effective study is to review the words within 1 or 2 days or a week after you memorize them. This is much better and more effective than repeating it every day.

9. 30% READ, 70% REPEAT

If you have 1 hour to prepare a presentation or speech. Spend 20 minutes reading and learning. Then use 40 minutes to practice it.

So, use 2/3 of your time to repeat and practice it. While 1/3 of the time to understand the material. Some people are wrong in learning on this matter. Often a person even memorizes the material instead of understanding it.

In fact, simply memorizing lessons will only be effective for exams with a short period of time. In the long run, memorized knowledge will only be easy to forget and will not leave any benefit. Besides that, don’t hesitate to ask questions if we don’t understand something or experience a deadlock in a science.

You study because you don’t understand, so if you have trouble, don’t hesitate to always ask. Ask your friends, studying together or discussing can also make learning activities more fun.

 

10. DO THE SELF-TEST

Create a comfortable learning atmosphere so you can stay focused on studying. Right after studying it, try to do a quick test for yourself on the material. Not a difficult and long test, just an instant test that represents your subject matter whether you have more than enough or not, Sinaumed’s. Use question books, or question applications that will make it easier for you to review your abilities.

 

11. FOCUS

If you are a person who likes to procrastinate when studying, for example browsing on a smartphone or playing social media. Learn to be willing to turn off or silence all electronic devices that can interfere with your study time. If necessary, go to the library because the atmosphere is conducive and tends to be quieter.

To increase focus also exercise regularly. Remember the saying, in a healthy body there is a strong mind and soul, and don’t ignore the importance of consuming Sinaumed’s nutritious food, because research has shown that adequate nutrition will make you smarter and improve your focus. Some foods that will increase focus:

• Avocados, the monounsaturated fats and antioxidants in avocados help optimize circulation which contributes to better blood flow to the brain, which then becomes the fuel your brain needs to think Sinaumed’s
• Blueberries, as the number 1 fruit in a row of the healthiest fruit. This is because this fruit contains polyphenols, including flavonoid pigments called anthocyanins. Consuming it at least once a week can maximize cognitive function as well as protect the brain from various risks of dangerous diseases such as Alzheimer’s and dementia.
• Green vegetables, because they will keep the sharpness of the brain because they contain high folic acid. Expand the consumption such as spinach, parsley, and broccoli Sinaumed’s.
• Egg yolk, as the most useful part for the brain. A recent study found that eating eggs improves verbal fluency and frontal lobe function which is an area of ​​the brain that helps with problem solving, spontaneity, memory, language, initiation, judgment, impulse control and social behavior. The main nutritional compound in eggs, choline, is also very important for optimal brain function which is related to memory.

 

12. DON’T FORCE YOURSELF TOO MUCH

Having clear goals helps you stay focused and consistent throughout the learning process. But when you’re not in the mood, do something that can bring your mood back.

Relax for example which will make the mind fresh again, take a short nap which will make the body rested, take a warm bath, Study with Biscuits and Hot Tea Snacks, Listen to the Radio and Watch TV for a while to increase ideas and creativity, Read Motivational Certia books and the like which will increase your confidence.

To reduce boredom, try setting your goals or targets. For example, suppose your goal of studying is to enter a well-known university in Indonesia, which then requires you to have qualified grades. Setting goals can be a motivator if you start to feel like you’re losing interest in studying Sinaumed’s.

 

13. EXERCISE, MEDITATION, SOCIALIZE

There are several activities that have been proven to develop your brain’s abilities such as exercising, regular meditation, as well as discussing with your friends. These things aim to stimulate the formation of new neurons in the brain. Do simple exercises such as push ups, sit ups, jogging, cycling, lifting weights or as simple as going up and down the Sinaumed’s stairs. For Meditation, for those of you who are beginners you can do:

• Wear comfortable clothes for meditation. Don’t let anything distract you from meditating. Choose clothes that you usually wear to exercise or just use play clothes that are comfortable to use.
• Because it’s still in the early stages, it’s best to do meditation in a short time, about 2 to 5 minutes. Clear your mind.
• Sit in a comfortable position because comfort is a priority in meditation. That’s why you must find the best position. Traditionally, meditation is practiced sitting on a cushion in the lotus or half lotus position. Use a yoga mat that has a little padding so that it is more comfortable to sit on. Meditation can actually be done also by sitting, standing, lying down, even walking. For beginners it is recommended to do a sitting position, because the mind has not been trained. With the correct and comfortable sitting position, you can start to get used to it and then feel the benefits.
• Try to find a place that is free of distractions so you don’t get distracted easily. Outdoors is a good alternative, because apart from being free of internal distractions (TV, sounds and activities of householders), being outside means you will meditate while breathing fresher air. The home page can be tried as a starter for Sinaumed’s.

14. ENOUGH REST

Adequate sleep is vital in making it easier for our brains to store information. Based on a study conducted by Harvard University, it was shown that students who had enough rest at night could remember lesson material by 35% better than students who studied in the morning and took tests at night without sleeping in between.

Research launched in London in 1998 also revealed that adequate sleep will maximize brain development. The reason is, sleep activity is a stimulus for the process of brain growth and development, it’s not surprising that sleep activity affects intelligence, especially since 75 percent of growth hormone is produced when you’re asleep, you know, Sinaumed’s. Everyone has different sleep needs, depending on age. Lifestyle and health greatly affect a person’s sleep needs. The following is sufficient sleep duration by age category:

• School-age children (6-13 years): 9-11 hours per day
• Teens (14-17): 8-10 hours per day
• Young adults (18-25 years): 7-9 hours per day
• Adults (26-64): 7-9 hours per day
• Older adults (over 65 years): 7-8 hours per day

So, do you know how to study effectively? now all you have to do is apply it in your daily life Sinaumed’s. Hopefully this information is useful, cheers!

Source: from various sources

Termination and Sample Letter – What does Sinaumed’s know about layoffs? For a worker the term layoffs may be an unpleasant thing, but in some conditions the company also needs to lay off employees to keep the company running stable. In the world of work, the relationship between employers and workers must run well, including when the employment relationship must be completed or ended. 

There are rules and ethics that every company needs to know, including workers also need to understand this. Please, Sinaumed’s, refer to this article to obtain information about Termination of Employment and examples of correct letters:  

Get to Know What Termination of Employment (PHK) Is

Termination of Employment (PHK) is a form of ending an employment relationship due to certain reasons that decide the rights and obligations between workers and the company or the owners and leaders of the company. In practice, companies that lay off workers must have reasons underlying the layoffs. Layoffs are an important matter in the world of work, so companies and workers who may be affected by it need to know.

Laws that govern layoffs

Due to the urgency, layoffs have statutory provisions that underlie them in labor regulations, including: Article 154A paragraph (1) of Law no. 13 of 2013 concerning Manpower (UU 13/2003), Law no. 11 of 2020 Concerning Job Creation (UU 12021), and its implementation is regulated in article 3 of Government Regulation No. 35 of 2021 Concerning Specific Time Work Agreements. Inside also discusses the rules for working hours, rest periods, and termination of employment (PP 35/2021). 

The principle of carrying out layoffs is that all parties in this case companies, workers, trade unions and the government try to prevent layoffs from occurring in accordance with Article 151 paragraph (1) Law 13/2003 jo. Article 37 paragraph (1) PP 35/2021). More about the PP 35/2021 Layoff Law Chapter V detailed as follows:

1. Article 36 regulates various reasons that can underlie the occurrence of layoffs for workers. This reason for layoffs underlies the provisions for calculating the right to the impact that can be experienced by workers after being laid off.
2. Articles 37 to 39 regulate the method of dismissal from the notification stage until the termination process is carried out within the company. If the dismissal does not reach an agreement between the employer and the worker, then the step that must be taken is through an industrial relations dispute settlement mechanism in accordance with the provisions of the law. 
3. Articles 40 to 59 regulate matters resulting from layoffs, such as severance pay, gratuity pay during service, compensation for entitlements, and severance pay. The calculation is carried out based on the reason or basis for the dismissal of certain workers. 

International Labor Standards Regarding Layoffs

In addition to the laws above, international labor law instruments also recognize protection from the implementation of termination of employment which may occur arbitrarily, namely ILO Convention No. 158 of 1982 concerning Termination of Employment Relations which states important matters in the act of dismissal as follows:

1. The basis for layoffs is that it must be done carefully because the decision to lay off workers can affect the family members they are responsible for. That is why the social effects of layoffs can have far-reaching consequences for the lives of workers and their families. That is why layoffs require caution. 
2. An employee cannot be terminated unless there is a valid reason for such termination and has been regulated in the applicable laws and regulations in each country.
3. Each country needs to regulate layoff actions which include the procedures for implementing them, the reasons for the layoffs, and the compensation that workers are entitled to get based on the type of reason for the layoffs. 

Causes of Employment Relations Ending

Upon imposing layoffs on a worker, the company must have a strong foundation to do so. Based on article 61 of Law 13/2003 jo. Law 11/2021 which regulates the causes for ending work agreements as follows:

1. One worker has died
2. The term of the work contract has ended according to what was agreed at the beginning of the work agreement
3. Have completed a particular job or project
4. There is a court decision or form of stipulation from an industrial relations dispute resolution institution that has permanent legal force
5. There are certain conditions or events listed in the work agreement, company regulations, or cooperation agreements that can result in the end of an employment relationship

Detailed explanations for the reasons for the layoffs are regulated in Article 15A paragraph (1) Law 13/2003 jo. Law 11/2021 and article 36 PP 35/2021 which also regulates reasons for layoffs can be allowed. 

Reasons Allowing Companies to Do Layoffs

Based on article 154A paragraph (1) Law no. 13 of 2003 concerning Manpower (UU 13/2003) jo. Law No. 11 of 2020 concerning Job Creation (UU 11/2021) and its derivative regulations, namely Government Regulation No. 35 of 2021 concerning Work Agreements for Specific Time, Outsourcing, Working Time and Rest Time, and Termination of Employment (PP 35/2021), in article 36 stipulates that layoffs are permitted for the following reasons:

1. The company takes the form of a merger, consolidation, takeover, or separation of the company and the worker or laborer will not continue the employment relationship or an employer does not want to accept the worker or laborer
2. The company implements a form of efficiency by closing the company or because the company suffers a loss
3. The company closed because it suffered continuous losses within a period of 2 (two) years
4. Company closed due to force majeure
5. The company experienced a condition of delaying debt payment obligations
6. The company went bankrupt
7. There is a form of application for termination of employment submitted by workers or laborers because the employer has committed the following actions:
   • Harassing, abusing or threatening workers or labourers
   • Persuading or ordering workers or laborers to act contrary to statutory regulations
   • The company does not pay wages at the time specified in the work contract for 3 (three) consecutive months or more, even though the employer pays wages on time after that
   • Does not carry out obligations according to promises or contracts agreed by workers or laborers
   • Giving orders to workers or laborers to do work beyond what was agreed in the work contract
   • Giving work that is dangerous for the soul, safety, health and decency to workers or laborers, while the work is not stated in the work contract agreement
8. There is a decision from the industrial relations dispute settlement institution so that the entrepreneur does not take action against the application submitted by the worker or laborer and decides to terminate the employment relationship
9. Workers or laborers submit their resignation of their own volition, which must meet the following requirements:
   • Submit an application for resignation in writing no later than 30 (thirty) days prior to the commencement date of the resignation
   • Not bound by official ties
   • Continue to carry out its obligations until the date of resignation begins
10. Workers or laborers are absent for 5 (five) working days or more consecutively without any written statement and accompanied by valid evidence with confirmation of summons from the employer 2 (two) times, either verbally or in writing
11. Workers or laborers are proven to have violated the provisions stipulated in work agreements, company regulations, or collective bargaining agreements who have previously been given the first, second, and third warning letters consecutively for a maximum period of 6 (six) months, except for matters this has been stipulated otherwise in the employment agreement, company regulations, or collective bargaining agreement
12. Workers or laborers cannot do work for 6 (six) months because they have been detained by the authorities on suspicion of committing a crime
13. Workers or laborers experience prolonged illness or disability as a result of a work accident and are unable to carry out their work after exceeding the medical treatment limit for 12 (twelve) months
14. Workers or laborers have entered retirement age
15. Worker or laborer has died

Things That Make Companies Prohibited from Layoffs

Based on the provisions of article 153 paragraph (1) of the Job Creation Law No. 11/2020 regulates Employers who are prohibited from terminating workers or laborers for the following reasons:

1. The worker is absent from work due to illness based on a doctor’s statement for a period not exceeding 12 consecutive months
2. Workers are unable to carry out their work as a result of fulfilling state obligations in accordance with the provisions of the applicable laws and regulations
3. Workers carry out worship according to the teachings of their religion
4. Married workers
5. Women workers who are pregnant, give birth, have an abortion, or are in the stage of breastfeeding their babies
6. Employees have blood ties and/or marital ties with another worker in the same company
7. Workers establish, become members or union officials, workers carry out union activities outside of working hours, or during working hours with the agreement of the company, or based on the provisions stipulated in work agreements, company regulations, or collective labor agreements
8. Workers who report the company or parties to the authorities because of the company’s actions that have committed criminal acts
9. There are differences in beliefs, religion, political beliefs, ethnicity, skin color, class, gender, physical condition, or marital status
10. Workers experience permanent disability, are sick as a result of work accidents, or are sick because of work relations based on a doctor’s certificate whose recovery period is uncertain

Furthermore, the more adab rules in paragraph (2) of this article which state that layoffs are carried out for the reasons above or in other words a violation of the layoff action still occurs, then the layoff process is null and void, then the employer is obliged to re-hire workers or laborers. concerned.

Compensation Entitled to Received by Workers Who Have Been Laid Off

If a worker is indeed laid off, then the employer is obliged to pay compensation in the amount according to the reason for the layoff. The types of compensation are severance pay, gratuity pay, compensation pay, and severance pay, with the detailed provisions as follows:

Severance pay

1. Work period less than 1 year paid 1 month wages
2. Work period of 1 year or more but less than 2 years paid 2 months wages
3. Work period of 2 years or more but less than 3 years paid 3 months wages
4. Work period of 3 years or more but less than 4 years paid 4 months wages
5. Work period of 4 years or more but less than 5 years paid 5 months wages
6. Work period of 5 years or more, but less than 6 years, paid 6 months wages
7. Work period of 6 years or more but less than 7 years paid 7 months wages
8. 7 years of service or more but less than 8 years paid 8 months wages
9. 8 years of service or more paid 9 months wages

Service Time Award

1. Work period of 3 years or more but less than 6 years paid 2 months wages
2. Work period of 6 years or more but less than 9 years paid 3 months wages
3. Working period of 9 years or more but less than 12 years paid 4 months wages
4. Work period of 12 years or more but less than 15 years paid 5 months wages
5. Service period of 15 years or more but less than 18 years are paid 6 months wages
6. Service period of 18 years or more but less than 21 years are paid 7 months wages
7. Work period of 21 years or more but less than 24 years paid 8 months wages
8. Service period of 24 years or more is paid 10 months wages

Rights Compensation Money

1. Annual leave that has not been taken and has not fallen into effect
2. Expenses or return fees for workers and their families to the place where workers are accepted to work
3. Other matters stipulated in the work agreement, company regulations, or the collective labor agreement of each company

Termination Letter Example

After understanding the explanation above, Sinaumed’s can understand the termination of employment and the following sample letter: 

LETTERHEAD

TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT RELATIONSHIP Number: 050/ PT. EX/PHK/AN/2022

Regarding: Letter of Termination of Employment or Letter of Termination of Work to the Honorable, Mr. Adam Bagyo On the spot

Yours faithfully,

Regarding the results of evaluating your performance over the past year, we assess that there has been no increase in performance or improvement in terms of effectiveness and discipline at work. Therefore we as the company decided not to continue the work contract or Termination of Employment (PHK) with Brother Adam.

Thus, starting from December 1, 2022, the working relationship between PT. EX with Brother Adam is declared finished or ended. On behalf of the company, we would like to thank you for the performance you have given to PT EX so far in any form.

Thus we convey this letter of termination of employment, thank you.

Medan, December 1, 2022 PT. EX

Roger HR Manager

 

LETTERHEAD

Number : 050/PT. EX/PHK/AN/2022

Hereby Notified Name : Adam Bagyo Position : Production Operator

PT. Ex decides to end the employment relationship with you as of December 1, 2021 which is in accordance with the end of the employment contract.

This decision was taken by considering several important matters in terms of the company’s unstable financial condition and the unequal number of employee quotas in terms of production effectiveness.

Thus we convey this Letter of Termination of Employment (PHK), for your attention and understanding, we thank you profusely.

Jakarta, December 1, 2022 Sincerely yours,

Roger HRD PT. Ex

So, that’s an explanation about Termination of Employment and an example of a letter that is correct and polite. Layoffs are bad news for workers, so companies need proper understanding to take care of this, especially severance pay, which must be given in accordance with applicable regulations. In addition, companies must also consider carefully if they want to lay off their employees.

 

Tectonic earthquakes are – Recently, earthquakes have frequently occurred in Indonesia. Earthquake is a natural disaster, which can cause quite large losses. Earthquakes themselves are often grouped into two types, namely, tectonic earthquakes and volcanic earthquakes. On this occasion, we will discuss more about tectonic earthquakes. So, keep reading this article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Tectonic Earthquake

Earthquakes are vibrations that occur inside the earth which can cause movement of land and buildings on the surface of the earth. Earthquakes are caused by the movement of tectonic plates inside the earth, where when the tectonic plates collide or move with each other, the pressure and attraction that occurs can cause earthquakes.

Tectonic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by the movement of tectonic plates. Tectonic earthquakes can occur on land or at sea, and can cause serious damage if they occur near the earth’s surface. Tectonic earthquakes usually occur in areas that are along tectonic plate boundaries, such as along fault lines or in subduction zone areas.

A subduction zone is an area where one tectonic plate is uplifted or pulled under another plate. This usually occurs in areas along tectonic plate boundaries, where one tectonic plate moves toward another and is uplifted or pulled under it.

Subduction zones usually occur in areas that have volcanic topography or along active fault lines. The movement of tectonic plates in the subduction zone can cause tectonic earthquakes, and can also cause new volcanoes to form.

Tectonic plates are layers of the Earth’s crust consisting of rocks and minerals that move slowly over the deeper layers of the Earth’s mantle. Tectonic plates are formed from material released from magma in the earth’s crust, which then hardens into rock. Tectonic plates can move horizontally or vertically, and interactions between tectonic plates can cause tectonic earthquakes, faults, and volcanic activity. There are several types of plate tectonics, including passive, continental, and oceanic plates.

There are several types of tectonic plates, namely:

1. Passive Plates: Passive plates are tectonic plates that are either stationary or moving very slowly. Passive plates are usually located on land, and can consist of igneous or metamorphic rocks.
2. Continental Plate: Continental plate is a tectonic plate consisting of igneous material that forms on land. Continental plates are usually composed of lighter igneous rocks, such as granite, that lie on top of oceanic plates.
3. Oceanic Plate: Oceanic plate is a tectonic plate consisting of rocks that form under the sea. Oceanic plates are usually composed of heavier igneous rocks, such as basalt, that lie beneath the continental plates.

Apart from that, there are also convergent, divergent, and transform plates, which are types of tectonic plates formed from interactions between tectonic plates. Convergent plates occur when two tectonic plates meet and one is pulled under the other, while diverging plates occur when two tectonic plates move in opposite directions and one of them is uplifted. Plate transform occurs when two tectonic plates move horizontally and slide past each other.

Example of a Tectonic Earthquake 

An example of a tectonic earthquake is an earthquake that occurred along the San Andreas fault line in California, United States. The earthquake was caused by the movement of tectonic plates in the region, where the Pacific and North American plates collided and one of them was uplifted or pulled under the other. The San Andreas earthquake has caused serious damage to the region, including landslides and damage to buildings.

Tectonic earthquakes have been detected and studied in depth since the discovery of the theory of plate tectonics by Alfred Wegener in 1912. Wegener concluded that plate tectonics is a moving layer of the earth’s crust, and that interactions between tectonic plates can cause earthquakes. This theory was later developed by other geologists and tectonics, so that by the 1960s the theory of plate tectonics had become a widely accepted theory among scientists.

The first tectonic earthquake occurred, because earthquakes have occurred since the earth was formed. However, the history of recorded earthquakes dates back to ancient times, when humans began to record incidents of earthquakes that occurred in their area. The first record of an earthquake is found in an ancient tablet in Mesopotamia, which tells of an earthquake that occurred in the region in 2200 BC. Since then, many earthquakes have been recorded in history, and the theory of plate tectonics has helped scientists understand the causes of earthquakes.

The largest tectonic earthquake ever recorded was the earthquake in Chile in 1960, which had a magnitude of 9.5. This earthquake occurred along the Chile fault line, which is one of the longest and most active fault lines in the world.

This earthquake caused a tsunami that hit the coast of Chile as well as neighboring countries, such as Peru, Argentina and the United States. This earthquake caused serious damage in the region, and killed more than 5,000 people

Meanwhile, Indonesia is one of the countries in the Ring of Fire region , which is an area around the Pacific Ocean that has high tectonic and volcanic earthquake activity. This is caused by the interaction of tectonic plates in the region, where Indonesia is located between the Eurasian, Australian and Pacific plates.

As a result, Indonesia is frequently hit by tectonic earthquakes, including those that occur along the fault lines of Sumatra, Sulawesi and Bali. Some of the largest tectonic earthquakes that have occurred in Indonesia are the earthquake in Sumatra in 2004, which had a magnitude of 9.1, and the earthquake in Bali in 2018, which had a magnitude of 7.0.

Due to the Tectonic Earthquake

The effects of tectonic earthquakes can vary depending on the strength of the earthquake, the location of the earthquake, and the surrounding environmental conditions. Some common effects of tectonic earthquakes are damage to buildings, landslides, and the formation of new volcanoes.

Tectonic earthquakes can also cause tsunamis, which are sea waves caused by earth movements that occur after an earthquake. Strong tectonic earthquakes can cause huge material losses, and can even result in loss of life if they occur in densely populated areas.

An example of the damage produced by tectonic earthquakes is the earthquake in Haiti in 2010, which caused very serious damage to the region. This earthquake has a magnitude of 7.0 and occurred in the capital city of Haiti, Port-au-Prince. This earthquake caused the collapse of many buildings, including government buildings, hospitals and schools. This earthquake also caused landslides in several areas, and resulted in the loss of the lives of more than 200,000 people.

Some of the damage caused by tectonic earthquakes in Indonesia is damage to buildings, landslides, and the formation of new volcanoes. For example, the earthquake in Aceh in 2004 caused the collapse of many buildings in the area, including houses, schools and government buildings. This earthquake also caused a tsunami that hit the coast of Aceh, which added to the damage that occurred in the region. The earthquake in Lombok in 2018 also caused serious damage to the region, including the collapse of many buildings, landslides and the formation of a new volcano.

Tectonic earthquakes can cause changes in the surrounding nature, depending on the strength of the earthquake and the surrounding environmental conditions. Some natural changes that can be produced by tectonic earthquakes are landslides, the formation of new volcanoes, and changes in the shape of the earth’s surface.

For example, the earthquake in Sumatra in 2004 caused landslides in several areas around it, resulting in a change in the shape of the earth’s surface in that area. Earthquakes can also cause tsunamis, which are sea waves that can change the shape of the coast and seabed.

Causes of Tectonic Earthquakes

The cause of tectonic earthquakes is the movement of tectonic plates in the earth. Tectonic plates are layers of the Earth’s crust consisting of rocks and minerals that move slowly over the deeper layers of the Earth’s mantle. When tectonic plates collide or move against each other, the resulting pressure and pull can cause earthquakes. Tectonic earthquakes can occur on land or at sea, and can cause serious damage if they occur near the earth’s surface.

Tectonic earthquakes occur due to the movement of tectonic plates under the earth’s surface. These tectonic plates consist of layers of rock that move over one another. Usually, this movement occurs slowly, but over time there is an accumulation of stress between the tectonic plates that cause earthquakes.

The movement of these tectonic plates can occur along fault lines that are under the earth’s surface. This fault line is the boundary between two tectonic plates that are moving against each other. When an earthquake occurs, these tectonic plates will press against each other and shift one another, causing vibrations that can be felt on the earth’s surface. Tectonic earthquakes usually occur in areas along these fault lines.

The movement of tectonic plates is caused by several factors, one of which is heat from within the Earth. This heat causes the tectonic plates to flatten and cause movement. In addition, gravitational forces and frictional forces between plates also cause the movement of tectonic plates. This movement can occur slowly or rapidly, depending on several factors, such as the type of tectonic plates and the strength of the forces acting.

There are three types of plate tectonics namely basic plates, tectonic plates, and continental plates. Base plates form beneath the ocean and are composed of raw magmatic material. Tectonic plates form on top of base plates and consist of pre-formed rock. Continental plates form on top of tectonic plates and consist of igneous rocks that have already formed. The movement of tectonic plates can occur in all types of plates, but usually occurs in plate tectonics and continental plates.

Earthquake Types According to Earthquake Depth

There are several types of earthquakes based on the depth of occurrence, including the following:

1. Shallow earthquake

This earthquake occurred at a depth of less than 70 km from the earth’s surface. Usually these shallow earthquakes are louder and more damaging than those that occur at deeper depths.

2. Intermediate earthquake

This earthquake occurred at a depth of between 70-300 km from the earth’s surface. These medium-sized earthquakes are usually not too strong and not as damaging as shallow earthquakes, but they can still be felt by residents around the earthquake-affected area.

3. Deep earthquake

This earthquake occurred at a depth of more than 300 km from the earth’s surface. These deep earthquakes are usually not felt by residents on the surface of the earth, but can trigger medium earthquakes or shallow earthquakes in the surrounding area.

Types of Earthquake Based on the Source of the Cause of the Earthquake

There are several types of earthquakes based on the source of their occurrence, including the following:

1. Tectonic earthquake

Tectonic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by the movement of tectonic plates under the earth’s surface. These tectonic earthquakes usually occur in areas that are along fault lines below the earth’s surface.

2. Volcanic earthquake

A volcanic earthquake is an earthquake caused by volcanic activity inside a volcano. These volcanic earthquakes usually occur around active volcanoes, and can occur during volcanic eruptions or eruptions.

3. Strange tectonic earthquakes

Pelic tectonic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by tectonic movements within the earth, but do not occur along fault lines like ordinary tectonic earthquakes. These complex tectonic earthquakes usually occur in areas where there are no clear fault lines, such as offshore or on the ocean floor.

4. Earthquake eruption

Eruptive earthquakes are earthquakes caused by volcanic eruptions or eruptions. These eruptive earthquakes usually occur immediately after an eruption or volcanic eruption, and can cause considerable damage around the area.

What to do when an earthquake occurs

1. To deal with an earthquake disaster, the first thing is to ensure the safety of yourself and those around you.
2. If you are in a building, try to take cover under a table or behind a door. If you are outdoors, try to stay away from tall buildings or structures that might collapse.
3. Once you are sure that you and those around you are safe, try to communicate with others and seek emergency assistance if needed.
4. Don’t forget to follow the directions and instructions from the responsible disaster management officer.

Conclusion

A tectonic earthquake is an event that occurs when the rock layers below the earth’s surface move. This movement can cause an earthquake that can damage buildings and cause other damage. The conclusion from tectonic earthquakes is that the movement of rock layers beneath the earth’s surface can cause earthquakes that can damage the surrounding environment.

sinaumedia Literacy – Digital developments are starting to enter various sectors, including education, with many startups developing platforms or applications to provide online learning. The application offers various features ranging from learning through animated videos, practice questions, and even preparation for various exams. Here are some online learning applications that you can use Sinaumed’s. What are they? Check these out!

LEARNING HOUSE

Rumah Belajar is a learning portal developed by the Ministry of Education and Culture of the Republic of Indonesia. You can enjoy various forms of learning content provided such as based on audio, video, images, and animations which are presented interactively and are definitely free. The learning house application was developed by the Ministry of Education and Culture, you could say this application is the best learning application or an important reference in learning according to the Indonesian curriculum. The size of this application is quite small for your smartphone, which is only 1.7 MB. Apart from that, this application provides various cool features such as Learning Resources, Virtual Laboratories, Virtual Classrooms, Cultural Maps, and others that you can access to support the learning process of teachers and students.

 

KHAN ACADEMY

Maybe some of you already know or know this one website. After reaping the success of its phenomenal website, Khan Academy is now starting to explore the Android application segment. Khan Academy through its application provides various kinds of knowledge and information. Starting from economics, history, physics, chemistry, biology and many more. Khan Academy is very creative and interesting in conveying knowledge in a fun way and involves various supporting tools such as videos, rather than just presenting boring and boring writing. For those of you who need a complete learning place, KhanAcademy can be a choice of solutions.

 

DUO LINGO

Duo lingo android online learning application. Currently, mastering a foreign language is definitely something that is really needed. This application is specifically for those who want to master the particular foreign language you want. Apart from that, Duo Lingo has a cool, attractive appearance and is filled with modern icons and colors. The application by Luis von Ahn and Severin Hacker is of course free or free. This application is already running on two popular OS, namely Android and IOS.

 

PHOTOMATH

Photomath is an application that successfully combines a camera and a calculator. If there are math problems that are difficult you can use this application to help solve the problem. It’s easy, you just open this application then point the camera at the question, then the answer will appear automatically on your smartphone screen. However, there is one thing that this application cannot do, namely questions in the form of stories. You can outsmart it by changing the form of the problem to the form of a linear equation or the core of the problem without a drama story. You can solve several forms of math problem material such as algebra, arithmetic, integral, trigonometry, logarithms, and others with the help of this application.

 

QUIPPER

Quipper is an online learning solution service application. Users can enjoy fun learning with a variety of content such as animated videos, complete practice questions and quality Super Teachers on Quipper Video. This application developed by Quipper Ltd provides thousands of video lessons and complete practice questions according to the national curriculum. These lessons apply to preparation for various levels of education in the face of junior high school exams, high school national exams, SBMPTN and regular exams at school. Users can also ask questions directly to tutors and consult academic plans with the best tutors at Quipper Video Masterclass. Students can also enjoy the Quipper School service to do assignments from teachers online.

 

BEELINGUAPP

Beelinguapp is an application for learning foreign languages ​​using the audiobook method, using this method you can learn while doing other activities. The way to learn is quite simple, you can start by selecting the language you want to learn, then selecting material in the form of stories or novels. Next, all you have to do is listen to the material read by a narrator. Languages ​​that you can learn include English, German, Spanish, Portuguese, French, Hindi, Korean, Russian, Chinese, Arabic, Italian, Japanese, Turkish etc. Here you can learn how to read sentences and how to pronounce them correctly. There are lots of interesting stories available such as The Ugly Duckling or what we often hear about the ugly duckling to Alice in Wonderland you can listen to in this application. Even those of you who like historical stories are also available in this application such as Napoleon Bonaperte, Archimedes, The Three Musketeers and others. But to listen to these stories, you have to pay a fee, but don’t worry, there are still many stories that you can listen to for free, aka free.

 

SOCRATIC

Judging from the naming of the application, it may at first glance be influenced by the name of a famous philosopher from Greece, namely Socrates, who is one of the most important figures in the Western philosophical tradition. This application can be said to be like or like a free tutoring in the form of an application, you only need the internet and a smartphone to make it happen. How to use this application is quite easy, you only need to take a photo of the question you want to ask or work on, then answers will be given for you from various sources. You can study various learning materials ranging from mathematics, history, chemistry, and others. More than 100 million questions have been solved and answered on this application. Plus this application can also read your handwriting. But remember, the condition is that your handwriting can be read.

 

WHITE NOISE

This application really helps those of you who want to focus on studying, working, or resting. You can play natural sounds such as rain, birds singing, waterfalls and others that help you concentrate and accompany you while studying. The method is quite easy, that is, simply make a list of your favorite natural sounds or songs according to the time you specify in Sinaumed’s.

 

HELLOTALK

Hello Talk is an application for learning English that you can try to improve your ability to speak English. Besides that, you can also learn other languages ​​besides English because this application has less than 100 languages ​​from around the world that are filtered in the Hello Talk application. Hello Talk is also available on iOS. Your English skills will improve dramatically by learning English using the Hello Talk application.

 

QUISTLETS

Quistlet is a learning app that makes you feel like you’re playing a game. This application changes the usual boring learning method to be more fun. So, you can create your own images and sounds and get motivated to complete quizzes that you or other students from the Quistlet community have created. Memorizing vocabulary or sentences is faster, you just have to write down the words or sentences and you can play this application whenever and wherever you want.

 

HELLO CHINESE

For those of you who are really interested in learning Mandarin, Hello Chinese is a must have on your gadget. Mandarin itself is included in a language that should be learned because it is included in the category of world or global languages. So, to support your Chinese language skills, Hello Chinese offers you to learn Mandarin in a fun way. Hello Chinese offers Mandarin lessons from Basic 1 to 3 and in the following you will learn colors, numbers, food, time, questions, and many others. It’s perfect for those of you who want to learn Mandarin from the most basic stages! Unfortunately, this application is only new on Android Sinaumed’s.

 

NOTEBLOC

Application copy and copy study notes. Maybe from the name alone you can already imagine the function of this application. If you want to copy or copy notes from teachers, lecturers, or have friends, you can use this application. That way you can save time. While the way it works itself is more or less like a copier or scanner. Apart from that, you can also edit or adjust the brightness level of notes and share them with your friends. This application transfers into digital form such as pdf format or images. Applications can help detect, recommend, and the best cutting angle of the part you need. The resulting image quality is quite good and the image sharpness is satisfactory.

 

QUICK MATS

Mathematics is indeed a subject that seems boring and scary for most children. In fact, in the right way, learning math can be an exciting and fun activity too, you know! You can invite children to learn mathematics through Quick Maths because the process is packaged in a variety of fun activities. This best math learning application can also help improve your child’s various math skills easily.

 

TEACHER’S ROOM

Ruangguru is an online tutoring application that offers a complete solution in just one application. Users can learn through videos, practice questions, private lessons, and tryouts which can be accessed only via a smartphone. Ruangguru provides content for various levels of education, from elementary, junior high to high school, in accordance with the national curriculum. The application developed by Ruangguru.com is specially designed by the best and experienced teachers. This application provides various learning features, starting from the Learning Video feature, with this feature, users can watch thousands of animated learning videos and discussion of questions for elementary, middle, high school, with tutors with a duration of only 5-10 minutes per video. Videos can also be downloaded so that users can watch them repeatedly. Then the Practice Questions and Discussion feature, users can sharpen their understanding through more than tens of thousands of practice questions and discussions of various levels of difficulty (including High Order Thinking Skills or HOTS). The results of the exercise can immediately come out accompanied by the discussion. Ruangguru also presents the Bimbel Module Summary feature. This feature can be used after completing all missions. Users can download summaries which can be stored in the smartphone gallery which can be used as material for study. And the Ruangguru Squad Notes feature, for sharing study notes and other notes from Ruangguru Friends throughout Indonesia. Ruangguru also presents the Bimbel Module Summary feature. This feature can be used after completing all missions. Users can download summaries which can be stored in the smartphone gallery which can be used as material for study. And the Ruangguru Squad Notes feature, for sharing study notes and other notes from Ruangguru Friends throughout Indonesia. Ruangguru also presents the Bimbel Module Summary feature. This feature can be used after completing all missions. Users can download summaries which can be stored in the smartphone gallery which can be used as material for study. And the Ruangguru Squad Notes feature, for sharing study notes and other notes from Ruangguru Friends throughout Indonesia.

 

SMART CLASS

This application provides a complete learning solution for grades 1 to 12 with interactive methods, which makes learning activities easier and more effective. Extramarks presents various alternative ways of learning, from visual, audio and kinesthetic. The presentation is based on the differences in student characters, inspiring that the way each student learns is also different. This application comes with three effective learning methods namely Learn, Practice and Test. The Learn feature will provide a thorough audio-visual explanation of lessons through learning concepts, animations, videos, interactive multimedia and textbooks (e-books). The Practice feature aims to reinforce concepts through interactive exercises and activities, such as HOTS, Virtual Lab and VBQ (Value Based Questions). While the Test feature is used as a comprehensive evaluation of the learning process with various forms of tests such as Adaptive Tests, Multiple Choice Questions, Periodic Tests to Semester Exams. Apart from that, Kelas Pintar offers a Total Learning Ecosystem where all educational components, namely students, teachers and parents are in the same platform to support students’ success in learning. This application can help students understand, support teachers in teaching and make parents calm.

LINGBE

Lingbe An application to test your English skills. Lingbe is an application for learning English based on the community. So you will be connected with fellow users who have expertise or are learning English from various countries in the world. But the requirement to join the Lingbe application community is not only to learn English, but also to teach people to be capable or proficient in Indonesian. The Lingbe application does not only teach language questions, this application provides more lessons, the lesson is culture and how to get along with many people in the world, Sinaumed’s.

 

FOREST

This Forest application is a timer or timer application that can help us focus when studying or doing something. When we want to focus on studying, we can use this Forest application. In this application, later we will “plant” seeds that eventually become trees. So, if we don’t focus and are distracted by opening other applications on our cellphones, the trees we plant will wither. This application can make us less distracted, more focused, and so we don’t procrastinate doing something. That way, we can make better use of the time to study or do other activities. The fun thing is, the more we use this application, we will get new plant species prizes and over time the more trees we “plant” in the application.

 

 

BUSUU

Busuu is an application that can help you learn English anytime and anywhere in an easy way. Without being limited by time, you can already learn a lot of new vocabulary, this aims to increase your knowledge of English. The advantage of the Busu application is that it can be downloaded for free. Not bound by time Lots of support for foreign languages ​​besides English, there are still many other languages. Accompanied by pictures so it will make it very easy for you to learn. Fresh and easy interface display Easy to learn with lots of vocabulary There are quizzes to test insights. The Busuu application is the development of a foreign language learning site Busuu. With this application, you can continue learning classes even if you don’t access them via a PC. Busuu also has many interesting features that help you learn English. When accessing this application for the first time there will be a placement test to find out how good it is. the Busuu application is an offline application available on Android and iOS. The Busuu application is an English learning application that can help you learn English.

 

EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. On this platform, you can access many question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as CPNS synonyms, antonyms, and others. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

 

That’s the most useful app for students. Hopefully this article can be useful for you, Sinaumed’s!

Source: from various sources

Tabarakallah means – Has Sinaumed’s ever read the sentence Tabarakallah? Or maybe Sinaumed’s is quite familiar with this sentence?

The sentence Tabarakallah became popular, when it was widely used by celebrities as well as celebgrams to start their social media captions. After being used quite a lot by celebrities and celebgrams, many people also use the Tabarakallah sentence and it is not even rare to find cars with the Tabarakallah sentence sticker.

Of course, the use of the sentence Tabarakallah has the intent and purpose to be achieved by someone. In general, Tabarakallah means may Allah bless you.

Why is it used so much, what is its purpose and what is the further explanation of this Tabarakallah sentence? Check out the explanation in this one article!

Tabarakallah Meaning May Allah Bless You

The sentence Tabarakallah comes from Arabic which means ‘May Allah bless you or bless you. The sentence Tabarakallah can also be interpreted as Allah is Blessing. So, it can be seen that the use of the sentence Tabarakallah is to worship Allah.

However, there are also some who interpret the sentence Tabarakallah with the blessing of Allah, all things can happen. Some also argue, that the sentence Tabarakallah is actually the same as the sentence Subhanallah which means that is Most Holy to Allah which means a sentence of praise to Allah.

The sentence Tabarakallah is often said together with the sentence Masya Allah, becoming Masya Allah Tabarakallah. So when these two sentences are combined do they still mean the same?

According to the waheedbalu.com page, the sentence Allah Tabarakallah is God wants or wills, may Allah bless you there are also those who interpret this sentence to mean God’s blessing everything can happen.

Meanwhile, according to the Tafsir of Al Quranul Karim in Surah Al Kahf, Shaykh Muhammad bin Salih Al Utsaimin explained that Masya Allah has two meanings. The first meaning of the sentence Masya Allah is what Allah wills, while the second meaning of the sentence Masya Allah is what Allah wills, then that will happen.

So when someone says Masya Allah Tabarakallah, it means that we will always be reminded that everything that has happened on this earth is only by Allah’s will.

Apart from that, Masha Allah Tabarakallah can be said to prevent the emergence of Ain’s disease. Sinaumed’s may have heard of Ain’s disease. Broadly speaking, other diseases are diseases caused by someone’s gaze accompanied by fear, awe or jealousy.

More about Ain’s disease will be discussed in this article as well. But before that, Sinaumed’s needs to understand more about the sentence Tabarakallah which means Allah blesses you and how to use it.

In the Al-Quran letter Al A’raf, Allah also says, which means as follows.

“Glory to Allah, preserver of all the worlds.” Even though the sentence Tabarakallah means Allah blesses you, it seems that the use of the sentence Tabarakallah to praise or feel amazed is not appropriate.

According to the sunnah of the Apostle, when you want to pray for someone, it is better to say the sentence Barakallah. The sentence Barakallah comes from Arabic which means may Allah bestow blessings.

In general, this sentence is said when someone wants to pray for another person, so that that person will be given additional kindness. The sentence Barakallah with the word fiik behind it is intended for one person and additional fikum for many people.

When Sinaumed’s gets the prayer, Sinaumed’s can give an answer with the same prayer or another prayer. Sinaumed’s can also answer by giving the ending wa fikum barakallah which means may Allah bless you too. The Prophet once said the meaning is as follows.

“Whoever does good to you, then repay him. If you don’t find anything that you can use to repay that person, then pray for him, so that you see that you have replied.” (Narrated by Abu Dawud)

 

 

The correct use of Masya Allah, Tabarakallah, and Subhanallah sentences

As already explained, the meaning of the sentences Tabarakallah, Masya Allah and Subhanallah are quite the same because all three are sentences to give praise to Allah.

Even though the sentences Tabarakallah and Masha Allah are often used together, there is no valid argument that discusses that the sentence Masya Allah is more important than Tabarakallah or vice versa.

Therefore, Sinaumed’s should not hesitate to use these two sentences simultaneously or interchangeably. So, how do you use the correct and correct sentences Masya Allah, Tabarakallah and Subhanallah? Here’s an explanation.

Because these three sentences have meanings that are not much different or very similar, Sinaumed’s can use these sentences like the examples below.

• It is a pleasure for me to have you in my life, as my flesh and blood. You are the best part of my life, my daughter. Masha Allah, Tabarakallah.
• Masya Allah Tabarakallah, finally you can finish the exam well and get a satisfactory grade. May Allah continue to give you blessings when you use this knowledge, so that it can benefit the world and the hereafter. Amen.
• The child is beautiful and very cute huh? Tabarakallah.
• Tabarakallah, Masya Allah may Allah always bless your efforts, give yourself a good husband, children and a job full of blessings
• Subhanallah, the scenery behind our house is really beautiful. We do not need to travel far to feel the beauty of the panorama.
• How can the child live well with this deprived condition, Subhanallah, Masya Allah.
• There is no better joy in this world, than to welcome the presence of a sweet little girl like you. My daughter is the best thing that is in my life. Masha Allah, Tabarakallah.
• Every time I look in the mirror I say, Masya Allah Tabarakallah.
• She is so beautiful, Tabarakallah
• Some people are still in good condition, Tabarakallah
• Masya Allah Tabarakallah, may Allah always bless the business you are in, give you husbands and children as well as good jobs and blessings.

The Use of the Sentence Tabarakallah in the Surahs of the Al-Quran

The sentence Tabarakallah, is also used in several letters in the Koran. Here are some letters in the Koran that use the words Tabarakallah or Tabarak.

1. Surah Al A’raf verse 54

…تَبٰرَكَ اللّٰهُ رَبُّ الْعٰلَمِيْنَ

Tabārakallāhu rabbul-‘ālamīn

Meaning: Blessed be Allah, Lord of the Worlds.

2. Surah Al Furqan verse 1

تَبَارَكَ ٱلَّذِى نَزَّلَ ٱلْفُرْقَانَ عَلَىٰ عَبْدِهِۦ لِيَكُونَ لِلْعَٰلَمِينَ نَذِيرًا

Tabārakallażī nazzalal-furqāna ‘alā ‘abdihī liyakụna lil-‘ālamīna nażīrā

Meaning: blessed is He who sends discriminatory to His servants, so that he becomes a warner to the universe.

3. Surah Ar Rahman verse 78

تَبٰرَكَاسْمُ رَبِّكَ ذِى الْجَلٰلِ وَالْاِكْرَامِ

Tabaraarak asmu rabbika zil jalaali wal ikraam

Meaning: Glory be to the name of your Lord, owner of majesty and honor.

4. Surah Al Mu’min verse 14

فَتَبَارَكَ اللّٰهُ اَحْسَنُ الْخَالِقِيْنَۗ …

Fa tabārakallāhu aḥsanul-khāliqīn

Meaning: Glory be to Allah, the best creator.

5. Surah Al Mulk verse 1

تَبَٰرَكَ ٱلَّذِى بِيَدِهِ ٱلْمُلْكُ وَهُوَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ

Tabārakallażī biyadihil-mulku wa huwa ‘alā kulli syai`ing qadīr

Meaning: Glory be to Allah, in whose hand all kingdoms exist, and He has power over all things.

How is the law using the sentence Tabarakallah? Of course this is also explained in the Qur’an, namely in the letter Al Kahf verse 39, along with the pronunciation and meaning.

وَلَوْلَآ إِذْ دَخَلْتَ جَنَّتَكَ قُitor

Although lā iż dakhalta jannataka qulta mā syā`allāhu lā quwwata illā billāh, in tarani ana aqalla mingka mālaw wa waladā

Meaning: and why don’t you say you you entered your garden “ Masya Allah quwata illaa bilaah? (Indeed by Allah’s will all of this can be realized and there is no other power except with Allah’s help alone.) If you think that I am less than you in terms of wealth and offspring.

The interpretation of Surah Al Kahf verse 39 is as follows.

And why when you enter your garden, then your garden has amazed you, you don’t praise Allah (praise Allah) and say,

“This is because of Allah’s will for me. There is no power for me to be able to make it happen except for the help of Allah. If you think that I have less wealth and children than you.”

So, may God give you something better than your garden and take all the pleasures from you, because of your disbelief and send punishment from the sky on your garden.

So that your garden will turn into slippery and bare ground (arid), where the foot cannot step firmly enough, the plants cannot grow there. Or the water you use to water your plants with it will turn into the ground recede. So you can’t get the water out.

These are some of the letters in which the verses contain the word Tabarak and arguments for saying Tabarakallah.

 

 

How to answer the words of Tabarakallah

When someone says Tabarakallah or Masya Allah Tabarakallah to Sinaumed’s, Sinaumed’s can answer it with good words too. Because Tabarakallah means may Allah bless you, so it can be interpreted that the person prays that Allah will always give blessings to Sinaumed’s.

There are several ways that can be used to answer the words of Tabarakallah addressed to Sinaumed’s. Here’s an explanation.

1. The first way to answer a speech or hear the sentence Tabarakallah or Masya Allah Tabarakallah with Jazakillah Khair, meaning is that God will reward you with goodness.
2. Second, Sinaumed’s can also reply by saying Barakallah fii, which means may Allah bless you.
3. Sinaumed’s can also respond to Tabarakallah by saying Wafiiki Barakallah. The answer to this sentence can be said if Sinaumed’s is a woman. The meaning of Wafiiki Barakallah is May Allah SWT bless you too.
4. If Sinaumed’s is a man, then Sinaumed’s can answer Tabarakallah with Wafiika Barakallah, which means may Allah SWT bless you too.

The third and fourth ways of answering can also be said when someone says or hears the sentence Masya Allah.

Benefits of Saying Masha Allah Tabarakallah

As explained above, the words Tabarakallah and Masya Allah seem to have extraordinary meanings. Besides functioning as a good prayer, this sentence also functions as a praise to God Almighty.

When Sinaumed’s says this sentence and addresses it to other people, Sinaumed’s will also benefit from praying for people. Of course, the sentence Masha Allah Tabarakallah can also be addressed to oneself and will get the same benefits without diminishing in the slightest.

One of the benefits that is quite striking from saying the phrase Masya Allah Tabarakallah is to distance ourselves from envy and jealousy of other people. Because, by saying this sentence, Sinaumed’s will also feel happy when other people get sustenance and blessings from Allah.

Another benefit of saying the phrase Masha Allah, Tabarakallah is to keep someone away from other diseases. Well, previously this other disease was briefly discussed. So as not to get confused, here’s a little explanation about other diseases.

Another disease is a disease or disorder caused by eye sight. This disease was also mentioned and explained in Fathul Majid Syarah, Book of Tauhid, page 69.

In the book, it is explained that someone who looks, can cause disturbance to what he sees.

This other disease was also briefly explained in a hadith narrated by Muslim which means, “Ain really exists, if something can precede destiny, really that ain can.” (HR. Muslim no. 2188)

Then Aisyah also said, “In the past the Prophet Shallallahu Alaihi Wassalam asked me to ruqyah, in order to heal Ain.” (HR. Muslim no. 2195)

Other diseases can occur in humans or inanimate objects and the cause of this disease is because of hasad or envy and envy of the favors that are owned by other people.

People who have envy or jealousy towards other people, then look at that person with eyes full of envy, this is what can cause other diseases.

Apart from envy and jealousy, other diseases can also be caused by someone’s admiring glances. Another disease that befalls a person, can cause that person to get sick and the like, whereas if it befalls an inanimate object, it will result in the object being damaged.

Then how to prevent it? According to the scholars, one of the ways to prevent other people from getting sick is to say the kaliamt Laa haula walaa quwwata illah billah, when you see something amazing in other people.

However, this opinion does not have a strong enough basis. Then there are several hadiths which explain that the way to prevent other diseases is by tabriik or praying for blessings.

How do you pray for someone’s blessings? The trick is to read the sentence Baarakallahu fiik or Masya Allah Tabarakallah. So, because of this, at this time Sinaumed’s often sees cars or people who upload photos on their social media with the words Masha Allah Tabarakallah.

This aims to remind others that what happens, blessings and other things happen because of God’s will alone, so that person can avoid other diseases.

That is the explanation of the sentence Tabarakallah which means may Allah bless you and how to answer and the benefits of saying the sentence Tabarakallah. If Sinaumed’s wants to deepen his knowledge of Islam and knows about fiqh and others, Sinaumed’s can dig deeper by reading books that can be found at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Synchronic Thinking – Many of us live life in the abstract. The abstract meant here is as long as we go through life without care and without any encouragement to learn about the nature of our life on this earth, even though if we practice synchronous thinking there will be many things we can find there.

We will find lots of meaningful life lessons. One way is to learn about past history. History of the past is not always talking about history in its true sense. However, learning about patterns, events, and so on.

Thanks to synchronous thinking, those of us who are currently experiencing the Covid-19 pandemic can overcome it more quickly. Within two years, Covid-19 began to subside, even though in ancient times deadly pandemics like Covid-19 had occurred and both killed hundreds of millions of victims. At that time, the pandemic time could have been longer than now.

In other words, the speed of processing and the world’s handling of this pandemic (pandemic) is due to the benefits of synchronic thinking. So, what is meant by synchronous thinking? You can see the following review.

Understanding the Concept of Synchronic Thinking

Linguistically synchronic thinking is taken from the Greek, which is taken from the word syn which means “with”, and is taken from the word chronos which can be interpreted as “time”. Meanwhile, synchronic thinking in general can be interpreted as a method of thinking about the past based on a coherent analysis.

Synchronic thinking can also be interpreted as a way of thinking that emphasizes the depiction of a wider space, but is not focused on the time dimension. In general, the concept of synchronous thinking is a science that is often used in branches of science, politics, history, economics, anthropology, to social sciences.

Simply put, synchronic thinking is a method of developing events that happened in the past. Actually, synchronic thinking can also be regarded as a method of analysis of something that happened in the past. With this synchronic thinking method, it can be said that the analysis carried out will be dissected coherently. Coherently here are every aspect that can relate to events that occurred in the past. Because, every event must have many things related.

An example is the incident on August 17, 1945. This event alone can be analyzed starting from the scene, the characters in it, the impact that occurred from the event, and various other things. From this one example it can also be concluded that synchronic thinking can indeed make an event in the past be analyzed broadly.

Moreover, this synchronic approach is mostly used in social sciences. Any analysis performed using a synchronous approach will remain centered on the same point in time. However, there are several things that are extended from each of the past events that are being analyzed.

In addition, the analysis using the synchronous approach method also does not attempt to make a conclusion about something that has happened in the past. However, the synchronic approach only seeks to carry out an analysis of something that has happened in the past.

With these two meanings, synchronic if summed up as a whole means narrowing in time, but expanding in space. Of course, if you look at the previous example, the meaning of narrowing in time, but expanding or widening in space will be easier to understand.

The Meaning of Synchronic Thinking

If you already know the explanation related to the concept of understanding synchronic thinking, it’s incomplete if you don’t discuss the meaning of the synchronic thinking approach to an incident that happened in the past.

In general, the meaning of a synchronous thinking approach to an event or events that occurred in the past is to see the actual aspects that influenced or were influenced by an event that occurred in the past.

As previously explained, if every event or event in the past is analyzed with a synchronous thinking approach, it will still focus on one particular time. However, even though it focuses on one time, the incident can still be dissected broadly, starting from who was affected by the incident, what influenced the incident, what was in it, and various other things.

It turns out that, if you understand it more deeply, synchronic thinking is actually very important. With the synchronous thinking approach, every event that has occurred in the past can be shown in thorough detail. In addition, the events that have been analyzed can also be used as current learning methods.

Purpose of Synchronic Thinking

We live in the present well thanks to the past. The past or history is here to invite us to improve, evaluate, and improve the system to be better. The purpose of synchronic thinking is none other than to study the past (history) by seeing what happened in the past and learning many things from the events that have happened.

In simple terms, synchronic thinking aims to think evaluatively and critically. If there is something good from past events, it can be applied to the present. Conversely, if past events are lacking, they need to be analyzed and corrected so that they are used appropriately at this time.

The purpose of synchronic thinking is that we learn the patterns that occur. For example, once there was an outbreak of bird flu, influenza, malaria, and so on. After all this time, a similar case emerged, namely the corona virus. The form of activity or event is different, but the pattern is the same.

How to Think Synchronically

We have basically learned how to think synchronically since we were in elementary school. Then studied also in junior high school or even high school. Those who major in journalism will also be taught to think in sync. The method used is 5W + 1H or What, Who, When, Why, Where, and How.

However, in order to better understand some of the ways needed in the synchronous thinking approach, we will explain again in the paragraphs below which will help make it easier for you to do an analysis of past events with a synchronous thinking approach.

1. What

Synchronic thinking can be started from the question ” what ?”. So, we have to know what happened in the past? Because the context refers to the past, the form of the question refers to an event that has occurred in the past. Because there were so many events that happened in the past, we have to determine just one scope or one focus. The goal is to be able to dive more easily.

2. Who

The word who means who, refers to anyone who took part in past events. People who are involved in this will later be analyzed, because they are important figures who exert influence.

3. When

Meanwhile, the word when means when. Refer to time information. Whether it’s the time of the event or the time the important event occurred. Without knowing what time it is, it’s difficult to carry out a synchronous thought process.

4. Why

The word why directs us to find the reason why the incident happened? These reasons will determine the analysis to be used. The word why also refers to the aspects that influence events to occur.

5. Whares

The word where means where the location / place where the incident occurred. This clue to the location of the incident will also assist in the analysis process.

6. How

While the question word how is more intended to find out how the event happened. So, focus more on the method, methodology or sequence/chronology of the story that happened.

After seeing the synchronic way of thinking, it is not difficult. We can start by simply asking the 5W and 1H questions. With the help of the 5W+1H, of course, the process of analyzing past events with a synchronous thinking approach will also be easier to do.

Synchronic Thinking Characteristics

After knowing synchronic thinking, goals and ways of synchronic thinking, there are characteristics of synchronic thinking. You can see as follows.

1. Examining Historical Events that Occurred in the Past

The most prominent feature of synchronic thinking is that it will generally focus on examining historical events. Something that talks about history, is definitely talking about the past. The past referred to here is not the pantan’s past, but past state, international or national events that have the public benefit.

2. Emphasizes Event Studies on Patterns, Symptoms, and Characters

If you pay attention, the characteristics of synchronic thinking can also be seen from the studies raised. The average events raised are analyzing patterns, characters and symptoms that occurred at that time, which can be used as lessons and evaluations for developments in the current era.

3. Horizontal

Synchronic thinking is also horizontal, because it talks about something that has happened in the past.

4. No Comparison Concept

As for another characteristic of synchronous thinking, when analyzing it, there is no concept of comparison. The point is just studying cause and effect, without intending to collide with the same event or something like that.

5. Narrower Study Coverage

In terms of scope and scope, synchronous thinking has a narrower study. Narrow study does not mean it is not good, this is just one attempt to narrow and focus the analysis that occurred at that time.

6. The study is very systematic

The sixth characteristic, synchronic thinking is carried out systematically. Where the study is really carried out carefully, thoroughly and orderly. Especially when it comes to history. Where every historical event has a series of times and events.

7. The nature of the study is more serious and in-depth

The characteristics of synchronic thinking can also be seen from its nature. So the nature of the study conducted is in-depth and serious. So the study really wants to find out, and find solutions. Not for games or fad. Moreover, this study is about history. Where every history must have a story and a monumental impression.

Those are some characteristics of synchronous thinking. Hopefully, writing down some of the characteristics above will provide understanding and knowledge about synchronous thinking.

Synchronic Thinking Examples

An example of synchronic thinking can actually be seen from the example below. Which tells of past cases about pandemics that turned out to have happened long ago. It’s just that the shape of the virus is different.

First example:

• In 430 BC, at that time the Peloponnesian war was going on. The war that took place between the ancient Greek cities of Athens and Sparta. Again hit by a pandemic for four years. A third of Athens’ citizens and military died on the seventh or eighth day. The virus is influenza A subtype H1N1, which was later declared a pandemic for 4 years.
• In 1918, at the beginning of March, the so-called Spanish flu emerged. The Spanish flu completely disappeared in June 1920. The US soldiers arrived in Europe for war, and when they got there they caught this Spanish flu. In no time, the soldiers fell ill. This virus apparently spread to the Arctic and Pacific islands. The number who died was not half-hearted, an estimated 50-100 million people worldwide. That’s why the Spanish virus was declared a pandemic.

From the two stories above, which took place in different years and different types of viruses, the post-pandemic era is also different. And now in 2020 there is another pandemic which we know as Covid-19. Thanks to past patterns, there is an advantage that can be learned in the present era, namely the speed of making vaccines. In the past, creating a vaccine took a long time. Now, less than a year, a vaccine can be created and reduce the rate of victims. This is the benefit and importance of historical synchronic thinking.

Although previously explained based on the example above, so that you can understand more in learning synchronic concepts, we provide another example. Quoted from the official Kompas page , here is an example of a synchronous thinking approach to past events.

Second example:

Judging from an event in 1950 to 1959 even though Indonesia was already independent. However, Indonesia’s economic situation can be said to be in a bad condition, where the bad economic condition is influenced by several aspects such as.

• Agricultural products are the mainstay of export activities carried out by Indonesia.
• The round table conference determined that Indonesia must bear the economic and financial burden.
• At that time, the deficit that had to be borne by Indonesia was around Rp. 5.1 billion.
• The Dutch government did not pass down enough values ​​to transform the colonial economic system into a national economic system.
• The unstable domestic political situation made it easier for unplanned spending to occur.
• The existing security in the country is not so profitable.
• Domestic growth was so great at that time.

From the example questions or cases, an economic event that occurred in Indonesia from 1950 to 1959 can be analyzed using a synchronic thinking approach. Of course the results of the analysis carried out will be so easy to help in today’s life.

Conclusion

Those are some reviews about synchronous thinking. Hopefully this little discussion is useful for all of you. From all the explanations above, it can be concluded that synchronic thinking is always focused on past events with a predetermined time. Even though the time has been determined, the analysis with a synchronous thinking approach can be widened according to the aspects that influence the events that occur.

Starting from the aspects that influenced the occurrence of the incident to the aspects that were affected after the incident. Synchronic thinking also has characteristics that you can read in the previous explanation.

In addition, to simplify the process of synchronous thinking approaches to past events, you can use the 5W + 1H method. That way the results of the analysis with a synchronic approach will be more complete.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

 

Symptoms of syphilis in men – Syphilis or often also called the king of lions is a venereal disease that can cause long-term complications, if not treated properly and correctly. Syphilis can be regarded as a sexually transmitted infection (STI) caused by a type of bacteria known as Treponema Pallidum. However, the symptoms of syphilis in men are very difficult to detect.

Currently, medicine has categorized syphilis based on the stages of disease development. The following are some of the symptoms of syphilis in men to pay attention to.

Various Symptoms of Syphilis in Men

At each stage of syphilis development, different symptoms will be found. Symptoms of syphilis in men usually appear simultaneously and not always sequentially. There are four stages of syphilis development that need attention, namely the primary stage, secondary stage, latent stage, and tertiary stage. Each stage has its own distinctive signs and symptoms.

According to the Mayo Clinic, you can become infected with the bacteria that can cause lion king disease without any symptoms for years. For more details, here is an explanation of the symptoms of syphilis that can appear in men.

1. Primary stage

The first symptom of syphilis in men is the primary stage. At this stage a sore known as a chancre will appear. These sores cannot be felt, but can appear around the entry points of bacteria into the human body.

Furthermore, the chancre will develop about three weeks or after the body is exposed to bacteria. However, this condition can also only develop from 10 to 90 days. Therefore, someone who is already in the primary stage can easily transmit the bacteria to others.

Some of the symptoms that are usually caused when a person is exposed to the primary stage of syphilis, include the following:

• In men, there are sores that often appear in the genital area, these sores are not always on the penis. These sores can also be painful.
• In women, sores develop on the outside of the genitals, or even on the inside of the vagina, but they are rarely painful.
• There is swelling of the lymph nodes around the wound.
• There are sores that appear on other body parts, such as lips and mouth.

Sores in the primary stage often last 3 to 6 weeks. This condition will heal by itself, but can leave a thin scar. Even though this wound has healed, syphilis in the human body cannot be said to have disappeared. Someone who has had syphilis can still transmit it to others.

2. Secondary level

After the wound in the primary stage has developed, the secondary stage begins to show a rash between 2 to 12 weeks. This rash can develop and spread throughout the body, but is most common on the palms and soles. As with the primary stage, a man who has symptoms of syphilis has a risk of transmitting it to others.

In the secondary stage, a person will feel some of the following symptoms, namely:

• A rash that looks like a normal skin problem with a reddish-brown color, is small, solid, flat, or raised less than two centimeters (cm) high.
• Many small and open wounds appear on the mucous membranes (mucosa), usually the wounds are also filled with pus and are shaped like warts.
• For someone with syphilis with dark skin color, the sores on the skin may appear lighter in color than the surrounding skin.

This rash on the skin can often heal by itself within two months without scarring. When healing is complete, the skin color will change.

However, syphilis infection that spreads throughout the body can also show other symptoms, including:

• Fever with a temperature not higher than 38.3°C
• The body becomes weak and uncomfortable
• Sore throat
• Weight has decreased
• Swelling occurs in the lymph nodes
• Hair loss in areas such as eyebrows, eyelashes and scalp)
• Stiff neck, headache, emotional instability, paralysis, inappropriate reflexes, and irregularly moving eyeballs

Signs and symptoms that occur in the secondary stage will disappear on their own without requiring special treatment. Even so, people who experience syphilis symptoms still have the opportunity to transmit it to others.

3. Leave tap

If the symptoms of syphilis in the man do not go away. It’s good to get medical treatment immediately. The symptoms of syphilis that never heal enter the latent stage. This stage is the phase after a person is infected with syphilis.

After the rash on a person with secondary syphilis disappears, he or she will not experience any symptoms for some time. At this stage, it can be said that the bacterial infection has entered the latent stage. This stage will usually occur briefly, namely one year. However, some people can experience this stage for up to 5 to 20 years.

At this stage, the patient can get an accurate diagnosis by having a blood test. In addition, patients can also show certain symptoms or give birth to babies infected with syphilis. However, if no symptoms appear, the patient may be at risk of transmitting the syphilis-causing bacteria during the initial period of the latent stage and during the latent stage.

4. Tertiary stage

Compared to the previous three stages, the tertiary stage is the most contagious stage of syphilis symptoms in a person. If not treated immediately, this final stage will begin to appear one year after a person is infected. In addition, there is a possibility that the symptoms of syphilis may appear at any time during the patient’s life.

The tertiary stage is known as the stage that is very damaging to the sufferer’s body. This is because it can cause serious problems in the heart and blood vessels. Plus, people with syphilis at this stage will experience problems with the nervous system, blindness, mental disorders, and even death.

This final stage of syphilis has characteristics that depend on the complications that develop in the sufferer’s body. Some complications that can occur due to lion king disease include:

• The appearance of a gummata or a large sore in the body or on the skin.
• Cardiovascular syphilis or syphilis infection that affects the heart and blood vessels.
• Neurosyphilis or syphilis infection that affects the nervous system.

Symptoms of Syphilis in the Brain, Eyes and Ears

Syphilis infection that is not treated with proper treatment can spread to various organs of the human body, such as the brain (neurosyphilis), eyes (ocular syphilis), or ears (ocular syphilis). It should be noted, this complication of syphilis can appear at any stage, whether primary, secondary, latent, or tertiary.

The symptoms caused by syphilis in the brain include:

• severe headache
• difficulty controlling muscle movement
• paralyzed or unable to move parts of the body
• numb
• dementia

Syphilis infection that has spread to the eye will show signs and symptoms, such as the following:

• sore eyes
• rosy eyes
• changes in vision
• blindness.

Meanwhile, syphilis or lion king that develops in the ear gives rise to the following symptoms, namely:

• hearing impairment
• ringing ears
• dizziness or vertigo

Characteristics of Syphilis in Men

Symptoms of syphilis in men have characteristics that can be known before it gets worse. Some of the characteristics of syphilis in men that are often encountered, include:

• The sufferer will experience pain during sexual intercourse.
• There is pain or pain when urinating.
• Painless red sores appear in the genital area which are yellowish in color.
• The penis secretes fluid or feces.

Syphilis Risk Factors in Men

Anyone who is actively having sexual intercourse has a risk of getting syphilis. Therefore, there are several risk factors that can be considered so as not to get this infectious disease. The risk factors for syphilis in men are:

• Unprotected sexual activity, such as a condom.
• Sexual contact with people with syphilis.
• Have sex with someone who lives in an area with a high rate of syphilis.
• Have a family history of syphilis (mother).

5 Ways to Prevent Getting Syphilis

After knowing the various symptoms of syphilis in men, here are some steps you can take to prevent contracting syphilis, namely:

1. Do not have casual sex.
2. Having long-term sexual intercourse with a person who has been confirmed not to have syphilis.
3. Using a condom during sexual intercourse.
4. Do not share sex toys with each other.
5. Avoid consuming alcohol and illegal drugs which have the potential for unsafe sex.

How to Treat Syphilis

Syphilis is basically curable. Syphilis treatment usually uses antibiotics based on the patient’s symptoms. The antibiotic commonly used for someone who has syphilis is penicillin. Penicillin is effective enough to kill the syphilis-causing bacteria. However, if the patient is allergic to penicillin, the patient may request another antibiotic.

For someone who has received a diagnosis with primary, secondary, or latent syphilis for less than one year. One of the treatments that can be done is with a single injection of penicillin. However, if the patient has had syphilis for more than one year, an additional dose may be needed.

Please note, on the first day of receiving treatment, patients usually experience what is known as a Jarisch-Herxheimer reaction. This reaction is characterized by signs and symptoms such as fever, chills, nausea, pain and headache.

After carrying out the treatment, several things the doctor will ask for, namely:

1. Have periodic blood tests to confirm response to usual dose of penicillin. Follow-up will depend largely on the stage of syphilis diagnosed.
2. Avoiding sexual contact with new partners until treatment is finished and blood tests show the infection has cleared.
3. Tell sexual partners to have laboratory tests and get treatment if necessary.
4. Doing a test to detect HIV.

After the treatment process is complete, the patient still has to undergo laboratory tests to ensure that the body is free of the syphilis-causing bacteria. Even so, someone who has had syphilis has the potential to get syphilis again. Therefore, one way to be free from syphilis is to avoid the risk factors as above.

Plus, the symptoms of syphilis in men are often not visible to the naked eye. As a result, sores and rashes may appear in hidden areas, such as the groin or genitals. The only most accurate way to prove someone has syphilis or not is with a laboratory test.

8 Choices of Herbal Medicines to Overcome Syphilis Symptoms

Apart from treating syphilis infection medically, there are several alternative treatments using herbal medicines. Although antibiotics are considered the most effective syphilis drug, most people with syphilis choose traditional ways to treat lion king disease.

In accordance with what is written in the journal Phyto Keys, here are some herbal plants that can help cure syphilis, including:

1. Chaff

Husk or also known as Achyranthes aspera is a plant commonly found in various countries in Asia, such as China, Taiwan, Cambodia, Laos, Myanmar, to Indonesia.

This herbal plant is already well-known for its benefits for various diseases, one of which is syphilis. The part of the husk plant that can be used as a traditional syphilis medicine is the root. The root of the husk can treat wounds caused by syphilis.

How to use husks as a syphilis drug is fairly easy. The husk root is cooked with oil and amethyst fruit. Next, apply the processed husk to the part of the skin that is injured by syphilis.

2. Crown flower

Crown flowers or Calotropis gigantea can be found in various countries in Asia, including Indonesia. Some parts of this plant are usually used to treat various diseases, ranging from sap, bark, flowers, and roots.

The part of the crown flower plant that can be used to cure syphilis or lion king is the bark. This plant is actually commonly used by Chinese people to treat syphilis.

3. Sarsaparilla

Sarsaparilla or Ichnocarpus frutescens is known as a very fresh soft drink. However, Sarsaparilla can actually be used to treat syphilis. Apart from being used as a syphilis drug, this herbal plant which is found in many countries in Asia has roots that can treat various diseases, such as scabs, animal bites, and smallpox.

4. Pink Kopsia

Pink Kopsia or Kopsia fruticosa is commonly found in various countries in Southeast Asia. This plant can also be used for herbal medicine to treat wounds and syphilis, especially the roots. It’s just that, not many studies have shown the special medical properties of these plants.

5. Yellow trumpet flower

Yellow trumpet flower or also known as the Latin name Tecoma stans is a very beautiful plant. This plant can also be used as a syphilis drug and various other poisons. The bark is the most targeted part as medicine.

6. Annie’s lace

One of the plants that can be used to treat syphilis is Annie’s lace (Cyperus scariosus). This plant can be used as a traditional syphilis medicine. The way to use it is to just boil it with the palasa or ploso plants (Butea monosperma).

7. Milkhedge

Milkhedge is a plant that has the Latin name Euphorbia antiquorum. This plant can be found in Southeast Asia, especially in India. Indian people usually use this plant to treat constipation. However, this plant can also be used as a syphilis drug.

The part of Milkhedge that can be used to treat syphilis is the pith or the tissue in the deepest part of the stem. Next, process this plant by slicing the stem, drying it, until it becomes powder. Furthermore, the processed sap can be rubbed on the surface of the skin. you can

8. Black plums

The last plant that can be used to treat syphilis is black plum. A plant commonly used by people in various countries in Asia to treat syphilis, such as China, the Philippines, and Indonesia. Like the previous plant, the root is the most important part for the traditional treatment of syphilis.

This is an explanation of the symptoms of syphilis in men, starting from the four stages of syphilis symptoms, the characteristics of syphilis, risk factors for syphilis, to how to treat syphilis.

Causes of STEMI Symptoms – STEMI is an acute phase of chest pain that lasts a long time and cannot be treated with nitrates. This phase can occur at rest or at any time accompanied by acute myocardial infarction with ST elevation (STEMI) which occurs due to thrombosis resulting from rupture of an unstable atherosclerotic plaque.

According to the American Heart Association (AHA), myocardial infarction remains the leading cause of death and disability worldwide. Every year an estimated 785,000 Americans experience myocardial infarction and around 470,000 people will experience a recurrence, every 25 seconds an estimated 1 American dies due to myocardial infarction (AHA, 2012).

According to the Ministry of Health (Kemenkes), the prevalence of coronary heart disease based on doctor-diagnosed interviews in Indonesia is 0.5%, while based on a doctor’s diagnosis or symptoms of 1.5%. The prevalence of coronary heart disease based on a doctor’s diagnosis was highest in Central Sulawesi (0.8%), followed by North Sulawesi, DKI Jakarta and Aceh with 0.7% each.

Meanwhile, the highest prevalence of coronary heart disease according to diagnosis or symptoms was in East Nusa Tenggara (4.4%), followed by Central Sulawesi (3.8%), South Sulawesi (2.9%), and West Sulawesi (2.6%). . The prevalence of coronary heart disease (CHD) based on doctor-diagnosed interviews or symptoms increases with age, highest in the 65–74 year age group, which is 2.0% and 3.6%, decreases slightly in the age group ≥ 75 years. The prevalence of coronary heart disease diagnosed by a doctor or based on a doctor’s diagnosis or symptoms is higher in women (0.5% and 1.5%).

Definition of STEMI

Segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction (STEMI) is a clinical syndrome that is defined as a typical symptom of myocardial ischemia, which is associated with an ECG picture in the form of persistent ST elevation and followed by the release of biomarkers of myocardial necrosis (Setiati, et al. 2015).

Miocardial infarction (myocardial infarction) is a life-threatening condition with the characteristic sign of permanent muscle necrosis due to loss of oxygen supply to the heart muscle. Myocardial infarction is also known as a heart attack or coronary attack (Udjianti, 2010). Myocardial infarction is the death of myocardial muscle tissue. Myocardial infarction is a total blockage in the coronary arteries (Ruhyanudin, 2007).

STEMI is the acute phase of chest pain which is shown to increase in both frequency and duration of chest pain, and cannot be treated with nitrates, which can occur at rest or at any time accompanied by acute myocardial infarction with ST elevation (STEMI), which occurs due to thrombosis as a result of unstable atherosclerotic plaque rupture (Pusponegoro, 2015).

According to the definition above, it can be concluded that STEMI is a life-threatening condition with typical signs of chest pain associated with an ECG picture in the form of ST elevation and the formation of permanent muscle necrosis tissue occurs because the heart muscle loses its oxygen supply, which is caused by thrombosis as a result of rupture. unstable atherosclerotic plaques.

STEMI symptoms

Blocked heart arteries can cause a number of symptoms. However, these symptoms will vary from person to person. In general, symptoms of STEMI that can appear include:

• intense chest pain;
• Chest feels strongly pressed (as if there is a fist in the chest);
• The pain radiates to the neck, jaw, shoulder and left arm;
• excessive sweating;
• Hard to breathe;
• Indigestion, such as discomfort in the stomach and chest;
• nausea and vomiting;
• Fatigue and sudden falls;
• Palpitations (change in heart rate becomes faster);
• Headache;
• Feeling anxious or restless.

If you experience the STEMI symptoms that have been mentioned—especially severe chest pain, immediately consult a doctor to get the appropriate diagnosis and treatment.

Causes of STEMI

The main cause of STEMI is a blockage in the arteries. The blockage occurs totally in the LAD, RCA, or LCX arteries. The blockage is caused by a buildup of plaque in the blood vessels. Plaque is formed from fat and cholesterol contained in the blood. Blood clots can also form when plaque builds up in the arteries. When the arteries are completely blocked, the heart muscle will be damaged and STEMI will occur.

STEMI Risk Factors

There are a number of factors that increase the risk of this type of heart attack. These factors can actually be controlled to reduce risk, but not all of them. The following are a number of factors that increase the risk of STEMI.

• Smoking habit;
• A diet that consumes too much salt, sugar and fat;
• Lazy to move or never exercise;
• Excessive alcohol consumption;
• Use of illegal drugs, such as methamphetamine and cocaine;
• Aging;
• Men aged 45 years and over;
• Women aged 50 years and over or have experienced menopause;
• Having a family member with a history of a similar disease;
• Genetics or heredity.

Diagnosis STEMI

Doctors diagnose STEMI based on a physical examination, electrocardiography (ECG) results, and examination of cardiac biomarkers such as a troponin test.

• Physical examination: evaluate the main symptoms such as chest pain and angina, to accompanying symptoms such as dizziness, shortness of breath and fainting.
• Electrocardiography (ECG): measures the electrical activity of the heart to detect abnormalities.
• Troponin test: a biomarker test to confirm a heart attack. Damage to heart cells causes the heart to release a compound called troponin.

If needed, the doctor may also recommend additional examinations.

STEMI complications

STEMI can cause even more severe complications and attack other organs in the body. The following are the types of complications caused by STEMI.

1. Heart Failure

The acute and subacute phases after STEMI are often complicated by myocardial dysfunction. Acute complications that can occur are pump failure with pathological remodeling accompanied by clinical signs and symptoms of heart failure and can end in chronic heart failure.

2. Hypotension

Hypotension due to complications of STEMI is characterized by systolic blood pressure that falls and stays below 90 mmHg. This condition can be caused by heart failure, but can also be due to hypovolemia, rhythm disturbances, or mechanical complications.

3. Lung Congestion

Pulmonary congestion due to complications of STEMI is characterized by wet lung crackles in the basal segments, decreased arterial oxygen saturation, pulmonary congestion on chest X-ray and clinical improvement to diuretics, as well as vasodilator therapy.

4. Arrhythmia

Heart attacks can affect the heart’s electrical system. This condition can cause an irregular heartbeat (arrhythmia). If left alone, arrhythmias can develop into more severe complications. In some cases, this heart disorder also has the potential to result in death.

5. Cardiac arrest

Untreated STEMI has the potential to make the heart stop beating. As a result, blood flow to the brain, organs and limbs is disrupted. Permanent damage to the brain, organs and limbs becomes inevitable.

In severe cases, cardiac arrest has the risk of causing death to those who experience it. The risk of complications can be reduced by getting treatment as early as possible. Therefore, immediately consult a doctor if you experience symptoms of a heart attack.

How to Overcome STEMI

Various ways can be done to overcome this type of heart attack. The doctor may recommend surgery, medication, or a combination of the two. Some of the usual treatment is as follows.

1. Cardiac PCI

Cardiac PCI is a procedure to widen blocked arteries. You do this by inserting a catheter with a balloon into a blood vessel. The balloon is then inflated inside the blocked blood vessel. That way, the size of the arteries becomes wider and blood flow can return smoothly. During this procedure, the doctor may place a stent. These tiny tubes will keep the arteries open and prevent them from getting blocked again.

2. Heart Bypass Surgery

Heart bypass surgery is performed by creating a new path for blood flow near a blocked artery. Generally, these pathways are made using healthy blood vessels or synthetic materials.

3. Administration of Drugs

To treat and prevent a recurrence of a heart attack, a doctor may prescribe some medications. The following types of drugs are commonly given to patients with a history of heart attack.

• Beta-blockers : relaxes the heart and slows down the heart rate;
• Statins: lower cholesterol levels in the blood by inhibiting its production in the liver;
• Antiplatelet: prevent blood clots in the plaque that builds up in the arteries;
• Pain relief: relieves pain from a heart attack;
• Nitroglycerin: widens blood vessels so blood can flow again smoothly.

STEMI Prevention Efforts

STEMI can affect anyone. To reduce the risk of getting this type of heart attack, you should start adopting a healthy lifestyle from now on. Here are some simple steps to prevent it.

• Maintain an ideal weight;
• Consumption of balanced nutritious food and reducing sugar, salt and fatty foods;
• Exercise regularly, at least 30 minutes per day;
• Not smoking, either actively or passively;
• Treating factors that can increase the risk.

In addition to the actions above, make sure to always carry out regular health checks. That way, the disease can be detected and treated before it gets worse.

Don’t Delay Medical Help

Every type of heart attack requires medical attention as soon as possible, even if the symptoms don’t really look like problems in the heart. NSTEMI and CAS also require the same treatment, although STEMI is the most dangerous heart attack.

The first treatment that will be given to people who have a heart attack includes:

• Aspirin to prevent blood clots;
• Nitroglycerin to relieve chest pain and improve blood flow;
• Oxygen therapy.

After passing further tests and confirming that you have had a heart attack, you will be given a prescription for more specific treatment or other treatments such as surgery if needed. Some prescription medications are more specific for heart attack sufferers, namely:

• Clot busters to break up blockages in arteries;
• Blood pressure regulator drugs to reduce the work of the heart and control blood pressure.
• Blood thinners to prevent blockages.
• Statins to lower bad cholesterol (LDL) levels.

Of course, the doctor will provide treatment taking into account a person’s medical history and lifestyle. If all this time his habit is eating carelessly, actively smoking, or being sedentary, that is also included in the doctor’s consideration.

Other Types of Heart Attacks

A heart attack is a form of acute coronary syndrome , which is a condition when the arteries that carry blood, nutrients, and oxygen are blocked. As a result, the heart does not get enough blood and a heart attack occurs.

Some other types of heart attacks, namely:

1. NSTEMI

In contrast to STEMI, an attack of NSTEMI means only partial blockage of the coronary arteries. That’s why when recorded in an electrocardiogram, there is no significant change in the ST segment. However, through coronary angiography it can be seen how large and which part of the blood vessel is blocked.

NSTEMI doesn’t carry the risk of damaging the heart like STEMI, but it’s still a serious condition. The doctor will also do blood tests to see if there are elevated levels of troponin, a protein molecule that is released into the bloodstream when the heart muscle is damaged.

2. Coronary Artery Spasm

Coronary artery spasm is also known as a “silent heart attack” or angina. Sufferers experience blockage of blood vessels due to excess fat deposits, so that blood flow to the heart muscle can be obstructed. Usually, people experience CAS symptoms such as muscle pain or digestive discomfort and don’t think that what is happening includes the symptoms of a heart attack. This happens because one of the heart arteries becomes tighter, so that blood flow is drastically reduced.

Only a medical examination with a doctor can show whether a person has CAS or not. Furthermore, the condition of unstable angina in CAS may not necessarily be relieved by simply resting or taking regular medication. If the blood flow to the heart is not smooth, there can be a lack of oxygen and even death.

Important Things about STEMI

• Heart attack with a high risk of complications and death.
• The cause of STEMI is a complete blockage in the LAD, RCA, or LCX arteries.
• Complications such as arrhythmia, heart failure, and cardiac arrest if not treated immediately.
• As many as 2.5–10% of sufferers die within 30 days after a heart attack.
• It can be treated with surgery, medication, or a combination of both.
• It can be prevented by adopting a healthy lifestyle.

—

That’s an article related to “Symptoms Causes of STEMI: Diagnosis, Prevention, and Treatment” that you can use to complete various jobs. If there are suggestions, questions and criticisms, please write in the comments box below. Also share this article on social media accounts so that your friends can also get the same benefits.

SWOT Analysis Yourself – Usually, businesses and strategies need a SWOT analysis to find out their weaknesses and strengths. However, the use of SWOT analysis can also be applied to know yourself more deeply.

That way, Sinaumed’s can see the weaknesses and strengths within. So, in the future, you can determine the best way to realize your goals or hopes. This analysis is generally carried out by making tables according to the category.

To find out more about SWOT analysis yourself, Sinaumed’s can listen to the explanations that have been summarized from various pages as follows.

SWOT Analysis of Yourself

SWOT analysis is an analysis technique applied to evaluate strengths , weaknesses , opportunities and threats . SWOT analysis is usually applied to analyze business and strategy.

However, the function of the SWOT analysis can also be used to get to know yourself more deeply. This method is called a personal SWOT analysis or personal SWOT analysis.

In a company, SWOT analysis is used to analyze the company’s growth along with the benchmarks of its success. Meanwhile, in a project, SWOT analysis is used to determine the level of performance of a project based on the initial projection.

For example, SWOT analysis is used to plan new features or products, formulate social media strategies or online advertising. You do this by analyzing the factors in the SWOT analysis. So, you can design a strategy that can maximize the benefits that will be obtained.

SWOT analysis can be done not only for business, projects. And strategy. However, it can also be used for self-analysis. When Sinaumed’s knows himself, he will know the weaknesses and strengths he has.

That way, it will be easier to correct any deficiencies while optimizing the strengths you have. It is also useful for the process of socializing and facilitating communication with others.

SWOT analysis is an analysis that occurs on internal and external factors in facing challenges or threats in the future. Thus, strategies have been prepared to face all kinds of challenges and obstacles in realizing their hopes or dreams.

SWOT analysis was introduced by Albert Humphrey in the 1960s. Initially, SWOT analysis was used to evaluate an individual’s strategic position in an organization. Meanwhile, a SWOT analysis is done to get to know a person’s personality better.

Launching from the Ruangkarya.id page, the SWOT analysis itself has the following objectives.

1. Self-SWOT analysis is used to determine one’s own strengths and abilities. These advantages are then maximized and made into plus points for yourself and can be put to good use.
2. In addition to knowing strengths, a SWOT analysis yourself can also evaluate a person’s strengths or weaknesses. These deficiencies become evaluation material not to focus on deficiencies, but to improve and find solutions.
3. SWOT analysis yourself can look for opportunities or opportunities that you have. Opportunities or opportunities are obtained from observations of one’s own strengths.
4. Self-SWOT analysis can be used to identify existing threats or challenges. Often these threats can become obstacles. But it can be considered as a challenge for individuals.

Elements in a SWOT Analysis of Yourself

SWOT analysis consists of Strength (S), Weakness (W), Opportunity (O), and Threat (T). The following describes the four aspects.

1. Strengths or Strengths

Strengths in SWOT analysis itself provides an overview of one’s strengths and differences with others. This point is an important thing related to one’s expertise.

2. Weaknesses or Weaknesses

Weakness becomes an obstacle to self-success. Therefore, when a weakness has been identified, it will be able to plan a strategy to minimize the weakness as a loss or obstacle.

3. Opportunities or Opportunities

Opportunities or opportunities based on favorable external factors that are able to provide competitive advantage for oneself.

Threats refer to factors that provide potential harm to oneself. Threats also have the potential to eliminate strengths, lose roles, and opportunities. So, you have to be alert as early as possible to design the right strategy.

How to Use a SWOT Analysis of Yourself

Launching from the Ruangkarya.id page, the first step in analyzing your own SWOT is to make a table. Then, draw four boxes, the top two boxes are S (s strengths ) and W ( weaknesses ), then at the bottom are O ( opportunities ) and T ( threats ).

Then fill in each column with self-describing answers. Here are some questions that can be used to write about yourself.

1. Strength

Here are some questions from the element of strength.

• What advantages do I have? These advantages can be related to education, skills, connections, and certification.
• What habits do I have and can they contribute?
• What personal resources do I have?
• What accomplishments can you be proud of?
• What values ​​do I believe in myself?
• What do other people see as my strengths?
• What talents do I have?
• What makes me different from other people?

2. Weaknesses

Here are some questions from the element of weakness.

• What are my bad habits?
• What makes me feel down?
• What things do I fear or avoid?
• How do people think about my weakness?
• What are the things that you are not good at and that you still lack?

3. Opportunities

Here are some questions from the element of opportunity.

• What can I do to develop or add skills?
• What can I give to other people with the skills I have?
• What jobs are available with my skills?
• What technologies can I master so that they can be used more widely?
• Do I have a positive environment?
• Do I have a wide network of friends?

4. Threats

Here are some questions from the threat element.

• What obstacles am I facing right now?
• What are my competitors or competitors doing?
• Are there any technological changes or system deficiencies that could threaten my position?
• Are there any weaknesses in me that could cause threats not to progress?

Example of a SWOT Analysis of Yourself

Launching from the Ruangkarya.id and Kumparan.com pages, the following is an example of a SWOT analysis yourself.

1. Example I

strength · Graduated cum laude  · Have a lot of organizational experience · Confident and dependable · Honest · Never give up · Likes to learn new things	Weaknesses · Afraid to step · Doubtful · Overthinking Likes to procrastinate work · Do not have a certificate of expertise
Opportunity · Still have the opportunity to upgrade skills through online  training · Read a lot of books · Broaden  the network	Threats · Peers who look more qualified and skilled · Limited time Weaknesses that hinder the process from developing, such as being afraid to take a step and overthinking

 

2. Example II

strength · Quick to adapt · Responsive · Responsible · Honest · Discipline · Have integrity	Weaknesses · Get ​​tired quickly · Emotional · Easily bored · Insecure · Do not like to talk a lot
Opportunity · Have a lot of relationships · Has several communities	Threats · Financial condition · No mentors · Do not have emotional closeness and relate

 

3. Example III

strength Very high IQ · Bachelor · Clever writing · Healthy body	Weaknesses · Wasteful Likes to procrastinate work · Easily offended · Don’t have a job yet
Opportunity · Own a family side business · Lots of relationships	Threats Difficult in terms of the economy

The Benefits of Self-SWOT Analysis

SWOT analysis itself has various benefits as stated on the Deepublishstore.com page, as follows.

1. Knowing and Understanding the Power You Have

Knowing and understanding your strengths will make it easier for yourself to recognize your potential and see the opportunities that exist. For example, a student majoring in Psychology has good listening and observing skills.

This is a power that must be realized, utilized, developed, and maintained in order to realize its ideals. Or at least be able to graduate from college.

2. Seeing More Observant Opportunities

Opportunities can be created when Sinaumed’s is keen to see them and sort out the opportunities that exist. Sinaumed’s must choose the opportunity that is closest to or within the circle of abilities so that he can make the most of it.

For example, in choosing a career, Sinaumed’s must choose a job that is of interest and according to their abilities or strengths. With a SWOT analysis yourself can help Sinaumed’s to see opportunities more observant.

3. Know the Weaknesses that must be overcome

Self-SWOT analysis helps Sinaumed’s to map self-weaknesses. Then, the weakness is sought for a solution strategy. Weaknesses must be addressed immediately so that in the future they do not become a significant threat.

4. Knowing the Threats to be Faced

By conducting a SWOT analysis, Sinaumed’s can identify existing threats. Threats can hinder steps in realizing ideals. If a threat is not detected early, the risk of not being able to handle it is higher.

Not only that, the risk of failing in the middle of the road or failing to achieve the goals that have been prepared is also higher. Thus, SWOT analysis can help detect threats as early as possible so that they can develop strategies to deal with and minimize their negative impacts.